BSM3000 UG Part I-K

User’s Guide Part I
Bedside Monitor
BSM-3532/BSM-3552
BSM-3562/BSM-3572
BSM-3733/BSM-3753
BSM-3763/BSM-3773
BSM-3000 series
0614-904565K
In order to use this product safely and fully understand all its functions, make sure to read this manual before using the
product.
Keep this manual near the instrument or in the reach of the operator and refer to it whenever the operation is unclear.
This product stores personal patient information. Manage and operate the information appropriately.
Patient names on the screen shots and recording examples in this manual are fictional and any resemblance to any
person living or dead is purely coincidental.
The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
If you have any comments or suggestions on this manual, please contact us at: www.nihonkohden.com
Copyright Notice
The entire contents of this manual are copyrighted by Nihon Kohden. All rights are reserved. No part of this document
may be reproduced, stored, or transmitted in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopied, recorded,
or otherwise) without the prior written permission of Nihon Kohden.
Trademark
The mark printed on the SD card that is used in this instrument is a trademark. The company name and model name are
trademarks and registered trademarks of each company.
Contents 1
GENERAL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................. i 3

WARRANTY POLICY.......................................................................................................... ii
EMC RELATED CAUTION ..................................................................................................iii 4
Conventions Used in this Manual and Instrument............................................................... v
Warnings, Cautions and Notes.................................................................................. v 5
Text Conventions....................................................................................................... v
Explanations of the Symbols in This Manual and Instrument............................................. vi
6
Related Documentation.....................................................................................................viii
7
Safety Standards ..............................................................................................................viii
Safety Information..............................................................................................................viii
8
Periodic Inspection.............................................................................................................. ix
9
Section 1 General.................................................................................... 1.1 10

Introduction....................................................................................................................... 1.2
General................................................................................................................... 1.2 11
Applications.................................................................................................. 1.3
Features....................................................................................................... 1.3
Measurement Parameters and Applicable Units.......................................... 1.5
Composition...................................................................................................................... 1.7
Network Composition........................................................................................................ 1.8
Panel Description.............................................................................................................. 1.9
BSM-3532/BSM-3552/BSM-3562/BSM-3572 Bedside Monitor.............................. 1.9
Front Panel................................................................................................... 1.9
Left Side Panel............................................................................................. 1.9
Right Side Panel......................................................................................... 1.10
Rear Panel.................................................................................................. 1.12
BSM-3733/BSM-3753/BSM-3763/BSM-3773 Bedside Monitor............................ 1.13
Front Panel................................................................................................. 1.13
Left Side Panel........................................................................................... 1.13
Right Side Panel......................................................................................... 1.14
Rear Panel.................................................................................................. 1.16
Basic Operating Concepts.............................................................................................. 1.17
Screen Displays.................................................................................................... 1.17
Using Touch Screen Keys..................................................................................... 1.23
Keys on the Bedside Monitor................................................................................ 1.24
Using the Remote Control.................................................................................... 1.25
Using the MENU Window..................................................................................... 1.26
Section 2 Preparation............................................................................. 2.1

Preparation Flowchart....................................................................................................... 2.2
Installation Conditions....................................................................................................... 2.3
Inserting and Removing the Battery Pack........................................................................ 2.5
Battery Handling and Operation............................................................................. 2.5
User’s Guide Part I BSM-3000 C.1

CONTENTS
Safety Information........................................................................................ 2.5

Battery Pack Handling Procedures............................................................... 2.6
When Not Using the Monitor or Battery Pack............................................... 2.6
Preparing the Optional Recorder..................................................................................... 2.7
Installing the Recorder Module............................................................................... 2.7
Loading Recording Paper....................................................................................... 2.7
Preparing the Remote Control.......................................................................................... 2.9
Installing the Batteries............................................................................................ 2.9
Setting the Remote Control Channel.................................................................... 2.10
Attaching the Remote Control Channel Label to the Bedside Monitor................. 2.10
Assigning Functions to the Customized Keys....................................................... 2.10
Power.............................................................................................................................. 2.11
Connecting the Power Cord and Grounding the Monitor...................................... 2.11
Connecting the Power Cord........................................................................ 2.11
Grounding the Monitor................................................................................ 2.12
Turning the Power On........................................................................................... 2.12
Check Before Turning On the Power.......................................................... 2.12
Turning the Power On................................................................................. 2.13
Check After Turning On the Power and During Monitoring......................... 2.14
Power and Battery Status Indications................................................................... 2.15
When the “BATTERY WEAK” Message Appears....................................... 2.16
Charging the Battery Pack.......................................................................... 2.16
Monitor Status on Power Interruption................................................................... 2.17
Turning the Power Off........................................................................................... 2.18
Check After/Before Turning the Power Off.................................................. 2.18
Section 3 Necessary Settings Before Monitoring................................ 3.1

Changing Date and Time.................................................................................................. 3.2
Changing Sound Volume Settings.................................................................................... 3.3
Changing the Screen Brightness...................................................................................... 3.4
Changing Waveform Display Settings............................................................................... 3.5
Admitting/Discharging Patient........................................................................................... 3.7
Displaying the ADMIT DISCHARGE Window......................................................... 3.7
Stored Data Status and Screen Transition for Admitting Patient............................. 3.8
Selecting Patient Type.......................................................................................... 3.10
Entering the Patient Information........................................................................... 3.11
Entering the Patient ID............................................................................... 3.11
Entering the Patient Name......................................................................... 3.12
Entering the Date of Birth and Age............................................................ 3.14
Entering the Height and Weight.................................................................. 3.15
Entering the Gender................................................................................... 3.16
Entering the Pacemaker Use...................................................................... 3.16
Admitting a Patient.......................................................................................................... 3.18
Discharging a Patient...................................................................................................... 3.20
Suspended Alarms After Admission or Discharge................................................ 3.22
C.2 User’s Guide Part I BSM-3000

CONTENTS
Section 4 Home Screen.......................................................................... 4.1 1

Safety Precautions for Monitoring..................................................................................... 4.3
Using an Electrosurgical Unit................................................................................. 4.3 2
Using a Defibrillator................................................................................................ 4.3
Overview........................................................................................................................... 4.4
3
Home Screen.......................................................................................................... 4.4
4
Review Windows..................................................................................................... 4.4
Sync Sound............................................................................................................ 4.4
5
Adjusting the Sync and Alarm Sound Volume........................................................ 4.4
Changing Settings and Performing Other Tasks During Monitoring....................... 4.4 6
Site Mode............................................................................................................... 4.5
Recording/Printing on the Home Screen................................................................ 4.5 7
Interbed Monitoring................................................................................................. 4.5
Home Screen.................................................................................................................... 4.6 8
Settings for the Home Screen ................................................................................ 4.7
Waveform Sweep Mode and Speed............................................................. 4.7 9
Waveform Display on the Home Screen....................................................... 4.7
Pacing Mark Position on the ECG Waveform............................................... 4.7 10
ST Waveform and Reference ST Recall Waveform Display on the
Home Screen On or Off................................................................................ 4.7 11
Blood Pressure Waveform Display Mode..................................................... 4.8
IBP Waveform Display Area on the Home Screen....................................... 4.8
PPV or SPV Display on the Home Screen................................................... 4.8
Pulse Rate Display on the Home Screen..................................................... 4.8
Current Average CO and PCWP Values Display on the Home Screen........ 4.9
Trendgraph/OCRG Display on the Home Screen On or Off......................... 4.9
Scale Setting for the Trendgraph on the Home Screen................................ 4.9
Parameter Colors......................................................................................... 4.9
Waveform Sensitivity.................................................................................... 4.9
Cascade ECG Waveform.............................................................................. 4.9
Displaying Other Windows from the Home Screen............................................... 4.10
Displaying OCRG............................................................................................................ 4.11
Freezing Waveforms....................................................................................................... 4.12
Using Sleep Mode.......................................................................................................... 4.13
Turning Sleep Mode On........................................................................................ 4.14
Turning Sleep Mode Off........................................................................................ 4.14
Displaying the LARGE NUMERICS Screen.................................................................... 4.15
Using the Timer............................................................................................................... 4.18
Section 5 Alarm Function....................................................................... 5.1

Overview of Alarms........................................................................................................... 5.4
What is an Alarm.................................................................................................... 5.5
Alarm Level............................................................................................................. 5.5
Alarm Escalation.......................................................................................... 5.5
Alarm Priority.......................................................................................................... 5.6
Alarm Sound/Alarm Indicator....................................................................... 5.6
Alarm Messages on the Screen................................................................... 5.6
Silencing/Suspending Alarms................................................................................. 5.6

CONTENTS
Alarm Master.......................................................................................................... 5.7

Automatic Recording.............................................................................................. 5.7
Alarm Setting.......................................................................................................... 5.7
Canceling the Technical Alarm............................................................................... 5.8
Adjusting Alarm Sound Volume.............................................................................. 5.8
Alarm Activation After Power On............................................................................ 5.9
ALARM HISTORY Window..................................................................................... 5.9
Interbed Alarm........................................................................................................ 5.9
Alarm Types.................................................................................................................... 5.10
Vital Signs Alarms................................................................................................ 5.10
Arrhythmia Alarms................................................................................................ 5.10
Technical Alarms.................................................................................................. 5.11
ECG Related Alarms.................................................................................. 5.11
CO2 Related Alarms................................................................................... 5.11
Microcap®/Micropod™ Related Alarms...................................................... 5.12
SpO2 Related Alarms................................................................................. 5.12
NIBP Related Alarms................................................................................. 5.13
IBP Related Alarms.................................................................................... 5.13
Temperature Related Alarms...................................................................... 5.13
BIS Related Alarms.................................................................................... 5.14
CO Related Alarms.................................................................................... 5.14
Gas Related Alarms................................................................................... 5.14
VENT Related Alarms................................................................................ 5.15
TOF Related Alarms................................................................................... 5.15
CCO (APCO) Related Alarms.................................................................... 5.15
CCO Related Alarms.................................................................................. 5.16
PiCCO Related Alarm................................................................................ 5.16
FLOW/Paw Related Alarms........................................................................ 5.16
EEG Related Alarms.................................................................................. 5.16
tcPO2/tcPCO2 Related Alarms.................................................................... 5.17
rSO2 Related Alarm.................................................................................... 5.17
Other Alarms........................................................................................................ 5.17
Messages............................................................................................................. 5.18
ECG Related Messages............................................................................. 5.18
Respiration Related Messages.................................................................. 5.18
CO2 Related Messages.............................................................................. 5.18
SpO2 Related Messages............................................................................ 5.19
NIBP Related Messages............................................................................ 5.19
IBP Related Message................................................................................. 5.20
BIS Related Messages............................................................................... 5.20
CO Related Messages............................................................................... 5.20
Gas Related Messages.............................................................................. 5.21
CCO (APCO) Related Messages............................................................... 5.21
FLOW/Paw Related Messages................................................................... 5.21
EEG Related Messages............................................................................. 5.22
Microcap®/MicropodTM Related Messages.................................................. 5.22
Other Messages......................................................................................... 5.22
Alarm Indications............................................................................................................ 5.23
Overview............................................................................................................... 5.23

CONTENTS
Individual Alarm Indications.................................................................................. 5.24 1

Vital Signs Alarms...................................................................................... 5.25
Arrhythmia Alarms...................................................................................... 5.30 2
Technical Alarms........................................................................................ 5.30
Other Alarms.............................................................................................. 5.37 3
Interbed Alarms.......................................................................................... 5.37
Alarm Control Marks............................................................................................. 5.38 4
Individual Vital Signs Alarm Off Marks....................................................... 5.38
Flow of Alarm Function......................................................................................... 5.39 5
Silencing and Suspending Alarms.................................................................................. 5.40
Overview............................................................................................................... 5.40
6
Silencing an Alarm..................................................................................... 5.40
7
Suspending Alarms.................................................................................... 5.40
Silencing Alarms After Alarm Occurrence............................................................ 5.43
8
Silencing an Alarm..................................................................................... 5.43
Canceling Alarm Silence............................................................................ 5.43 9
Suspending Alarms Before Alarm Occurrence..................................................... 5.43
Suspending Alarms.................................................................................... 5.43 10
Suspending All Alarms Indefinitely............................................................. 5.44
Suspending All Alarms and NIBP STAT and Auto Measurement 11
Indefinitely.................................................................................................. 5.47
Turning Automatic Alarm Recording On/Off.................................................................... 5.49
Setting Alarms................................................................................................................ 5.50
Overview............................................................................................................... 5.50
Alarm Limits Ranges............................................................................................ 5.50
Vital Signs Alarms...................................................................................... 5.51
Arrhythmia Alarms...................................................................................... 5.57
Setting Vital Signs Alarms Individually.................................................................. 5.59
Automatically Setting All Upper and Lower Alarm Limits...................................... 5.60
Automatic Setting Range............................................................................ 5.60
Setting All Vital Signs Alarms to a Preset Pattern (Alarm Master)........................ 5.62
Setting Arrhythmia Alarms Individually................................................................. 5.63
Setting All Arrhythmia Alarms to a Preset Pattern (Alarm Master)....................... 5.65
Interbed Alarm................................................................................................................ 5.67
Section 6 Review Windows.................................................................... 6.1

General............................................................................................................................. 6.3
Review Recording................................................................................................... 6.4
Event Bar.......................................................................................................................... 6.5
Changing the Displayed Event Types..................................................................... 6.6
Changing the Time Scale of the Event Bar and Review Window............................ 6.6
Scrolling the Event Bar and Review Window.......................................................... 6.7
Trend Window................................................................................................................... 6.8
GRAPH 1, GRAPH 2, GRAPH 3 Page................................................................... 6.8
Displaying the GRAPH 1, GRAPH 2 or GRAPH 3 Page............................ 6.10
Selecting Parameters for the Trendgraph Display....................................... 6.11
Changing the Trendgraph Scale................................................................. 6.12
Changing the Trendgraph Display Format.................................................. 6.13

CONTENTS
Recording the Trendgraph.......................................................................... 6.14

Printing the Trendgraph.............................................................................. 6.15
TABLE 1, TABLE 2, TABLE 3 Page....................................................................... 6.17
Displaying the TABLE 1, TABLE 2 or TABLE 3 Page.................................. 6.18
Scrolling the Trend Table............................................................................. 6.19
Selecting Parameters for the Trend Table Display...................................... 6.19
Selecting the Measurement Interval........................................................... 6.20
Recording a Trend Table............................................................................. 6.20
Printing a Trend Table................................................................................. 6.21
NIBP TREND Page............................................................................................... 6.23
Displaying the NIBP TREND Page............................................................. 6.24
Scrolling the NIBP Trend Table................................................................... 6.25
Selecting Parameters for the NIBP Trend Display...................................... 6.25
Recording a NIBP Trend Table.................................................................... 6.26
Printing a NIBP Trend Table........................................................................ 6.27
HEMO TREND Page............................................................................................ 6.29
Displaying the HEMO TREND Page........................................................... 6.29
Scrolling the Hemodynamics Table............................................................. 6.30
Explanation of the Hemodynamics Table.................................................... 6.31
Recording a Hemodynamics Table............................................................. 6.32
Printing a Hemodynamics Table................................................................. 6.33
LUNG TREND Page............................................................................................. 6.34
Displaying the LUNG TREND Page........................................................... 6.34
Explanation of the Lung Trend Table........................................................... 6.35
Recording the Lung Trend Table................................................................. 6.36
Printing a Lung Trend Table........................................................................ 6.37
Arrhythmia Recall Window.............................................................................................. 6.38
General................................................................................................................. 6.38
Arrhythmia List............................................................................................ 6.38
Displaying the Arrhythmia Recall Window............................................................ 6.40
Selecting the Arrhythmia Types to be Saved as a Recall File............................... 6.41
Scrolling the Arrhythmia Recall Files.................................................................... 6.41
Displaying the Actual Size Waveform of the Selected Arrhythmia Recall File...... 6.42
Arrhythmia Waveform Annotation............................................................... 6.42
Recording or Printing the Arrhythmia Recall Waveform........................................ 6.42
Recording on the ARRHYTH HISTORY Window....................................... 6.43
Printing on the ARRHYTH HISTORY Window............................................ 6.44
Recording on the Actual Size ECG Waveform Window.............................. 6.45
Printing on the Actual Size ECG Waveform Window.................................. 6.46
Alarm History Window.................................................................................................... 6.47
Displaying the ALARM HISTORY Window........................................................... 6.47
Scrolling the Alarm History Files.......................................................................... 6.48
Recording the Alarm History File.......................................................................... 6.49
Full Disclosure Window................................................................................................... 6.50
Displaying the FULL DISC Window...................................................................... 6.50
Scrolling the Full Disclosure Waveform................................................................ 6.52
Selecting the Parameters to be Saved for Full Disclosure.................................... 6.53
Recording or Printing the Full Disclosure Waveform............................................ 6.54
Recording the Full Disclosure Waveform.................................................... 6.54

CONTENTS
Printing the Full Disclosure Waveform........................................................ 6.55 1

Recording or Printing the Enlarged ECG Waveform............................................. 6.57
Recording the Enlarged ECG Waveform.................................................... 6.57 2
Printing the Enlarged ECG Waveform........................................................ 6.58
ST Level Recall Window................................................................................................. 6.60 3
Displaying the ST Window.................................................................................... 6.61
Scrolling the ST Level Recall File......................................................................... 6.62 4
Displaying the ST Point......................................................................................... 6.62
Displaying the ST Recall Waveform on the Home Screen.................................... 6.63 5
Saving as Reference ST Recall File..................................................................... 6.64
Displaying the Reference ST Recall Waveform on the Home Screen.................. 6.65
6
Printing the ST Level Recall File........................................................................... 6.66
7
OCRG Window............................................................................................................... 6.68
Displaying the OCRG Window.............................................................................. 6.68
8
Selecting the OCRG Trendgraph Type.................................................................. 6.69
Changing the Trendgraph Scale for Heart Rate and SpO2 and Sensitivity for 9
Respiration........................................................................................................... 6.70
Recording or Printing the OCRG Trend................................................................ 6.71 10
Recording the OCRG Trend....................................................................... 6.71
Printing the OCRG Trend............................................................................ 6.72 11
Section 7 12 Lead Analysis/12 Lead Windows..................................... 7.1

12 Lead Analysis Window................................................................................................. 7.2
Preparation Flowchart............................................................................................ 7.2
Displaying the 12 LEAD ANALYSIS Window.......................................................... 7.3
Entering the Patient’s Date of Birth and Gender..................................................... 7.4
Displaying the PATIENT INFO Window........................................................ 7.4
Entering the Date of Birth and Age.............................................................. 7.4
Entering the Gender..................................................................................... 7.4
Performing 12 Lead ECG Interpretation................................................................. 7.5
Recording or Printing the 12 Lead ECG Waveform................................................ 7.7
Recording the 12 Lead ECG Waveforms...................................................... 7.7
Printing the 12 Lead ECG Waveforms.......................................................... 7.8
12 LEAD Window.............................................................................................................. 7.9
Displaying the 12 LEAD Window............................................................................ 7.9
12 LEAD Page...................................................................................................... 7.10
Scrolling the 12 Lead Data File.................................................................. 7.10
Recording the 12 Lead Data...................................................................... 7.10
ANALYSIS WAVE Page........................................................................................ 7.11
Recording or Printing the 12 Lead Waveform....................................................... 7.12
Recording the 12 Lead Waveform.............................................................. 7.12
Printing the 12 Lead Waveform.................................................................. 7.13
REPORT Page..................................................................................................... 7.14
Recording or Printing the 12 Lead Interpretation Results.................................... 7.14
Recording the 12 Lead Interpretation Results............................................ 7.14
Printing the 12 Lead Interpretation Results................................................ 7.15
AVERAGE WAVE Page........................................................................................ 7.16
Printing the Averaged ECGs...................................................................... 7.16

CONTENTS
Section 8 Drug/Lung Function Windows.............................................. 8.1

DRUG Window.................................................................................................................. 8.2
Drug Titration Initial Settings................................................................................... 8.3
Flow Rate Equations.............................................................................................. 8.3
Displaying the DRUG Window.......................................................................................... 8.5
Selecting the Drug............................................................................................................ 8.7
Assigning a Drug Name and Dosage Unit to DRUG A to D.............................................. 8.8
Changing the Settings.................................................................................................... 8.10
Changing the Drug Amount, Solution Amount, Dosage, Flow Rate and
Weight................................................................................................................... 8.10
Changing the Dose Step...................................................................................... 8.11
Unit and Setting Range........................................................................................ 8.11
Drug Amount, Dosage and Step................................................................ 8.11
Solution Amount, Flow Rate and Weight.................................................... 8.12
LUNG FUNCTION Window............................................................................................. 8.13
Displaying the LUNG FUNCTION Window........................................................... 8.13
Entering the Data.................................................................................................. 8.15
Explanation of the DATA ENTRY Items...................................................... 8.15
Checking the Calculation Results......................................................................... 8.16
Explanation of the CALCULATION RESULTS............................................ 8.16
Adding the Calculation Results to the LUNG TREND Table................................. 8.17
Displaying the LUNG TREND Table...................................................................... 8.17
Recording the Calculation Results and Entered Data.......................................... 8.18
Section 9 Interbed Window.................................................................... 9.1

Registering Interbed Beds................................................................................................ 9.3
Removing an Interbed Bed..................................................................................... 9.3
Displaying the Numeric Data of All Interbed Beds............................................................ 9.4
Displaying the Interbed Bed Data..................................................................................... 9.5
Interbed Alarm.................................................................................................................. 9.7
Interbed Alarm Setting............................................................................................ 9.8
Section 10 Recording............................................................................. 10.1

Overview of Recording................................................................................................... 10.2
Recording Modes................................................................................................. 10.3
Manual Waveform Recording/Printing........................................................ 10.5
Recording/Printing on the 12 LEAD ANALYSIS Window............................ 10.5
Recording/Printing on the Review Windows other than 12 Lead
Window....................................................................................................... 10.5
Recording/Printing on the 12 LEAD Window.............................................. 10.5
Recording on the LUNG FUNCTION Window............................................ 10.5
Recording/Printing OCRG.......................................................................... 10.5
Recording on the CO Window.................................................................... 10.6
Recording on the TOF Window................................................................... 10.6
Recording on the CCO Window................................................................. 10.6
Recording on the FLOW Window............................................................... 10.6
Recording on the EEG Window.................................................................. 10.6
CONTENTS
Recording on the ANALOG Window.......................................................... 10.6 1

Periodic Recording..................................................................................... 10.7
Alarm Recording......................................................................................... 10.8 2
Recording Mode Annotations............................................................................. 10.10
Recording Priority............................................................................................... 10.11 3
Recording Sensitivity.......................................................................................... 10.11
Recording Speed................................................................................................ 10.11 4
Feeding the Paper after Recording..................................................................... 10.11
Recording Related Message.............................................................................. 10.12 5
Recorded/Printed Data....................................................................................... 10.12
Changing the Recording Speed.................................................................................... 10.13
6
Changing the Recording Pattern.................................................................................. 10.14
7
Manually Recording/Printing Waveforms...................................................................... 10.15
Recording Waveforms on the Optional Recorder............................................... 10.15
8
Recording Waveforms on the Bedside Monitor with No Recorder...................... 10.16
Manual Printing on the Network Printer.............................................................. 10.16 9
Setting Periodic Recording........................................................................................... 10.17
Changing Settings for Automatic Periodic Recording......................................... 10.18 10
Printing on a Network Printer........................................................................................ 10.19
11
Section 11 Reference.............................................................................. 11.1

Clock Accuracy............................................................................................................... 11.2
Periodical Replacement Schedule.................................................................................. 11.3
Repair Parts Availability Policy........................................................................................ 11.3

GENERAL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS
This device is intended for use only by qualified medical personnel.
Use only Nihon Kohden approved products with this device. Use of non-approved products
or in a non-approved manner may affect the performance specifications of the device. This
includes, but is not limited to, batteries, recording paper, pens, extension cables, electrode
leads, input boxes and AC power.
Please read these precautions thoroughly before attempting to operate the instrument.
1. To safely and effectively use the instrument, its operation must be fully understood.
2. When installing or storing the instrument, take the following precautions.

(1) Avoid moisture or contact with water, extreme atmospheric pressure, excessive humidity and temperatures, poorly
ventilated areas, and dust, saline or sulphuric air.
(2) Place the instrument on an even, level floor. Avoid vibration and mechanical shock, even during transport.
(3) Avoid placing in an area where chemicals are stored or where there is danger of gas leakage.
(4) The power line source to be applied to the instrument must correspond in frequency and voltage to product
specifications, and have sufficient current capacity.
(5) Choose a room where a proper grounding facility is available.
3. Before Operation
(1) Check that the instrument is in perfect operating order.
(2) Check that the instrument is grounded properly.
(3) Check that all cords are connected properly.
(4) Pay extra attention when the instrument is combined with other instruments to avoid misdiagnosis or other
problems.
(5) All circuitry used for direct patient connection must be doubly checked.
(6) Check that battery level is acceptable and battery condition is good when using battery-operated models.
4. During Operation
(1) Both the instrument and the patient must receive continual, careful attention.
(2) Turn power off or remove electrodes and/or transducers when necessary to assure the patient’s safety.
(3) Avoid direct contact between the instrument housing and the patient.
5. To Shutdown After Use

(1) Turn power off with all controls returned to their original positions.
(2) Remove the cords gently; do not use force to remove them.
(3) Clean the instrument together with all accessories for their next use.
6. The instrument must receive expert, professional attention for maintenance and repairs. When the instrument is
not functioning properly, it should be clearly marked to avoid operation while it is out of order.
7. The instrument must not be altered or modified in any way.
8. Maintenance and Inspection

(1) The instrument and specified parts must undergo regular maintenance inspection at the interval which is specified
after the GENERAL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS section.
(2) If stored for extended periods without being used, make sure prior to operation that the instrument is in perfect
operating condition.
User’s Guide Part I BSM-3000 i

(3) Technical information such as parts list, descriptions, calibration instructions or other information is available for
qualified user technical personnel upon request from your Nihon Kohden representative.
9. When the instrument is used with an electrosurgical instrument, pay careful attention to the application and/or
location of electrodes and/or transducers to avoid possible burn to the patient.
10. When the instrument is used with a defibrillator, make sure that the instrument is protected against defibrillator
discharge. If not, remove patient cables and/or transducers from the instrument to avoid possible damage.
WARRANTY POLICY
Nihon Kohden Corporation (NKC) shall warrant its products against all defects in materials and workmanship for one year
from the date of delivery. However, consumable materials such as recording paper, ink, stylus and battery are excluded
from the warranty.
NKC or its authorized agents will repair or replace any products which prove to be defective during the warranty period,
provided these products are used as prescribed by the operating instructions given in the operator’s and service manuals.
No other party is authorized to make any warranty or assume liability for NKC’s products. NKC will not recognize any
other warranty, either implied or in writing. In addition, service, technical modification or any other product change
performed by someone other than NKC or its authorized agents without prior consent of NKC may be cause for voiding
this warranty.
Defective products or parts must be returned to NKC or its authorized agents, along with an explanation of the failure.
Shipping costs must be pre-paid.
This warranty does not apply to products that have been modified, disassembled, reinstalled or repaired without Nihon
Kohden approval or which have been subjected to neglect or accident, damage due to accident, fire, lightning, vandalism,
water or other casualty, improper installation or application, or on which the original identification marks have been
removed.
In the USA and Canada other warranty policies may apply.
CAUTION
United States law restricts this product to sale by or on the order of a physician.
ii User’s Guide Part I BSM-3000

EMC RELATED CAUTION
This equipment and/or system complies with IEC 60601-1-2 International Standard for electromagnetic
compatibility for medical electrical equipment and/or system. However, an electromagnetic environment that
exceeds the limits or levels stipulated in IEC 60601-1-2, can cause harmful interference to the equipment
and/or system or cause the equipment and/or system to fail to perform its intended function or degrade
its intended performance. Therefore, during the operation of the equipment and/or system, if there is any
undesired deviation from its intended operational performance, you must avoid, identify and resolve the
adverse electromagnetic effect before continuing to use the equipment and/or system.
The following describes some common interference sources and remedial actions:
1. Strong electromagnetic interference from a nearby emitter source such as an authorized radio station
or cellular phone:
Install the equipment and/or system at another location. Keep the emitter source such as cellular phone
away from the equipment and/or system, or turn off the cellular phone.
2. Radio-frequency interference from other equipment through the AC power supply of the equipment
and/or system:
Identify the cause of this interference and if possible remove this interference source. If this is not
possible, use a different power supply.
3. Effect of direct or indirect electrostatic discharge:

Make sure all users and patients in contact with the equipment and/or system are free from direct or
indirect electrostatic energy before using it. A humid room can help lessen this problem.
4. Electromagnetic interference with any radio wave receiver such as radio or television:
If the equipment and/or system interferes with any radio wave receiver, locate the equipment and/or
system as far as possible from the radio wave receiver.
5. Interference of lightning:
When lightning occurs near the location where the equipment and/or system is installed, it may induce
an excessive voltage in the equipment and/or system. In such a case, disconnect the AC power cord
from the equipment and/or system and operate the equipment and/or system by battery power, or use
an uninterruptible power supply.
6. Use with other equipment:

When the equipment and/or system is adjacent to or stacked with other equipment, the equipment
and/or system may affect the other equipment. Before use, check that the equipment and/or system
operates normally with the other equipment.
7. Use of unspecified accessory, transducer and/or cable:

When an unspecified accessory, transducer and/or cable is connected to this equipment and/or system,
it may cause increased electromagnetic emission or decreased electromagnetic immunity. The specified
configuration of this equipment and/or system complies with the electromagnetic requirements with the
specified configuration. Only use this equipment and/or system with the specified configuration.
User’s Guide Part I BSM-3000 iii

Caution - continued
8. Use of unspecified configuration:
When the equipment and/or system is used with the unspecified system configuration different than
the configuration of EMC testing, it may cause increased electromagnetic emission or decreased
electromagnetic immunity. Only use this equipment and/or system with the specified configuration.
9. Measurement with excessive sensitivity:

The equipment and/or system is designed to measure bioelectrical signals with a specified sensitivity. If
the equipment and/or system is used with excessive sensitivity, artifact may appear by electromagnetic
interference and this may cause mis-diagnosis. When unexpected artifact appears, inspect the
surrounding electromagnetic conditions and remove this artifact source.
10. Use with radiation therapy equipment:

When the equipment and/or system is used in a radiotherapy room, it may cause failure or malfunction
due to electromagnetic radiation or corpuscular radiation. When you bring the equipment and/or system
into a radiotherapy room, constantly observe the operation. Prepare countermeasures in case of failure
or malfunction.
If the above suggested remedial actions do not solve the problem, consult your Nihon Kohden
representative for additional suggestions.
BSM-3000 complies with International Standard IEC 60601-1-2: 2001 and Amendment 1: 2004 which
requires CISPR11, Group 1, Class A. Class A EQUIPMENT is equipment suitable for use in industrial or
light industrial establishments and commercial environment.
WARNING
The bioelectric impedance measurement sensor of a minute ventilation rate-adaptive implantable
pacemaker may be affected by cardiac monitoring and diagnostic equipment which is connected to the
same patient. If this occurs, the pacemaker may pace at its maximum rate and give incorrect data to the
monitor or diagnostic equipment. If this occurs, disconnect the monitor or diagnostic equipment from the
patient or change the setting on the pacemaker by referring to the pacemaker’s manual. For more details,
contact your pacemaker representative or Nihon Kohden representative.
iv User’s Guide Part I BSM-3000

Conventions Used in this Manual and Instrument
Warnings, Cautions and Notes

Warnings, cautions and notes are used in this manual to alert or signal the reader to specific information.
WARNING
A warning alerts the user to possible injury or death associated with the use or misuse of the instrument.
CAUTION
A caution alerts the user to possible injury or problems with the instrument associated with its use or
misuse such as instrument malfunction, instrument failure, damage to the instrument, or damage to other
property.
NOTE
A note provides specific information, in the form of recommendations, prerequirements, alternative methods or
supplemental information.
Text Conventions
• Names of hard keys on the bedside monitor are enclosed in square brackets: [Menu]
• Messages that are displayed on the screen are enclosed in quotation marks: “CHECK ELECTRODES”
• Names of items that are displayed on the screen are enclosed in angle brackets: <SENSITIVITY>
User’s Guide Part I BSM-3000 v

Explanations of the Symbols in This Manual and Instrument
The following symbols found in this manual/instrument bear the respective descriptions as given.
On Panel
Symbol Description Symbol Description

“On” only for a part of instrument Network socket
“Off” only for a part of instrument Output terminal
Alternating current Equipotential terminal
Battery charging Attention, consult operator’s manual
Out of paper Serial number
Record Date of manufacture

BIS READY label (QE-910P BIS processor/
Alarm silence
BISx processor can be connected)
NIBP ZS ZS socket
NIBP interval cCSAus mark*
NIBP start MR unsafe*
NIBP stop Data input/output
Menu SD card slot
Home Defibrillation-proof Type CF applied part

Products marked with this symbol** comply
The CE mark** is a protected conformity mark with the European WEEE directive 2002/96/EC
of the European Community. Products marked and require separate waste collection. For Nihon
with this symbol comply with the requirements Kohden products marked with this symbol,
of the Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC. contact your Nihon Kohden representative for
disposal.
* Only apply to the Op No. 32A, 52A, 72A, 33A, 53A and 73A.
** Only apply to the Op No. 32K, 52K, 62K, 72K, 33K, 53K, 63K and 73K.
QI-372P Interface

Input/output terminal (Multi-link socket) External display (RGB socket)
Output terminal (ECG/BP OUT socket) Attention, consult operator’s manual
QI-373P Interface

Input/output terminal (Multi-link socket) Output terminal (Nurse call socket)
Serial interface (RS-232C socket) Attention, consult operator’s manual
vi User’s Guide Part I BSM-3000

QI-374P Interface

Input/output terminal (Multi-link socket and AA
External display (RGB socket)
socket)
AA AA socket Attention, consult operator’s manual
WS-371P Recorder Module

The CE mark is a protected conformity mark
Attention, consult operator’s manual
of the European Community. Products marked
with this symbol comply with the requirements
Serial number
of the Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC.
Date of manufacture
SB-671P Battery Pack

The CE mark is a protected conformity mark
of the European Community. Products marked
Recycle mark
with this symbol comply with the requirements
of the Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC.
Products marked with this symbol comply
with environmental protection use period of
Products marked with this symbol require
10 years according to the ST/J11364 “Marking
separate waste collection according to EU
for Control of Pollution Caused by Electronic
battery directive 2006/66/EC.
Information Products” of the People’s Republic
of China Electronic Industry Standard.
On screen

Alarm silence Accessing to SD card
Alarm suspended Checking SD card
All alarms off/vital sign alarm limit off SD card failure
Non-paced Adjust setting/Scroll data
QRS/pulse sync mark Zoom in/Zoom out
Respiration sync mark Left end/Right end

Battery status @ Touch panel calibration
Cascade display
User’s Guide Part I BSM-3000 vii

Related Documentation
The BSM-3000 series bedside monitor comes with the following manuals in addition to the operator’s manual.
Administrator’s Guide
Describes how to install the bedside monitor. It also explains about the password protected settings on the SYSTEM
SETUP window and SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen which only an administrator can change.
User’s Guide, Part I

Gives supplemental information on the operation of the bedside monitor.
User’s Guide, Part II

Describes the features and settings of the monitoring parameters.
Service Manual
Describes information on servicing the bedside monitor. Only qualified service personnel can service the bedside monitor.
Safety Standards
The safety standard of this bedside monitor is classified as follows:
Type of protection against electrical shock: CLASS I EQUIPMENT (AC Powered)
Internally Powered EQUIPMENT (BATTERY Powered)
Degree of protection against electrical shock
Defibrillator-proof type CF applied part:
ECG, respiration (impedance method), IBP, temperature, SpO2, CO2, NIBP,
BIS, CCO (APCO)
CF applied part: CO
Degree of protection against harmful ingress of water:
IPX1 (protected against vertically falling water drops)
Degree of safety of application in the presence of FLAMMABLE ANAESTHETIC MIXTURE WITH AIR, OR WITH
OXYGEN OR NITROUS OXIDE: Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of FLAMMABLE
ANAESTHETIC MIXTURE WITH AIR, OR WITH OXYGEN OR
NITROUS OXIDE
Mode of operation: CONTINUOUS OPERATION
Safety Information
This User’s Guide only contains safety information related to operation. Full information is in the BSM-3000 series
Bedside Monitor Operator’s Manual (code number: 0614-903771L).
viii User’s Guide Part I BSM-3000

Periodic Inspection
If the periodic inspection is not performed, degradation or loss of function may go unnoticed and lead to misdiagnosis.
Service personnel should perform the periodic inspection at least once every year. Make sure that the bedside monitor
operates properly and replace the consumables.
If you found abnormalities as a result of inspection and the bedside monitor is suspected to be faulty, attach an “Unusable”
or “Repair request” label to the bedside monitor and contact your Nihon Kohden representative. For inspection, refer to the
Service Manual.
User’s Guide Part I BSM-3000 ix

Section 1 General 1
Introduction........................................................................................................................................................... 1.2
General....................................................................................................................................................... 1.2
Applications...................................................................................................................................... 1.3
Features........................................................................................................................................... 1.3
Measurement Parameters and Applicable Units.............................................................................. 1.5
Composition.......................................................................................................................................................... 1.7
Network Composition........................................................................................................................................... 1.8
Panel Description................................................................................................................................................. 1.9
BSM-3532/BSM-3552/BSM-3562/BSM-3572 Bedside Monitor................................................................. 1.9
Front Panel....................................................................................................................................... 1.9
Left Side Panel................................................................................................................................. 1.9
Right Side Panel............................................................................................................................ 1.10
Rear Panel..................................................................................................................................... 1.12
BSM-3733/BSM-3753/BSM-3763/BSM-3773 Bedside Monitor............................................................... 1.13
Front Panel..................................................................................................................................... 1.13
Left Side Panel............................................................................................................................... 1.13
Right Side Panel............................................................................................................................ 1.14
Rear Panel..................................................................................................................................... 1.16
Basic Operating Concepts.................................................................................................................................. 1.17
Screen Displays....................................................................................................................................... 1.17
Using Touch Screen Keys......................................................................................................................... 1.23
Keys on the Bedside Monitor.................................................................................................................... 1.24
Using the Remote Control........................................................................................................................ 1.25
Using the MENU Window......................................................................................................................... 1.26
User’s Guide Part I BSM-3000 1.1

1. GENERAL
Introduction
General
The Life Scope VS BSM-3000 series bedside monitors are for one patient.
You can combine the monitor with other units and options depending on the
measurement parameters and use the monitor in a wide range of sites such as the
operating rooms and intensive care unit (ICU).
You can also connect this monitor to a network to communicate with a central
monitor and other bedside monitors.
The BSM-3532/3552/3562/3572 bedside monitor has a 12.1 inch TFT color

display, and BSM-3733/3753/3763/3773 has a 15 inch TFT color display. All
models can display 15 waveforms on the screen.
For simplicity, the suffix A/G/K will be omitted in this manual.
Illustrations in this manual are BSM-3733 bedside monitor unless otherwise

specified.
WARNING
Do not diagnose a patient based on only part of the monitoring data
on the bedside monitor or only on the data acquired by the bedside
monitor. Overall judgement must be performed by a physician who
understands the features, limitations and characteristics of the
bedside monitor by reading this user’s guide thoroughly and by
reading the biomedical signals acquired by other instruments.
WARNING
Do not use the same monitor for more than one patient at the same
time. Do not connect different sensors from different patients to the
same monitor.
NOTE
• Upgrade the monitor and each optional unit to the Nihon Kohden
recommended software version. Only use the specified configuration of
units. If more than one BSM-3000 series bedside monitor is used in the
same facility, make sure the bedside monitors have the same software
version. If BSM-3000 series monitors with different software versions
are used together, correct system operation cannot be guaranteed.
• The ALARM CAP function is available on the following bedside
monitors, central monitors and multiple patient receivers.
- BSM-9101A software version 13-03 or later
- BSM-6000A series software version 04-01 or later
- Op No. 32A, 52A, 72A, 33A, 53A and 73A of BSM-3000 series
software version 04-12 or later
1.2 User’s Guide Part I BSM-3000
1. GENERAL
- CNS-9701A software version 01-95 or later 1

- ORG-9100A/ORG-9110A software version 03-06 or later
- ORG-9700A software version 03-06 or later
For details on ALARM CAP function, refer to manual for each
instrument of the above and Section 3 of the BSM-3000 series
Administrator’s Guide.
• Be sure to have the administrator change settings for system operation
to modify purposes of system use or relocate the system, or have any
changes checked by the administrator. Inappropriate changes may
result in unsuitable monitoring or a missed alarm.
Applications
This system monitors biological information on a patient in an operating room,
recovery room, ICU, CCU, HCU, NICU or emergency room.
Features
• Components
You can connect an interface and other options to the monitor.
• Use of MULTI sockets

The MULTI sockets allow you to flexibly connect different parameters.
• Touch screen display

The wide angle TFT color display can display measurement values and up to
15 waveforms. You can operate the monitor by touching the screen.
• Use of remote control (Section 2)

The remote control allows operation at a distance.
• Telemetry system (Administrator’s Guide)

When the optional ZS-900P* transmitter is connected to the bedside monitor,
waveform(s) and parameter data from the bedside monitor can be sent to a
cardiac telemetry system or to a central monitor via a multiple patient receiver.
(Available waveforms and parameter data depend on the receiving monitor.
CO, O2 and anesthetic gas data cannot be transmitted.)
* ZS-900P is not available in USA.
• Available network connection (Administrator’s Guide)

You can connect this system via a 10/100BASE-T LAN cable to a network to
communicate with the central monitor and other devices.
• Available backup battery

When an SB-671P battery pack (option) is installed in the monitor, there is
a sudden power failure or during patient transfer, the monitor can be operated
continuously on battery power.
• Home screen (Administrator’s Guide)

You can change the home screen display according to the needs of your
facility.

1. GENERAL
• Trendgraphs and OCRG display on the home screen (Administrator’s

Guide)
The home screen displays trendgraphs of measured values and waveforms so
you can easily identify changes in the patient condition. When a neonate is
monitored, OCRG can also be displayed instead of trendgraphs.
• Review information (Section 6)

This system provides the capability to display review information as trends,
arrhythmia recall and full disclosure waveforms.
• Thermal array recorder (Section 10)

You can install a WS-371P recorder module (option) to record up to three
waveforms and reports.
• Multi arrhythmia analysis mode (User’s Guide Part II, Section 1)

The multi arrhythmia analysis mode allows you to analyze arrhythmia more
accurately.
• ECG window (User’s Guide Part II, Section 1)

This system displays QRS waveforms of the normal waveform as the dominant
QRS, allowing you to check analysis accuracy.
• 12 lead analysis (Section 7)

When the 10-electrode ECG is monitored, you can display standard 12 lead
ECG. 12 lead interpretation is provided.
• Function keys (Administrator’s Guide)

You can register frequently used operations to function key.
• Different site setting (Administrator’s Guide)

You can set different settings for different sites (OR, ICU and NICU).
Standard components
• BSM-3532/3552/3562/3572/3733/3753/3763/3773 bedside monitor
• QI-372P interface (includes the two Multi-link, RGB and ECG/BP OUT
sockets)
For BSM-3532-Q01, BSM-3552-Q01, BSM-3562-Q01, BSM-3572-Q01,
BSM-3773-Q01, BSM-3753-Q01, BSM-3763-Q01 and BSM-3773-Q01, this
interface is installed at the factory.
• QI-373P interface (includes the two Multi-link, Nurse call and RS-232C
sockets)
• QI-374P interface (includes the two Multi-link, RGB and AA sockets)
• WS-371P recorder module
• SB-671P battery pack

1. GENERAL
Measurement Parameters and Applicable Units 1

Applicable Units
Measurement Parameters QI-372P/373P
Bedside
/374P Other Units
Monitor
Interface
ECG OK — —
Respiration Impedance method OK — —
Mainstream OK — —
CO2
Sidestream — OK AG-400R CO2 unit*1
SpO2 OK — —
NIBP OK — —
IBP OK — —
Temperature TEMP socket OK — —
• YJ-671P BISx connection cable
MULTI socket OK —
BIS • QE-910P BIS processor/BISx
Multi-link socket — OK External instrument
Cardiac output OK — —
• AG-920R multigas unit
Anesthetic gas*2 — OK • GF-110PA multigas unit
• GF-210R multigas unit
• GF-120PA multigas/flow unit*1
Anesthetic gas and FLOW/Paw*3 — OK
• GF-220R multigas/flow unit*1
Ventilation — OK External instrument
TOF — OK External instrument
CCO (APCO) OK — JP-600P/PK APCO/IBP processor*4
CCO — OK External instrument
EEG — OK AE-918P neuro unit
tcPO2/tcPCO2 — OK External instrument
Analog input — OK External instrument
Anesthesia — OK External instrument
rSO2 — OK External instrument
*1 These units are not available for the Op No. 32A, 52A, 72A, 33A, 53A and 73A.
*2 RR, CO2 (Sidestream), O2, N2O, AGENT and MAC can be measured.
*3 RR, CO2 (Sidestream), O2, N2O, AGENT, MAC and FLOW/Paw can be measured.
*4 JP-600PK is not available for the Op No. 32A, 52A, 72A, 33A, 53A and 73A. JP-600PK can be
purchased through Nihon Kohden Europe. For other areas, JP-600P is available.

1. GENERAL
Differences Between the Bedside Monitor Models
Bedside Monitor BSM-3562*1 BSM-3763*1

BSM-3532 BSM-3733 BSM-3552 BSM-3753
Model BSM-3572 BSM-3773
No. of MULTI sockets 2 3 2 3 2 3
Available parameters
CO2, IBP, BIS, CO, CCO (APCO)
using MULTI sockets
No. of TEMP sockets 2
ECG measurement
Yes
using 10 electrodes
12 lead analysis Yes
SpO2 probe Masimo Nellcor Nihon Kohden
NIBP PWTT
No Yes
measurement
Analog ECG*2
Analog BP*2 Yes
HT output*2
*1 These monitors are not available in USA.

*2 The QI-372P interface is required.

1. GENERAL
1
Composition
BSM-3000 series Bedside Monitor
BSM-3733/3753/3763/3773 BSM-3532/3552/3562/3572
Interface Recorder Module Battery Pack Remote Controller
QI-372P QI-373P* QI-374P* WS-371P SB-671P RY-910PA
Hyper Isolation Transformer APCO/IBP Processor CO2 Unit Multigas Unit Multigas Unit/Multigas/Flow Unit
DH-220P
Mount Adapter
DH-223P
Unit Mount
GF-110PA/120PA*
QW-100Y(HIT-100) JP-600P/PK AG-400R AG-920R GF-210R/220R*
Transmitter Neuro Unit BIS Processor Wireless LAN Station Smart Expansion Unit
DI-590P
Holder*
ZS-900P* AE-918P QE-910P QI-320PA/QI-420PA AA-372P* AA-374P*
Interface/Communication Cable Other
QF-801P/901P/902P/903P/904P/905P*/907P/908P/909P/911P*/921P** KC-600P Cart

KG-600P Counter Top Mount
IF-912P/913P/914P/917P/918P*/920P*/922P/923P/927P KG-951P Wall Mount Kit
928P/930P/931P*/932P/933P*/934P*/935P/936P*/937P/938P/ DI-370P Adapter
939P/942P/943P/944P/945P*/946P/948P/950P*/951P*/952P*
DI-371P Adapter
Example is QF-904P DH-350P Handle
* Not available for Op No. 32A, 52A, 72A, 33A, 53A and 73A.
** Only available for Op No. 32A, 52A, 72A, 33A, 53A and 73A.

1. GENERAL
Network Composition
In a central monitor network, on a central monitor, you can see data of any bed in
the network.
The data that can be displayed on the bedside monitor or central monitor depends
on the type of bedside or central monitor used.
The number of central monitors and bedside monitors that can be connected to a
central monitor network and the network communication method depends on the
Examples: CNS-9601
Examples: CNS-9701
CNS-9601 type of monitor used. For details, refer to the Network
CNS-9701and System Installation
Guide.
Network group
Example: ICU
Example: CNS-9701 Example: CNS-9701
Printer Central monitor Central monitor
Multiple patient Bedside monitor Bedside monitor

receiver Bedside Monitor
700 Examples: BSS-9800 BSM-3000 series
Examples: ORG-9700 BSM-9100 series
ORG-9100 BSM-6000 series
BSM-5100 series
Transmitter BSM-2300 series
Another network system
Network group
Example: CCU
Central monitor Central monitor Central monitor
Multiple patient Bedside monitor Bedside monitor Bedside monitor

receiver
This system is provided with monitors, transmitters and multiple patient

receivers whose models are the same as those of the ICU group.
Transmitter Transmitter
WARNING WARNING
Install all network devices, including printer and Check the software version number of the monitor
hubs, outside the patient environment (IEC before connecting it to the network. Different
60601-1-1). If they are installed inside the patient software versions have different communication
environment, the patient or operator may receive methods. More than one communication method
electrical shock or injury. For installation, contact in a network may cause communication failure.
your Nihon Kohden representative. For details, refer to the Network and System
Installation Guide.

1. GENERAL
1
Panel Description
BSM-3532/BSM-3552/BSM-3562/BSM-3572 Bedside Monitor

Front Panel
Alarm indicator Silence Alarms key
Red or yellow lamp blinks, Silences the alarm sound.
or yellow or cyan lamps
lights according to the alarm NIBP interval key
settings. Green lamp blinks Selects NIBP measurement
in synchronization with the mode. Pressing this key
patient’s QRS or pulse. changes the mode.
NIBP Start/Stop key

Touch screen Starts NIBP measurement in
Displays monitoring data. selected mode. Pressing the
Touching a key or data key during measurement stops
on the screen changes measurement.
the displayed screen and
settings. Menu key
Displays the MENU window.
Power switch
Home key
Press and hold for
Closes all opened windows and
more than one second to turn
displays the home screen.
the monitor power on. When
turning the monitor power off, Error lamp (option)
press and hold for more than Blinks when out of paper. Lights
three seconds. when the recorder door is open.
AC power lamp
Lights when the power cord Battery lamp Speaker Record/Stop key (option)
is connected between the AC Indicates a battery status of For alarm and sync sound. Press to start or stop recording.
SOURCE socket and AC outlet. the battery in the battery slot.
Left Side Panel
MULTI socket
Connects to the connection cord of
TEMP socket
the parameter to be monitored (IBP,
Connects to the temperature probe cord.
CO, CO2, BIS or CCO (APCO)). The
type of parameter is automatically
recognized.
SpO2 socket
Connects to the SpO2 connection cord.
ECG/RESP socket
Connects to the ECG connection cord. NIBP socket
Connects to the air hose.
WARNING
When performing defibrillation during cardiac output monitoring,
never touch the CO connection cord. The discharged energy may
cause electrical shock or injury.

1. GENERAL
Right Side Panel

When the WS-371P recorder module and QI-372P interface are installed
SD card slot
For the SD card or program card.
Multi-link socket (QI-372P)

ZS socket Connects a QF series interface, IF series
For the ZS-900P* transmitter. communication cable or multi-link cable of an
* ZS-900P transmitter is not external unit.
available in USA.
RGB socket (QI-372P)
Network socket
Outputs the RGB video signal. Connects to the
Connects to monitor network system
slave display.
via the network separation unit.
ECG/BP OUT socket (QI-372P)
Outputs 100 mmHg/V IBP waveform and
1 mV/V ECG waveform and heart rate trigger
Recorder module holder
by using the YJ-910P or YJ-920P ECG/BP
For the WS-371P recorder module.
output cable. These analog signals can be
used as the synchronization signal for other
equipment, such as IABP.

Connects a QF series interface, IF series
communication cable or multi-link cable of an
external unit.
Nurse call socket (QI-373P)

Connects a YJ-672P nurse call cable.
RS-232C socket (QI-373P)

Not available.

external unit.

Outputs the RGB video signal.
Connects to the slave display.
AA socket (QI-374P)
For the AA-372P and AA-374P smart expansion unit.

1. GENERAL
1
CAUTION CAUTION
When using the output signal from the monitor as Only a Nihon Kohden defibrillator can use the
the synchronization signal for other equipment output signal from the monitor as a
such as an IABP (intra-aortic balloon pump) or synchronization signal. Check that the delay time
defibrillator: of the output signal (heart rate trigger 20 ms
• Set the timing of the IABP by checking the maximum) is within the range of the connected
waveform on the IABP screen. defibrillator.
• Check the condition of the bedside monitor
at all times. The output signal may become
unstable.
• Check that the delay time of the output signal is
within the range of the connected equipment.
NOTE
• When using an IBP waveform as a synchronization signal for other
equipment, connect the IBP line to the MULTI socket on the monitor.
The IBP waveform that is used for the synchronization signal depends
on the “IBP ANALOG OUT” setting in the SYSTEM SETUP window.
- When “IBP ANALOG OUT” is set to “FIXED POSITION”:
The IBP line connected to the top MULTI socket on the monitor is
used.
- When “IBP ANALOG OUT” is set to “HIGHEST PRIORITY LABEL”:
When more than one IBP waveform is acquired, the IBP waveform of
the highest priority label is used.
IBP label priority:
ART > ART2 > RAD > DORS > AO > FEM > UA > LVP > P1 > P2 >
P3*1 > P4*2 > P5*2 > P6*2 > P7*2
*1 The P3 label is only available on the BSM-3733, BSM-3753,
BSM-3763 and BSM-3773 bedside monitor.
* The P4 to P7 labels are available only when the QI-374P interface
2
is installed to the bedside monitor.
• The output signal from the ECG/BP OUT socket may become unstable
in the following conditions.
- Electrode is dry or detached.
- Electrode lead is damaged or disconnected from the electrode.
- Electrode lead is pulled.
- AC interference or EMG noise superimposed.
- Air bubbles or blood clog in the circuit for monitoring IBP.
- Cord or cable is disconnected or damaged.
• All instruments which are to be connected to the ECG/BP OUTPUT
socket must use a YJ-910P or YJ-920P ECG/BP output cable and
comply with the IEC 60601-1 safety standard for medical equipment.

1. GENERAL
Rear Panel
AC SOURCE power cord socket Battery pack holder

For the AC power cord. For an SB-671P battery pack.
Equipotential grounding terminal

For an equipotential grounding lead.

1. GENERAL
BSM-3733/BSM-3753/BSM-3763/BSM-3773 Bedside Monitor 1

Front Panel
Alarm indicator
Red or yellow lamp blinks, Silence Alarms key
or yellow or cyan lamps Silences the alarm sound.
lights according to the alarm
settings. Green lamp blinks NIBP interval key
in synchronization with the Selects NIBP measurement
patient’s QRS or pulse. mode. Pressing this key
changes the mode.
Touch screen NIBP Start/Stop key

Displays monitoring data. Starts NIBP measurement in
Touching a key or data selected mode. Pressing the
on the screen changes key during measurement stops
the displayed screen and measurement.
settings. Menu key
Displays the MENU window.
Power switch
Home key
Press and hold for
Closes all opened windows and
more than one second to
displays the home screen.
turn the monitor power on.
When turning the monitor
Error lamp (option)
power off, press and hold for
Blinks when out of paper. Lights
more than three seconds.
when the recorder door is open.
Record/Stop key (option)

AC power lamp Battery lamp Speaker
Press to start or stop recording.
Lights when the power cord Indicates a battery status of For alarm and sync sound.
is connected between the AC the battery in the battery slot.
SOURCE socket and AC outlet.
Left Side Panel
MULTI socket
Connects to the connection cord of
TEMP socket the parameter to be monitored (IBP,
Connects to the temperature probe cord. CO, CO2, BIS or CCO (APCO)). The
type of parameter is automatically
recognized.
SpO2 socket
Connects to the SpO2 connection cord.
ECG/RESP socket
Connects to the ECG connection cord.
NIBP socket
Connects to the air hose.
WARNING
When performing defibrillation during cardiac output monitoring,
never touch the CO connection cord. The discharged energy may
cause electrical shock or injury.

1. GENERAL
Right Side Panel

SD card slot
For the SD card or program card.

ZS socket communication cable or multi-link cable of
For the ZS-900P* transmitter. an external unit.
* ZS-900P transmitter is not
available in USA. RGB socket (QI-372P)
Outputs the RGB video signal. Connects to
Network socket the slave display.
Connects to monitor network
system via the network separation ECG/BP OUT socket (QI-372P)
unit. Outputs 100 mmHg/V IBP waveform and
1 mV/V ECG waveform and heart rate trigger
by using the YJ-910P or YJ-920P ECG/BP
Recorder module holder output cable. These analog signals can be
For the WS-371P recorder used as the synchronization signal for other
module. equipment, such as IABP.

external unit.
Nurse call socket (QI-373P)

Connects a YJ-672P nurse call cable.
RS-232C socket (QI-373P)

Not available.

external unit.

Outputs the RGB video signal.
Connects to the slave display.
AA socket (QI-374P)
For the AA-372P and AA-374P smart expansion unit.

1. GENERAL
1
CAUTION CAUTION
When using the output signal from the monitor as Only a Nihon Kohden defibrillator can use the
the synchronization signal for other equipment output signal from the monitor as a
such as an IABP (intra-aortic balloon pump) or synchronization signal. Check that the delay time
defibrillator: of the output signal (heart rate trigger 20 ms
• Set the timing of the IABP by checking the maximum) is within the range of the connected
waveform on the IABP screen. defibrillator.
• Check the condition of the bedside monitor
at all times. The output signal may become
unstable.
• Check that the delay time of the output signal is
within the range of the connected equipment.
NOTE
• When using an IBP waveform as a synchronization signal for other
equipment, connect the IBP line to the MULTI socket on the monitor.
The IBP waveform that is used for the synchronization signal depends
on the “IBP ANALOG OUT” setting in the SYSTEM SETUP window.
- When “IBP ANALOG OUT” is set to “FIXED POSITION”:
The IBP line connected to the top MULTI socket on the monitor is
used.
- When “IBP ANALOG OUT” is set to “HIGHEST PRIORITY LABEL”:
When more than one IBP waveform is acquired, the IBP waveform of
the highest priority label is used.
IBP label priority:
ART > ART2 > RAD > DORS > AO > FEM > UA > LVP > P1 > P2 >
P3*1 > P4*2 > P5*2 > P6*2 > P7*2
* The P4 to P7 labels are available only when the QI-374P interface
2
is installed to the bedside monitor.
• The output signal from the ECG/BP OUT socket may become unstable
in the following conditions.
- Electrode is dry or detached.
- Electrode lead is damaged or disconnected from the electrode.
- Electrode lead is pulled.
- AC interference or EMG noise superimposed.
- Air bubbles or blood clog in the circuit for monitoring IBP.
- Cord or cable is disconnected or damaged.
• All instruments which are to be connected to the ECG/BP OUTPUT
socket must use a YJ-910P or YJ-920P ECG/BP output cable and
comply with the IEC 60601-1 safety standard for medical equipment.

1. GENERAL
Rear Panel
AC SOURCE power cord socket Battery pack holder

For the AC power cord. For an SB-671P battery pack.
Equipotential grounding terminal

For an equipotential grounding lead.

1. GENERAL
1
Basic Operating Concepts
Screen Displays
Following are the screens and windows available on the Life Scope VS
bedside monitor. For details about the individual screens and windows, see the
appropriate section.
The shadow of the previous screen may remain for a few minutes after changing
the screen.
Normally, the home screen is displayed. All screens (except for the LARGE
NUMERICS screen, SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen, 12 LEAD
ANALYSIS window, DRUG window, INTERBED window and the MEASURE
page of the CO window) return to the home screen when there is no key
operation for about 3 minutes.
Home screen
• The home screen can be displayed anytime
by pressing the [Home] key on the bedside
monitor.
• Displays waveforms and data of the
monitoring parameters.
• Touching the patient name displays
the ADMIT page for changing patient
information.
• Touching the parameter data displays the
parameter setting window.
MENU window
The MENU window can be displayed anytime
by pressing the [Menu] key on the bedside
monitor. From the MENU window, you can
display any window except the home screen.

1. GENERAL
Review windows
• TREND GRAPH page for displaying 24 hour trendgraphs of up to 6 selected parameters.
• TREND TABLE page for displaying table of parameter data.
• NIBP TREND page for displaying vital signs data with NIBP measurement.
• HEMO TREND page for displaying hemodynamics data when CO is measured.
• LUNG TREND page for displaying lung function measurement data.
ARRHYTH RECALL window for displaying arrhythmia recall data.
ALARM HISTORY window for displaying vital sign data at alarm occurrence.
FULL DISC window for displaying full disclosure waveforms. Up to 5 parameters can be saved.

1. GENERAL
ST window for displaying ST level recall waveforms. ST measurement condition can be changed. 1
12 LEAD window for displaying 12 lead ECG interpretation and analysis result data.
OCRG window for displaying OCRG trendgraph. Only available when the site mode is NICU.
ADMIT DISCHARGE window for admitting/discharging a patient. Data can be deleted on this window.

1. GENERAL
ALARM LIMITS window for setting vital signs alarm and ARRHYTH ALARMS window for setting arrhythmia alarms.
Other windows for monitoring.
Setup and other windows

• DATE window for changing date and time
• VOLUME window for changing alarm and sync sound volume
• DISPLAY window for setting number of ECG waveforms on the home screen, PRESS waveform display type, waveform
sweep speed, and respiration/CO2 waveform sweep speed
• RECORD window for setting recording parameters
• SYSTEM window for checking assigned functions to the remote control keys
Parameter setting windows

For changing parameter monitoring settings. Example is ECG window. FLOW/Paw is not available on the Op No. 32A,
52A, 72A, 33A, 53A and 73A.

1. GENERAL
12 LEAD ANALYSIS window for displaying simultaneous 12 lead ECG. 12 lead ECG interpretation can be performed. 1
Drug window for registering drug and units, calculating drug and displaying the table of the selected drug titration.
LUNG FUNCTION window for calculating the respiration dynamics.
Interbed window for displaying interbed beds when the monitor is connected to a network.

1. GENERAL
TOUCH KEYS OFF window for turning touch screen function off.
LARGE NUMERICS window for displaying numeric data.
TIMER window for counting up the elapsed time.
SLEEP window for turning sleep mode on.

1. GENERAL
Using Touch Screen Keys 1

Any window can be opened and settings can be changed by touching the keys
and items on the screen with your finger. Touching the key on the screen displays
the window. You can use the scroll bar on the screen to scroll data on the
window.
There is a pip sound when a key or screen is touched, or the scroll bar on the
screen is used.
Tabs for chaning displaying window
Selected items are highlighted
Setting bar
Touch or drag the sliders to the
desired level on the setting bar.
Upper limit slider
Lower limit slider
Cursor
Scroll key
Scroll bar
Scroll keys

1. GENERAL
The time width of the trendgraph on the home screen can be adjusted by touching the right edge of the trendgraph and
dragging it left or right.
Keys on the Bedside Monitor
Silences alarm sound
Selects NIBP measurement mode
Starts and stops NIBP measurement
Displays the MENU window
Displays the home screen
Starts and stops recording (option)
Turns the monitor power on or off

1. GENERAL
Using the Remote Control 1

Use the RY-910PA remote controller to operate the monitor from a distance.
A pointer appears on the screen when the monitor is operated by the remote
control. The remote control channel can be assigned to the monitor to prevent
operating a different monitor. Point the remote control at the remote control
sensor on the bedside monitor.
Press the keys on the remote control to open/close a window. Move the selection
knob up/down/left/right to scroll the data or select a setting and press the
[ENTER] key to register the setting.
There is a pip sound when a key on the remote control is pressed or the selection
knob is moved to scroll the data.
1
NOTE
• Watch the monitor screen and check the operation when using the
remote control to avoid wrong operation.
• Make sure that the remote control is handled appropriately.

1. GENERAL
Using the MENU Window

The MENU window can be displayed anytime by pressing the [Menu] key on the
bedside monitor. From the MENU window, you can display any window except
the home screen. The MENU window layout differs according to the selected
site. Refer to “SITE Window” in the Administrator’s Guide, Section 2.
For details on each window, refer to the section specified below.
When the site mode is OR or ICU
User’s Guide, Part II

Section 6
FLOW/Paw is not available

Section 5 for Op No. 32A, 52A, 72A,
33A, 53A and 73A.
Section 3 Section 8
Section 5
Section 10
Section 4
Administrator’s Guide Section 4 Section 4 Section 9 Section 11
Section 7
For the alarm off key on the MENU window, refer to “Silencing and Suspending
Alarms” in Section 5.
When the site mode is NICU

The OCRG key is added in the <REVIEW> box. Refer to Section 6.

Section 2 Preparation
2
Preparation Flowchart.......................................................................................................................................... 2.2

Installation Conditions.......................................................................................................................................... 2.3
Inserting and Removing the Battery Pack............................................................................................................ 2.5
Battery Handling and Operation................................................................................................................. 2.5
Safety Information............................................................................................................................ 2.5
Battery Pack Handling Procedures.................................................................................................. 2.6
When Not Using the Monitor or Battery Pack.................................................................................. 2.6
Preparing the Optional Recorder......................................................................................................................... 2.7
Installing the Recorder Module................................................................................................................... 2.7
Loading Recording Paper........................................................................................................................... 2.7
Preparing the Remote Control.............................................................................................................................. 2.9
Installing the Batteries................................................................................................................................ 2.9
Setting the Remote Control Channel........................................................................................................ 2.10
Attaching the Remote Control Channel Label to the Bedside Monitor..................................................... 2.10
Assigning Functions to the Customized Keys.......................................................................................... 2.10
Power.................................................................................................................................................................. 2.11
Connecting the Power Cord and Grounding the Monitor.......................................................................... 2.11
Connecting the Power Cord........................................................................................................... 2.11
Grounding the Monitor................................................................................................................... 2.12
Turning the Power On............................................................................................................................... 2.12
Check Before Turning On the Power.............................................................................................. 2.12
Turning the Power On..................................................................................................................... 2.13
Check After Turning On the Power and During Monitoring............................................................ 2.14
Power and Battery Status Indications...................................................................................................... 2.15
When the “BATTERY WEAK” Message Appears........................................................................... 2.16
Charging the Battery Pack............................................................................................................. 2.16
Monitor Status on Power Interruption....................................................................................................... 2.17
Turning the Power Off............................................................................................................................... 2.18
Check After/Before Turning the Power Off...................................................................................... 2.18

2. PREPARATION
Preparation Flowchart
You may not need to do all these.
1. Install the monitor. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide.
2. Prepare battery pack, remote control and recorder. Refer to Section 2 in this
manual.
3. Check or change any initial settings on the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

screen. Changing these settings during monitoring interrupts monitoring.
Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 2.
4. Check or change any initial settings on the SYSTEM SETUP window. These
settings are the password protected settings which only an administrator can
change. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
5. Check or change the necessary settings before monitoring in Section 3 in this

manual.
• Date and time
• Sound volume
• Screen brightness
• Waveform display settings
6. Enter the information of the new patient. Refer to “Admitting/Discharging

Patient” in Section 3 in this manual.
7. Check or change all alarm items for the patient. Refer to Section 5
in this manual. The alarm settings return to the master settings when
the monitor power is off for more than 30 minutes and <SHOW
ADMIT CONFIRMATION WINDOW> is set to Off in the SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION screen or the patient is admitted or discharged.
8. Check or change settings for the review windows, such as trendgraphs,

tables and arrhythmia recall files. Refer to Section 6 in this manual.
9. Check or change recording settings. Refer to Section 10 in this manual.
10. Prepare the equipment (electrodes, transducers, probes, etc.) for monitoring
individual parameters and check or change the settings for each parameter.
Refer to the User’s Guide Part II.

2. PREPARATION
Installation Conditions
2
Put the monitor on a stable and flat stand, on an optional KC-600P cart, KG-600P
counter top mount or KG-951P wall mount kit in a suitable location where the
screen is easy to see and does not reflect light. Follow the cautions below.
The optional DI-370P adapter is required to mount the monitor on the KC-600P
cart, KG-600P counter top mount or KG-951P wall mount kit.
The monitor must be installed by qualified personnel. Details are in the

WARNING WARNING
Never use the monitor in the presence of any Connect only the specified instrument to the
flammable anesthetic gas or high concentration monitor and follow the specified procedure.
oxygen atmosphere. Failure to follow this warning Failure to follow this warning may result
may cause explosion or fire. in electrical shock or injury to the patient
and operator, and cause fire or instrument
malfunction.
CAUTION CAUTION
Avoid collision when moving the monitor on a Avoid a location where the monitor is sprinkled
cart. Strong impact may damage the monitor. with liquids. Avoid direct sprinkling, spray or moist
air from a nebulizer or a humidifier.
CAUTION CAUTION
The display screen is made of glass. Strong Avoid locations where the monitor may receive
impact may damage it. strong electromagnetic interference such as radio
or TV stations, cellular phones or mobile two-way
radios.
CAUTION CAUTION
If fluids are accidentally spilled on the monitor, Avoid exposing the monitor to direct sunlight.
take the monitor out of service and check for
damage.
CAUTION CAUTION
Do not use the monitor in an ambulance. The Do not place blankets or cloth over the monitor. It
monitor may not function properly in a moving may affect monitoring.
vehicle.

2. PREPARATION
CAUTION CAUTION
Do not place the monitor in a dusty area. Do not place the monitor in an MRI examination
room. The monitor may not function properly,
or noise from the monitor may interfere with the
MRI.
CAUTION CAUTION
Connect the power cord to an AC outlet which Make sure that there is more than 5 cm of space
can supply enough AC current to the monitor. The between the monitor and the wall for adequate
monitor cannot function properly with low current. ventilation. When the monitor is surrounded,
make sure that there is about 10 cm of space
above the monitor for ventilation so that the
CAUTION
operating temperature does not exceed 40°C
Do not use an electrical blanket. It may affect
(104°F).
monitoring.
10 cm
5 cm
CAUTION
When there is any problem on the monitor, turn 5 cm
off the power immediately and disconnect the
power cord from the AC outlet. Take the monitor
out of service and check for damage.
CAUTION
Avoid placing the monitor near a heater or
humidifier.

2. PREPARATION
Inserting and Removing the Battery Pack

2
Battery Handling and Operation

Safety Information
WARNING WARNING
Do not do the following to the battery pack. It may If the battery pack is damaged and the substance
cause leakage, overheating, explosion and fire. inside the battery contacts the eyes or skin, wash
• Short-circuit the + and – terminals on the immediately and thoroughly with water and see a
battery pack. physician. Never rub your eyes, because you may
• Put the battery pack into fire or heat the battery lose your eyesight.
pack.
• Disassemble or modify the battery pack.
WARNING
• Give strong impact to or deform the battery
• Do not immerse the battery pack in water. The
pack.
battery pack may heat up and rust and the
• Use the battery pack on unspecified
substance inside the battery pack may leak.
instruments.
• Do not leave the battery pack unused for more
• Charge the battery pack on unspecified
than about two years. The battery pack may
instruments.
leak.
• Install the battery pack with the wrong polarity.
• Leave the battery pack in the reach of patients.
CAUTION CAUTION
Do not expose the battery pack to direct sunlight Do not use a battery pack with a damaged cover.
or leave in a high temperature place. The The operator may receive electrical shock.
lifetime of the battery pack may be shortened,
the performance of the battery pack may be
degraded and the battery may leak.
CAUTION CAUTION
Do not leave the battery pack near the patient or Do not subject the battery pack to a strong
in reach of children. mechanical shock.
CAUTION CAUTION
Use the battery pack between 10°C (50°F) and Before disposing of the battery pack, check with
40°C (104°F). Temperatures out of this range your local solid waste officials for details in your
affect the working of the battery. area for recycling options or proper disposal. The
battery pack is recyclable. At the end of its useful
life, under various state and local laws, it may
CAUTION
be illegal to dispose of this battery pack into the
Do not use a battery pack which is past the
municipal waste stream.
expiration date written on the label.

2. PREPARATION
NOTE
• Be careful when handling the fully charged battery pack. The battery
pack heats up to about 60°C (140°F).
• When replacing the battery pack, be careful not to drop the battery
pack.
Battery Pack Handling Procedures

• Always place a battery pack in the monitor. This charges it so that you will
always have a fully charged battery pack ready.
• Fully recharge the battery pack before using it for the first time or after storing
it for over a month. When the battery is not used, it self-discharges.
• Replace the battery pack with a new one every year. This is because the battery
is a chemical product which gradually deteriorates whether or not it is used.
• Store the battery packs under the following conditions.
Temperature: –20 to +60°C (–4 to +140°F) (within 30 days)
–20 to +45°C (–4 to +113°F) (within 90 days)
–20 to +35°C (–4 to +95°F) (more than 90 days)
Humidity: 20 to 85% RH (noncondensing)
When Not Using the Monitor or Battery Pack

• When the monitor is not used for a long time, remove the battery pack. When
a charged or discharged battery pack is left inside the monitor with the power
cord unplugged, the battery self-discharges and deteriorates.
• When a battery pack is not used, fully charge it before storage. When a battery
pack is not used for over one month, fully charge it once every six months.

2. PREPARATION
Preparing the Optional Recorder

2
Installing the Recorder Module

Install the optional WS-371P recorder module in the monitor by referring to the
WS-371P recorder module Installation Guide.
CAUTION for Handling the Recording Paper

• Do not allow paper to contact pastes, adhesive agents, oil-based
felt pen tips or diazo process (ditto/spirit) copying paper. These
discolor the paper surface.
• Do not allow paper to contact any materials made of vinyl chloride,
plastic eraser, adhesive tape, fluorescent felt tip pen, or cinnabar
seal ink because these discolor the recorded waveforms and data.
• Do not apply strong pressure to the paper. Rubbing or scratching
discolors the paper surface.
• Do not allow paper to contact saline solution. The paper discolors
and if the saline solution gets on the thermal head, there will be
dots missing from the recorded data.
• Avoid high humidity, high temperature, direct sunlight and direct
fluorescent light when storing recording paper. Otherwise the
paper may discolor. Store the recording paper in a dry, cool place.
• When using glue on the recording paper, use glue which consists
of starch, polyvinyl alcohol, gum arabic, or carboxymethyl.
Loading Recording Paper
CAUTION for Loading the Recording Paper

• Correctly load the recording paper as specified. Otherwise,
recording may not be performed properly.
• Do not touch the recording head with any hard material. When the
head is tapped with hard material, the head may crack and the
heater element wire may short-circuit.
• Clean the head surface with the provided head cleaner pen
before loading new paper. After a period of usage, paper dust may
accumulate between the paper and the head surface, and good
printing cannot be obtained.
NOTE
Error lamp Only use the specified recording paper, FQW50-2-100.
The error lamp on the bedside monitor lights and the “INSERT REC PAPER”
message appears on the screen when there is no paper.

2. PREPARATION
1. Move the recorder door release lever in the direction of the arrow ( ) to
release the lock.
Door release lever
2. Open the recorder door.
CAUTION
Do not touch the thermal head inside the recorder module. The
thermal head may be damaged by static electricity or become dirty
and cause printing failure.
3. Set the recording paper inside the recorder module so that the detection mark
(small black square on corner) of the paper is on the right side.
Mark
4. Draw out one page of paper toward you and close the recorder door.
If the out of paper lamp is still lit, the recorder door is not closed properly.

2. PREPARATION
Preparing the Remote Control

2
The monitor has a remote control sensor for receiving signals from the remote
control.
When the monitor cannot operate by remote control or the remote control
distance becomes short, the battery may be deteriorated. Change the battery with
new one. Use two AAA alkaline batteries and change the two batteries at the
same time.
Installing the Batteries
WARNING WARNING
• Keep the batteries away from fire. They may If the battery is damaged and the substance
explode. inside the battery contacts the eyes or skin, wash
• Keep the batteries away from patients. immediately and thoroughly with water and see a
• Never short-circuit the + and – terminals on the physician. Never rub your eyes, because you may
battery. It may cause overheating and fire. lose your eyesight.
• Do not damage, disassemble, drop or give
impact to the battery.
NOTE
When not using the remote control for a long time, remove the batteries
from the remote control.
1. Remove the battery cover on the rear panel of the remote control as shown.
2. Insert two new AAA alkaline batteries into the remote control observing the
correct + and – position.
3. Reattach the battery cover.

2. PREPARATION
NOTE
• Remove the battery from the remote controller when not using the
battery.
• Check with your local solid waste officials for details in your area for
recycling options or proper disposable.
• Take care not dropping or losing the remote controller.
Setting the Remote Control Channel

One remote control can operate up to nine monitors by changing channel. The
remote control channel must be set to the correct monitor.
The infrared light emitted from the remote control has wide directivity and
reflects the ceiling and wall and may operate the other devices.
The remote control channel must be set by the administrator. The procedure is
described in the Administrator’s Guide.
CAUTION
• Set the remote control channel on the monitor to prevent the
remote control from operating a different monitor.
• When several monitors are installed close together, check that the
remote control operates only the desired monitor. If the remote
control operates a different monitor, recheck the channel setting.
Attaching the Remote Control Channel Label to the Bedside Monitor

Channel label After setting the remote control channel on the monitor, attach the remote control
channel label to the display.
Assigning Functions to the Customized Keys

The window or operation can be assigned to each key on the remote control
for the shortcut key operation. There are six customized keys on the remote
control. The function is assigned on the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the
Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.

2. PREPARATION
Power
2
The monitor can operate on either battery pack or AC power.
When the power cord is plugged into an AC outlet and the power switch on the
front panel is turned on, the monitor operates on AC power.
When an SB-671P battery pack is inserted into the battery slot and the power
cord is disconnected or there is a sudden power failure, the monitor automatically
switches to battery power.
When the battery pack is not used and there is a sudden power failure, the
patient data and settings are stored for about 30 minutes after power off when
<SHOW ADMIT CONFIRMATION WINDOW> is set to Off in the SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION screen.
The battery pack is charged when the power cord is plugged into an AC outlet
and the AC current is supplied to the monitor. The battery pack is also charged
during monitoring.
When the monitor is operated on battery power, the brightness of the screen can
be reduced to save battery power.
The monitor can operate for about 90 minutes (BSM-3532/3552/3562/3572) or

60 minutes (BSM-3733/3753/3763/3773) with a new fully charged battery pack
when:
• Used in normal temperature.
• Recorder is stopped.
• No alarm occurs.
• Monitoring ECG, respiration (impedance) and SpO2.
• <POWER SAVING MODE> on the SYSTEM SETUP window is set to ON.
• <SYNC SOUND VOLUME> on the VOLUME window is set to OFF.
• NIBP measurement interval is 15 minutes.
• The QI-372P, QI-373P or QI-374P interface is installed in the monitor.
Connecting the Power Cord and Grounding the Monitor

Connecting the Power Cord
WARNING WARNING
Connect only the specified instrument to the When several medical instruments are used
monitor and follow the specified procedure. together, ground all instruments to the same one-
Failure to follow this warning may result point ground. Any potential difference between
in electrical shock or injury to the patient instruments may cause electrical shock to the
and operator, and cause fire or instrument patient and operator.
malfunction.

2. PREPARATION
Connect the provided power cord to the AC SOURCE socket on the rear panel of
the monitor and plug the cord into a 3-prong AC outlet.
When the AC power is supplied to the monitor, the AC power lamp on the front
panel lights.
NOTE
If the AC power lamp does not light, check the power cord connection.
Grounding the Monitor
WARNING
When several medical instruments are used together, ground all
instruments to the same one-point ground. Any potential difference
between instruments may cause electrical shock to the patient and
operator.
When more than one electrical instrument is used, there may be electrical
potential difference between the instruments. The potential difference between
the instruments may cause current to flow to the patient connected to the
instruments, resulting in electrical shock.
Always perform equipotential grounding when required. It is often required in

the operating room, ICU room, CCU room, cardiac catheterization room and
X-ray room. Consult with a biomedical engineer to determine if it is required.
When equipotential grounding is required, connect the equipotential ground

terminal on the instrument to the equipotential ground terminal on the wall
(equipotential grounding system) with the equipotential grounding lead (potential
equalization conductor).
Turning the Power On

Check Before Turning On the Power
Check the following items before turning on the power.
• Enough electrodes and electrode leads are ready.
• Cleaned and sterilized sensors and transducers are ready.
• Power cord is connected properly.
• Equipotential grounding lead is connected properly when equipotential
grounding is required.
• All cables are connected properly.
• Enough recording paper in the recorder (when using an optional recorder).
• Fully charged battery pack is installed in the monitor in case of a sudden power
failure.
• No scratches, damage or dirt on the monitor.
• No damage to the keys and panels.
• No damage to the power cord.
• No damage to the electrode leads, transducers, probes and cables.
• The monitor is not in a wet place.

2. PREPARATION
Turning the Power On
CAUTION 2
When the monitor is turned on, check that a single beep sounds and
the red, yellow, cyan and green alarm indicator lamps blink once.
This shows that the alarm is functioning properly.
NOTE
• It takes a few minutes for the LCD screen to reach full brightness.
• The shadow of the previous screen may remain for a few minutes after
changing screens.
• There may be some dots on the LCD screen which are always on or
always off, but it does not affect monitoring. This is normal for all LCD
screens.
• The patient data and settings are deleted when the monitor power is
off for more than 30 minutes and <SHOW ADMIT CONFIRMATION
WINDOW> is set to “Off” in the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen.
Press the [Power] switch on the front panel to turn the power on. The power can
also be turned on by pressing the [POWER] button on the remote control. The
power lamp and the AC power lamp light and self check starts. When the check
is complete, the home screen appears.
The power lamps light.
If the AC power lamp does not light, check the power cord connection.

2. PREPARATION
When the monitor power is turned on, alarms are suspended while the monitor is
waiting for the electrodes and probe to be attached to the patient. The monitoring
starts when the connection cord is connected to the socket on the monitor and the
electrodes or probe are attached to the patient. The alarm activates when one of
the following occurs:
• ECG, SpO2 or IBP is monitored or NIBP is measured and a value is displayed
(when AUTO is selected for <ALARM ACTIVATION DELAY> on the
ALARM window of the SYSTEM SETUP window).
• ECG, SpO2 or IBP is continuously monitored for the selected time (when 1
min, 2 min or 3 min is selected for <ALARM ACTIVATION DELAY>).
• NIBP is measured (when 1 min, 2 min or 3 min is selected for <ALARM
ACTIVATION DELAY>).
If the monitor power is turned off and on again within 60 seconds, the
monitoring continues.
Check After Turning On the Power and During Monitoring

To start monitoring safely and properly, check the following items after turning
on the power. If any problem is detected, take the proper countermeasure
according to the troubleshooting and maintenance sections.
• There is no fire, smoke or smell.

• The monitor is not too hot.
• The power lamp and other lamps light.
• Alarm indicators (red, yellow, cyan and green lamps) blink once and a beep
sounds.
• The start up screen appears and the home screen appears.
• No error message is displayed on the screen.
• The time on the screen is correct.
• The monitor does not affect surrounding equipment.
• The data and waveforms are displayed properly.
• Keys and switches operate properly.
• The touch keys function properly and the key clicking sound is generated.
• Alarm functions properly.
• Alarm sound can be heard.
• Alarm sound volume setting is appropriate.
• There is no trouble in recording (when using an optional recorder).
• Sound can be heard from the monitor.
NOTE
After turning the monitor on and when admitting a patient on the monitor,
make sure that the time displayed at the upper right of the screen is
correct. When the date or time is changed during monitoring, the date and
time of all stored data is also changed and may not match the date and
time on the printout.
When the monitor is connected to a network

The time on this monitor is automatically adjusted to match the time of
the network as long as the monitor is connected to the network. The date
and time on all monitors in the network are set to the same setting.
2. PREPARATION
Power and Battery Status Indications

Battery operation Remaining battery power
Operating on battery more than 90% 2
more than 60%
Battery is being charged more than 40%
more than 25%
less than 25%
Power and battery status are indicated by three lamps on the bedside monitor. A
discharged battery pack is also indicated by battery marks, screen message and
alarm.
NOTE
When charging the battery pack with the monitor power turned off, check
that the power lamp and battery charging lamp light. If the lamps do
not light even when the power cord is connected and the battery pack
is inserted, turn the power on, check that the battery charging lamp is
blinking or lit, then turn the power off.
• Operating on AC power and battery pack is fully charged or there is no battery

Power lamp: Lit
AC power lamp: Lit
Battery lamp: Lit or off
• Operating on AC power and battery pack is being charged

Power lamp: Lit
AC power lamp: Lit
Battery lamp: Slow blinking (once every 2 seconds)
• Operating on AC power when battery pack is damaged

Power lamp: Lit
AC power lamp: Lit
Battery lamp: Rapid blinking (4 times per second)
Screen indication: “BATTERY ERROR” message
Alarm indication: Continuous “bing bong” sound (when NK1 is selected for
<ALARM SOUND TYPE> on the ALARM window of
the SYSTEM SETUP window) and blinking yellow alarm
indicator lamp
• Operating on battery power

Power lamp: Lit
AC power lamp: Off
Battery lamp: Off

2. PREPARATION
• Operating on battery power and battery pack is damaged

Power lamp: Lit
AC power lamp: Off
Battery lamp: Rapid blinking (4 times per second)
Screen indication: “BATTERY ERROR” message
Alarm indication: Continuous “bing bong” sound (when NK1 is selected for
<ALARM SOUND TYPE> on the ALARM window of
the SYSTEM SETUP window) and blinking yellow alarm
indicator lamp
• No monitoring and charging battery pack

Power lamp: Off
AC power lamp: Lit
Battery lamp: Slow blinking (once every 2 seconds)
When the “BATTERY WEAK” Message Appears

Operate the monitor on AC power and/or replace the battery pack when the
“BATTERY WEAK” message appears.
When the “BATTERY WEAK” message appears, the remaining battery power
is less than 25%. The yellow alarm lamp lights with a continuous “bing bong”
sound.
If no AC or battery power is supplied to the monitor, there is no measurement

and patient data such as trend data may be lost.
Charging the Battery Pack

The battery pack can be charged by the monitor. It takes about 10 hours to charge
one battery pack during monitoring and 2 hours to charge two battery packs
when not monitoring.
NOTE
The new battery pack is not charged. Charge the battery pack before use.
The monitor can operate for about 90 minutes (BSM-3532/3552/3562/3572) or

60 minutes (BSM-3733/3753/3763/3773) with a new fully charged battery pack
when:
• Used in normal temperature.
• Recorder is stopped.
• No alarm occurs.
• Monitoring ECG, respiration (impedance) and SpO2.
• <POWER SAVING MODE> on the SYSTEM SETUP window is set to ON.
• <SYNC SOUND VOLUME> on the VOLUME window is set to OFF.
• NIBP measurement interval is 15 minutes.
• The QI-372P, QI-373P or QI-374P interface is installed in the monitor.

2. PREPARATION
CAUTION
When charging the battery pack, keep the ambient temperature at 2
approximately 20°C to maintain the optimal battery operation time.
If the battery pack is charged at less than 10°C (50°F) or more than
30°C (86°F), the maximum battery operation time will be 20% to
30% less than the optimal operation time.
Charging in the Monitor

Normal charging
During AC operation, the battery pack is automatically charged without
interrupting monitoring. It takes approximately 10 hours of continuous charging
to fully charge a battery pack.
Fast charging
It takes 2 hours of continuous charging to fully charge the battery pack when not
monitoring.
After continuous charging, the monitor automatically switches to trickle charging

mode to keep the battery pack fully charged. Trickle charging is necessary
because the battery pack can self-discharge even when it is not in use.
NOTE
Do not disconnect the power cord from the monitor during battery
charging.
Monitor Status on Power Interruption

When there is a power failure or sudden power interruption, the monitor status is
as follows.
• When a battery pack is installed in the monitor, the BSM-3532/3552/3562/
3572 bedside monitors operate for about 90 minutes and the BSM-3733/3753/
3763/3773 bedside monitors operate for about 60 minutes on battery power.
• When the monitor has no battery pack installed or the battery pack is
discharged, the monitor turns off. When the AC power is restored, the
monitor turns on automatically. The patient data and settings are stored for
about 30 minutes after power off when <SHOW ADMIT CONFIRMATION
WINDOW> on the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen is set to Off.
When there is a power failure or sudden power interruption, immediately connect

the monitor to the emergency power source. It is recommended to always keep
the battery pack in the monitor.

2. PREPARATION
Turning the Power Off

NOTE
Do not disconnect the power cord while the monitor power is on. Data
may be lost.
Press the [Power] switch on the front panel for more than three seconds to turn
the power off. The screen becomes dark and the power lamp on the front panel
turns off. The power can also be turned off by pressing the [POWER] button on
the remote control.
Check After/Before Turning the Power Off

Check the following items for the next use.
• Previous patient data is deleted.
• Temporarily changed settings are changed back to the previous settings.
• There is no dirt, damage or scratches on the monitor.
• The sensors, probes, transducers, and cables are cleaned and sterilized.
• Accessories are cleaned and stored properly.
• There are enough consumables, such as recording paper, and disposable
electrodes for the next use.
• Battery pack is fully charged.
• The power switch on the monitor is turned off and the power cord is
disconnected from the monitor.
• The monitor is not in a wet place.
• Dead batteries are disposed of properly.
• The medical waste is disposed of properly.
• The monitor is stored properly.

Section 3 Necessary Settings Before
Monitoring 3
Changing Date and Time...................................................................................................................................... 3.2

Changing Sound Volume Settings........................................................................................................................ 3.3
Changing the Screen Brightness.......................................................................................................................... 3.4
Changing Waveform Display Settings................................................................................................................... 3.5
Admitting/Discharging Patient.............................................................................................................................. 3.7
Displaying the ADMIT DISCHARGE Window............................................................................................. 3.7
Stored Data Status and Screen Transition for Admitting Patient................................................................ 3.8
Selecting Patient Type.............................................................................................................................. 3.10
Entering the Patient Information............................................................................................................... 3.11
Entering the Patient ID................................................................................................................... 3.11
Entering the Patient Name............................................................................................................. 3.12
Entering the Date of Birth and Age................................................................................................ 3.14
Entering the Height and Weight..................................................................................................... 3.15
Entering the Gender....................................................................................................................... 3.16
Entering the Pacemaker Use......................................................................................................... 3.16
Admitting a Patient............................................................................................................................................. 3.18
Discharging a Patient......................................................................................................................................... 3.20
Suspended Alarms After Admission or Discharge................................................................................... 3.22

3. NECESSARY SETTINGS BEFORE MONITORING
Changing Date and Time
When the power is on, the current time is displayed in the upper right corner of
the screen.
NOTE
When the date or time is changed during monitoring, the date and time of
all stored data is also changed and may not match the date and time on
the printout.
1. Display the DATE window.

Press the [Menu] key → DATE key.
The DATE window can also be displayed by touching the time on the upper
right corner of the home screen.
2. Touch the YEAR, MONTH, DAY, HOUR or MINUTE key.
3. Touch the desired number(s) using the numeric keypad.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter other items.
5. Touch the SET key. The SET key must be touched before changing
windows. Otherwise the setting changes back to the previous setting.
When the set date is incorrect, the “OUT OF RANGE” message appears on
the screen. Enter the correct date.
6. Press the [Home] key to return to the home screen.

Changing Sound Volume Settings
On the VOLUME window, you can select sync sound on or off and adjust the 3
sync sound volume and alarm sound volume.
1. Display the VOLUME window.

Press the [Menu] key → VOLUME key.
2. Change any settings.

• Select ON or OFF in the <SYNC SOUND VOLUME> box to set sync
sound volume on or off.
• To change the sync sound volume, touch the or key or drag the
slider to the desired level on the setting bar in the <SYNC SOUND
VOLUME> box. At the lowest volume setting, the sync sound is not
audible. When ON is selected, there is a beeping sound.
• To change the alarm sound volume, touch the or key to adjust the
setting or drag the slider to the desired level on the setting bar in the
<ALARM VOLUME> box. At the lowest volume setting, the alarm is still
audible.
NOTE
Set the alarm volume depending on the monitoring environment.
When you drag the slider or touch the key to the lowest level, the
alarm sound goes to the minimum volume.
3. After changing settings, press the [Home] key to return to the home screen.

Changing the Screen Brightness
When operating on battery power, the brightness is automatically set to

minimum.
1. Display the BRIGHT page.

Press the [Menu] key → DISPLAY key →BRIGHT tab.
2. Touch the desired place on the setting bar in the <BRIGHTNESS> box. Use
the or key or drag the slider to the desired level on the setting bar to
adjust the setting.

Changing Waveform Display Settings
The following items can be set for the home screen configuration. 3
• Blood pressure waveform display mode

• Number of ECG waveforms
• Respiration/CO2 waveform sweep speed
• Waveform sweep speed (except for respiration, CO2 and EEG waveform)
• Waveform display on the home screen
1. Display the WAVES page.

Press the [Menu] key → DISPLAY key →WAVES tab.
2. Change settings.
To change the number of ECG waveforms, select 1, 2 or 3 in the <NO. ECG
WAVES> box.
To change the blood pressure waveform display mode, select one of the
following in the <PRESS SCALE> box.
SEPARATE: Blood pressure waveforms are displayed separately on
different scales.
COMMON: Blood pressure waveforms are displayed on the same scale.
DUAL: Blood pressure waveforms are separated into arterial blood
pressures and other type of blood pressures. The arterial blood
pressures are labeled ART, ART-2, RAD, DORS, AO, FEM,
UA, LVP and P1 to P7*1*2.
* The P4 to P7 labels are available only when the QI-374P interface is
2
installed to the bedside monitor.
To change the sweep speed of waveforms other than respiration, CO2 and
EEG waveforms, select a speed in the <SWEEP SPEED> box.
To change the respiration/CO2 waveform sweep speed, select from one of

four speeds in the <RESP/CO2 SWEEP SPEED> box.
To change the waveform display of the following parameters on the home

screen, select a parameter in the <WAVE DISPLAY> box. Available
parameters are SpO2, FLOW, Paw, VOL, EEG, EEG2 and IBP.
NOTE
• When both BIS and EEG are monitored, both EEG waveforms are
displayed.
• FLOW, Paw and VOL keys are not available for the Op No. 32A,
52A, 72A, 33A, 53A and 73A.

Admitting/Discharging Patient
Before admitting a new patient, you must first delete all data of a previous 3
patient. Refer to the “Discharging Patient” section.
CAUTION
When admitting a new patient, first delete all data of the previous
patient. Otherwise, the data of the previous patient and new patient
will be mixed together.
NOTE
After turning the monitor on and when admitting a patient on the monitor,
make sure that the time displayed at the upper right of the screen is
correct. When the date or time is changed during monitoring, the date and
time of all stored data is also changed and may not match the date and
time on the printout.
Displaying the ADMIT DISCHARGE Window

1. Display the MENU window.
• Press the [Menu] key on the monitor.
• Press the [MENU/HOME] key on the remote control.
• Touch the MENU function key on the screen.
2. Touch the ADMIT DISCHARGE key to display the ADMIT DISCHARGE

window.
The ADMIT DISCHARGE window can also be displayed by the following

ways.
• Touch the patient name area at the upper part of the home screen.

• When <ADMIT MODE> is set to MANUAL, the STANDBY window

appears after discharging a patient. The STANDBY window depends on
the <STANDBY MODE> setting in the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
screen. When <STANDBY MODE> is set to Off, the ADMIT key appears
on the STANDBY window. When <STANDBY MODE> is set to On,
the MONITOR key appears on the STANDBY window. You can start
monitoring a patient immediately after touching the MONITOR key.
3. Admit or discharge a patient.
4. Close the window.

• Press the [Home] key on the monitor.
• Press the [MENU/HOME] key on the remote control.
• Touch the HOME function key on the screen.
• Touch the waveform or current trendgraph display area on the home
screen.
Stored Data Status and Screen Transition for Admitting Patient

When <ADMIT MODE> is set to AUTO and <SHOW ADMIT
CONFIRMATION WINDOW> is set to On on the DATA MANAGEMENT
window of the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen, the ADMIT
CONFIRMATION window appears when the monitor power is turned on. Touch
the YES key to monitor a new patient. Touch the NO key to continue monitoring
the same patient.

CONFIRMATION WINDOW> is set to Off on the DATA MANAGEMENT
window of the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen and the monitor is turned
off for more than 30 minutes, the patient data and settings are deleted and
monitoring starts about 5 seconds after power on. After turning the power on,
admit the patient by doing the procedure in the “Admitting a Patient” section.


window of the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen and the power is turned
off for less than 30 minutes, the previous patient data and settings are kept and
monitoring of the same patient resumes. To monitor a new patient after turning 3
the power on again, admit the patient by doing the procedure in the “Admitting a
Patient” section.
When <ADMIT MODE> is set to MANUAL and <SHOW ADMIT

window of the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen and the previous patient
was not discharged before turning the power off, the ADMIT CONFIRMATION
window appears when the power is turned on again. Touch the YES key to
monitor a new patient. Touch the NO key to continue monitoring the same
patient.

window of the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen and the patient was
discharged before turning the power off, the “DISCHARGED” message and
STANDBY window appear when the power is turned on again. The STANDBY
window depends on the <STANDBY MODE> setting in the SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION screen. Touch the ADMIT key to display the ADMIT
page of ADMIT DISCHARGE window and admit the patient by doing the
procedure in the “Admitting a Patient” section. Touch the MONITOR key to start
monitoring a patient immediately.

window of the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen, the monitor is turned off
for more than 30 minutes and the patient was not discharged before turning the
power off, the patient data and settings are deleted and monitoring starts about 5
seconds after power on. You should admit the patient by doing the procedure in
the “Admitting a Patient” section.

window of the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen, the monitor power is off
for less than 30 minutes and the patient was not discharged before turning the
power off, the patient data and settings are kept and monitoring of the previous
patient resumes. To monitor a new patient after the power is turned on, admit the
patient by doing the procedure in the “Admitting a Patient” section.

window of the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen and the patient was
discharged before turning the power off, the “DISCHARGED” message and
STANDBY window appear when the power is turned on again. The STANDBY
window depends on the <STANDBY MODE> setting in the SYSTEM

CONFIGURATION screen. Touch the ADMIT key to display the ADMIT

page of ADMIT DISCHARGE window and admit the patient by doing the
procedure in the “Admitting a Patient” section. Touch the MONITOR key to start
monitoring a patient immediately.
Selecting Patient Type

Select the patient type. The alarm settings, scale settings and other settings
change to the default settings according to the patient type.
NOTE
The patient type setting and QRS detection type setting (on the ECG
window) are independent of each other.
1. Display ADMIT page of the ADMIT DISCHARGE window. For details on

how to display the ADMIT DISCHARGE window, refer to the “Displaying
the ADMIT DISCHARGE Window” in this section.
2. Touch the PATIENT TYPE key. The PATIENT TYPE window is displayed.

3. Select the patient type. A confirmation message appears.
The selected alarm

master is displayed.
Refer to Administrator’s
Guide, Section 3.
4. Touch the YES key to change the patient type.

Touch the NO key to cancel changing.
Entering the Patient Information

Enter a patient ID, name, birth date, height, weight, gender and pacemaker use.
Entering the Patient ID

The patient ID can be entered with the screen keyboard or from the central
monitor. Up to 16 alphanumeric characters can be entered. The patient ID can
only be displayed on the PATIENT ID window. The patient ID is necessary to
identify the patient on the central monitor network.
Entering the Patient ID Using the Keyboard

1. Touch the PATIENT ID key to display the PATIENT ID window.
Cursor Enter patient ID.
Touch the desired Deletes the character

character. after the cursor.
The cursor moves
to the right. Deletes the character
before the cursor.
Touch to enter
the patient ID.
Touch to enter capital Enter space. Moves the cursor one block (one character).
letters.
2. Enter the patient ID by using the keyboard keys.

3. Touch the ENT key.
4. Touch the key to close the PATIENT ID window.
Entering the Patient Name

There are two methods to enter the patient name. You can use both methods
together.
KEYBOARD: Use the keyboard keys displayed on the window. Up to 15
alphanumeric characters can be entered.
FREE: Any character or image you have drawn on the free writing area
appears as the patient name.
When the monitor is connected to a monitor network, the FREE window is not
available. When the patient name is entered from the FREE window and the
monitor is then connected to a network, the patient name on the bedside monitor
is deleted and the patient name entered on the central monitor appears on the
bedside monitor.
Entering the Patient Name Using the Keyboard

1. Touch the NAME tab. The NAME window appears.
Enter patient
name. Deletes the character
after the cursor.
Cursor Deletes the character

before the cursor.
Touch the desired Touch to enter the

character. The patient name. The
cursor moves to registered patient name
the right. appears on the patient
name area on the
monitoring screen.
Touch to enter capital Enter space. Moves the cursor one block (one character).
letters.
2. Enter the patient name by using the keyboard keys.
3. Touch the ENT key. The patient name appears in the patient name area on
the home screen.
4. Touch the key to close the NAME window.

Entering the Patient Name Using Free Function

1. Touch the NAME (FREE) tab. The free writing area appears.
2. Write the patient name with your finger or touch pen in the free writing area.
Scrolls the writing area left or right in 11 steps. The displayed 3
Displays the keyboard. writing area is 1/4 of the total available writing area.
Erase all characters.
When finished, press to

set the patient name. The
registered patient name
Patient name appears on the patient
name area on the home
screen.
Writing area. Touch with

your finger or touch pen
to write the patient name.
Your writing appears in
the patient name box.
Sets the touch pen or finger to Sets the touch pen or Sets the touch pen or finger to
fill in a four block square. finger to fill in one block. erase instead of writing.
You can enter any character by drawing it. You can also edit names which
were previously entered by keyboard. For example, you can make European
language characters by drawing accent marks over English characters.
3. Touch the SET key. The patient name appears in the patient name area on the
home screen.

Entering the Date of Birth and Age
CAUTION
When the date of birth or age is not entered, 12 lead ECG
interpretation is performed with the patient as 35 years old.
1. Touch the DATE OF BIRTH key to display the DATE OF BIRTH window.
2. Touch YEAR, MONTH or DAY key or touch the box under the YEAR,
MONTH or DAY key to enter year, month and day.
3. Enter the numbers by using the number keys.
4. Touch the ENT key. The number is entered under the YEAR, MONTH or
DAY box.
5. Touch the SET key. When the year, month and day are entered, age is
automatically calculated and appears at the AGE area on the DATE OF
BIRTH window.
6. Touch the key to close the DATE OF BIRTH window.

Entering the Height and Weight

The height unit (cm or inches) and weight unit (kg or pound) can be set on
the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide,
Section 2.
3
1. Touch the HEIGHT/WEIGHT key to display the HEIGHT AND WEIGHT
window.
2. Touch the HEIGHT or WEIGHT key or the box beside the HEIGHT or
WEIGHT key to enter height and weight.
3. Enter the numbers by using the number keys.
4. Touch the ENT key. When the height and weight are entered, BSA is
automatically calculated and appears at the BSA area on the DATE OF
BIRTH window.
5. Touch the key to close the HEIGHT AND WEIGHT window.

Entering the Gender
CAUTION
When the gender is not specified, 12 lead ECG interpretation is
performed with the patient as male.
1. Touch the GENDER key to display the GENDER window.
2. Touch the MALE or FEMALE key. Touch the - key when the patient sex is
unknown.
3. Touch the key to close the GENDER window.
Entering the Pacemaker Use

1. Touch the PACE MAKER key to display the PACE MAKER window.
2. Touch the YES or NO key.

3. Touch the key to close the PACE MAKER window.
The pacing spike detection can be turned on/off on the OTHER page of the
ECG window. The setting linked between the ADMIT page of the ADMIT
3
DISCHARGE window and the OTHER page of the ECG window.
When the pacing spike detection set to off, the non-paced mark ( ) is
displayed on the upper part of the screen.
WARNING WARNING
Turn the pacing pulse detection* to ON when Even when the pacing pulse detection is set to
monitoring a pacemaker patient. Otherwise the ON, the pacemaker pulse can be overlooked
pacemaker pulse is not rejected. However, even or detected as QRS. You cannot confirm the
when the pacing pulse detection is set to ON, the pacemaker operation only from the detected
pacemaker pulse might not be rejected. When the pacemaker pulse.
pacemaker pulse is not rejected, the pacemaker
pulse is detected as QRS and false heart rate may
be indicated or critical arrhythmia such as asystole
may be overlooked. Keep pacemaker patients
under close observation.
* For the pacemaker pulse rejection capability of BSM-3000

series bedside monitor, refer to the “Specifications - ECG”
section in the Operator’s Manual.
NOTE
When you monitor a premature baby or infant and the monitor miscounts
the narrow width QRS, set this to NO.

Admitting a Patient
WARNING
Check the alarm settings when admitting a new patient and
whenever the patient condition changes and change the alarm
settings if necessary. The alarm settings return to the alarm master
settings on the SYSTEM SETUP window when:
• A patient is admitted or discharged.
• <SHOW ADMIT CONFIRMATION WINDOW> is set to “Off” in the
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen and 30 minutes elapse after
monitor power off.
• “PATIENT TYPE” is changed on the ADMIT DISCHARGE window.
CAUTION
After having entered patient information, you have to take the procedure for
admission.
• Upon admission, the following data is deleted.
- Data on the review windows
- Data on the 12 LEAD ANALYSIS window
- Data on the DRUG window
- Data on the LUNG FUNCTION window
- PCWP value on the CO window
- Thermodilution curve on the CO window
- CO table on the MEASURE page of the CO window
- Current trendgraph on the home screen
• Alarm settings are initialized to the alarm master value.
• Arrhythmia analysis on or off setting is initialized to the master setting.
• QRS detection type is initialized to the master setting.
• NIBP measurements are deleted, the interval at which to measure NIBP is
initialized to the interval master value and the initial cuff inflation pressure is
initialized to the master setting.

1. Display the ADMIT page of the ADMIT DISCHARGE window. For

details on how to display the ADMIT DISCHARGE window, refer to the
“Displaying the ADMIT DISCHARGE Window” in this section.
2. Touch the ADMIT key to admit the patient. The confirmation message 3
appears.
3. Touch the OK key to admit the patient.
If the CANCEL key is touched, the procedure for admission is cancelled, the
previous data is not deleted and the settings are not initialized.
When admission is complete, the ADMIT DISCHARGE window closes and the
admitted patient name appears on the upper left of the screen.

Discharging a Patient
When monitoring the patient is no longer required, discharge the patient on the
DISCHARGE* page.
* For the Op No. 32A, 52A, 72A, 33A, 53A and 73A, the DISCHARGE tab
becomes the NEXT CASE tab when the site setting is OR.
CAUTION
When monitoring the patient is no longer required, delete the data on the
DISCHARGE page. The alarm settings, arrhythmia analysis on or off and QRS
detection type return to the alarm master settings, and the NIBP measurement
mode returns to the INTERVAL MASTER setting on the SYSTEM SETUP
window.
After having discharged the patient, you have to take the procedure for discharge.
• Upon discharge, the following data is deleted.
- Patient information
- Data on the review windows
- Data on the 12 LEAD ANALYSIS window
- Data on the DRUG window
- Data on the LUNG FUNCTION window
- PCWP value on the CO window
- Thermodilution curve on the CO window
- CO table on the MEASURE page of the CO window
- Current trendgraph on the home screen
• Patient type setting returns to the master setting.
• Alarm settings are initialized to the alarm master value.
• Arrhythmia analysis on or off setting is initialized to the master setting.
• QRS detection type is initialized to the master setting.
• NIBP measurements are deleted, the interval at which to measure NIBP is
initialized to the interval master value and the initial cuff inflation pressure is
initialized to the master setting.

1. Display the DISCHARGE page of the ADMIT DISCHARGE window.

For details on how to display the ADMIT DISCHARGE window, refer to
the “Displaying the ADMIT DISCHARGE Window” in this section. The
message confirming the data deletion appears.
3
When DISCHARGE is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper left
of the screen, the DISCHARGE page of the ADMIT DISCHARGE window
can be displayed by touching the DISCHARGE function key.
2. Touch the YES key to discharge the patient.
If the NO key is touched, the procedure for discharging is cancelled, the

previous data is not deleted and the settings are not initialized.
When discharging the patient is complete, the ADMIT DISCHARGE

window closes and the “DISCHARGED” message and the STANDBY
window appear. The patient name is deleted from the upper left of the
screen.
The STANDBY window depends on the <STANDBY MODE> setting in

the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen. Touch the ADMIT key to display
the ADMIT page of ADMIT DISCHARGE window and admit the patient.
Touch the MONITOR key to start monitoring a patient immediately.

When <ADMIT MODE> is set to AUTO, do steps 3 to 4.
3. Check the following items to confirm that all data are deleted.
• Patient name on the home screen is deleted.
• The message on the DISCHARGE page is dimmed.
• ALARMS SUSPENDED message appears and alarms are suspended on
the monitor.
Patient name is deleted. ALARMS SUSPENDED message appears.
The message is dimmed.
Suspended Alarms After Admission or Discharge

The alarm function is suspended between patient discharge and admission and
during monitoring preparation to avoid generating any unnecessary alarms.
Alarms function resumes when the SUSPEND ALARMS key is touched or the
following monitoring conditions are continuously met.
Setting of <ALARM ACTIVATION DELAY>

Condition
on the SYSTEM SETUP window
Alarm function activates when ECG, SpO2 or IBP* is monitored or
NIBP** is measured and a value is displayed.
* When SYS > DIA, the difference between these two values is
AUTO 3 mmHg and this status continues for more than 3 seconds.
** When SYS, DIA or MAP value is measured.
The alarm function is also recovered when the heart rate is 0.

When one of the following requirements is met.
1 min ECG, SpO2 or IBP is continuously monitored for the selected
1
2 min time.
3 min 2 NIBP is measured (SYS, DIA or MAP value is measured).
3 Heart rate becomes 0.

Section 4 Home Screen
4
Safety Precautions for Monitoring........................................................................................................................ 4.3
Using an Electrosurgical Unit..................................................................................................................... 4.3
Using a Defibrillator.................................................................................................................................... 4.3
Overview............................................................................................................................................................... 4.4
Home Screen............................................................................................................................................. 4.4
Review Windows........................................................................................................................................ 4.4
Sync Sound................................................................................................................................................ 4.4
Adjusting the Sync and Alarm Sound Volume............................................................................................ 4.4
Changing Settings and Performing Other Tasks During Monitoring........................................................... 4.4
Site Mode................................................................................................................................................... 4.5
Recording/Printing on the Home Screen.................................................................................................... 4.5
Interbed Monitoring.................................................................................................................................... 4.5
Home Screen........................................................................................................................................................ 4.6
Settings for the Home Screen ................................................................................................................... 4.7
Waveform Sweep Mode and Speed................................................................................................. 4.7
Waveform Display on the Home Screen.......................................................................................... 4.7
Pacing Mark Position on the ECG Waveform................................................................................... 4.7
ST Waveform and Reference ST Recall Waveform Display on the Home Screen On or Off........... 4.7
Blood Pressure Waveform Display Mode......................................................................................... 4.8
IBP Waveform Display Area on the Home Screen........................................................................... 4.8
PPV or SPV Display on the Home Screen....................................................................................... 4.8
Pulse Rate Display on the Home Screen......................................................................................... 4.8
Current Average CO and PCWP Values Display on the Home Screen............................................ 4.9
Trendgraph/OCRG Display on the Home Screen On or Off............................................................. 4.9
Scale Setting for the Trendgraph on the Home Screen.................................................................... 4.9
Parameter Colors............................................................................................................................. 4.9
Waveform Sensitivity........................................................................................................................ 4.9
Cascade ECG Waveform................................................................................................................. 4.9
Displaying Other Windows from the Home Screen.................................................................................. 4.10
Displaying OCRG............................................................................................................................................... 4.11
Freezing Waveforms........................................................................................................................................... 4.12
Using Sleep Mode.............................................................................................................................................. 4.13
Turning Sleep Mode On........................................................................................................................... 4.14
Turning Sleep Mode Off........................................................................................................................... 4.14
Displaying the LARGE NUMERICS Screen....................................................................................................... 4.15
Using the Timer.................................................................................................................................................. 4.18

4. HOME SCREEN
This section explains how to monitor the patient’s waveforms and data.
Before monitoring the patient:

• Prepare the patient and equipment according to Sections 2 to 3 and 5 to 9 in
this manual, Sections 1 to 3 of the Administrator’s Guide, and the User’s Guide
Part II. When using an optional recorder, also see Section 10 in this manual.
• Before monitoring a new patient, follow the flowchart in Section 2 in this
manual.
• Read the safety precautions in the “Safety Precautions for Monitoring” section.
In this section:
• “Overview” gives general information for all monitoring.
• “Displaying OCRG” explains about displaying OCRG.
• “Freezing Waveforms” explains how to freeze waveforms.
• “Using Sleep Mode” explains how to use sleep mode.
• “Displaying LARGE NUMERICS screen” explains about displaying large
numeric data.
• “Using the Timer” explains how to use the timer.

4. HOME SCREEN
Safety Precautions for Monitoring
Before beginning monitoring, observe the following safety precautions and the
safety precautions in the User’s Guide Part II for ECG and other parameters.
4
Using an Electrosurgical Unit
WARNING WARNING
Electrosurgical units (ESU) emit a lot of RF Locate the monitor as far as possible from the
interference. If the monitor is used with an ESU, ESU. Locate them on opposite sides of the
RF interference may affect the monitor operation. operating table, if possible.
WARNING WARNING
Connect the monitor and ESU to different AC When the monitor is used with an electrosurgical
outlets located as far as possible from each other. unit (ESU), firmly attach the entire area of the
ESU return plate. Otherwise, the current from
the ESU flows into the electrodes of the monitor,
causing electrical burn where the electrodes are
attached. For details, refer to the ESU manual.
Using a Defibrillator
WARNING
Before defibrillation, all persons must keep clear of the bed and must
not touch the patient or any equipment connected to the patient.
Failure to follow this warning may cause electrical shock or injury.
If the ECG waveform on the screen is too unstable to synchronize with the
patient’s heart beat because of the following reason(s), remove the cause(s)
of an alarm, message, or unstable ECG, and then use a stable ECG lead for
synchronization.
• ECG electrode is detached or broken. Lead wire is detached or broken.

• Lead wire moves. AC interference, EMG noise or noise from ESU is
superimposed.
• Connection cable is broken or has a short circuit. Connector has poor contact.

4. HOME SCREEN
Overview
Home Screen
When you first begin monitoring, a home screen appears. The home screen
displays waveforms and numeric data for ECG and other parameters. Any time
you press the [Home] key, the home screen appears.
The parameters on the home screen depend on the measured parameters.
starts when the connection cord is connected to the socket on the monitor and
electrodes or probe is attached to the patient.
NOTE
When <SHOW ADMIT CONFIRMATION WINDOW> is set to “Off” in the
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen, the stored data remains in memory
for about 30 minutes after the power is turned off. After 30 minutes, the
stored data is lost.
Review Windows
The trend, arrhythmia recall, alarm history, full disclosure, ST level recall and
12 lead windows display the stored data. For details about the review windows,
refer to Section 6.
Sync Sound
During monitoring, a continuous “pip” sounds in synchronization with either
the QRS or pulse waveform. QRS is the default setting. Refer to “Changing the
Sync Sound Source” in Section 1, 4 or 6 of the User’s Guide Part II to change the
source of the sync sound.
Adjusting the Sync and Alarm Sound Volume

The sync sound volume and alarm sound volume can be adjusted on the
VOLUME window. At the lowest setting, the alarm sound is audible but the sync
sound is not audible. Refer to “Changing Sound Volume Settings” in Section 3.
Changing Settings and Performing Other Tasks During Monitoring

Every screen except the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen always displays
at least one real-time ECG waveform and the numeric data of monitoring
parameters. This lets you monitor the patient continuously without interruption
while you do other tasks, such as changing settings, printing reports, or viewing
trendgraphs. The screen returns to the home screen when there is no key
operation for about 3 minutes.

4. HOME SCREEN
Site Mode
The site mode can be selected from OR, ICU and NICU according to the
environment. The default settings, including alarm upper and lower limit
settings, differ according to site. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 2.
OR: The “BYPASS” key is displayed on the MENU window.

The “OCRG” and “SLEEP” keys are not displayed on the MENU 4
window.
ICU: The “BYPASS” and “OCRG” keys are not displayed on the MENU
window.
NICU: The “BYPASS” and “ST” keys are not displayed on the MENU
window.
When “ALL ALARMS OFF” is selected for ALARMS OFF TYPE on the
ALARM window of the SYSTEM SETUP window, the “ALL ALARMS OFF”
key is displayed instead of the “BYPASS” or “SUSPEND MONITORING” key
on the MENU window. Refer to “Alarm Window” in the Administrator’s Guide,
Section 3.
For details on the functions of the “BYPASS”, “SUSPEND MONITORING”

and “ALL ALARMS OFF” keys, refer to “Silencing and Suspending Alarms” in
Section 5.
Recording/Printing on the Home Screen

When the optional WS-371P recorder module is installed in the monitor, the
waveforms on the home screen can be recorded. ECG and up to two parameters
selected on the RECORD window is recorded when the [Record] key is
pressed. When RECORD WAVE is assigned to one of the function keys at the
upper left corner of the screen, touching the RECORD WAVE function key also
records ECG and parameters.
When “PRINT WAVE” is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper left
corner of the screen, all monitoring waveforms and numeric data can be printed
on the network printer when the function key is touched.
For details, refer to Section 10 “Recording”.
Interbed Monitoring
When the bedside monitor is connected to a central monitor, the bedside monitor
data can be sent to the central monitor. Up to 20 beds in the network can be
registered as “interbed” beds and monitoring data of the selected interbed bed
can be displayed on the INTERBED window. When an alarm occurs at an
interbed bed, the highlighted bed name appears on the upper right corner of the
home screen. The interbed alarm can also be silenced from this bedside monitor.
Refer to Section 9 “Interbed Window”.

4. HOME SCREEN
Home Screen
When you first begin monitoring, a home screen appears. To return to the home
screen from another window or screen, press the [Home] key.
When a window is displayed and there is no operation for about 3 minutes, the
screen automatically returns to the home screen.
The home screen is automatically laid out according to the measured parameters.
The layout changes when a measuring parameter changes.
The settings for monitoring parameters can be changed individually on the

parameter window. For details about individual parameters, refer to the User’s
Guide Part II.
Patient type
QRS sync mark Heart rate Cuff type Bed ID Patient name ECG Current date and time
ECG
VPC
sensitivity
ST level
ECG lead
NIBP
SYS/DIAS ECG filter
(MAP) mode
NIBP
measurement QRS
time detection
type
NIBP
measurement IBP scale
mode
IBP IBP
SYS/DIAS waveforms
(MEAN)
SpO2 pulse
sensitivity
SpO2 pulse
Temperature SpO2 Respiration rate Trendgraph Respiration waveform waveform
The respiration rate can only be detected from one parameter. When CO2,
respiration and anesthetic gas are monitored at the same time, the respiration rate
is detected in the following priority.
Gas > FLOW > CO2 > impedance respiration
When <DISPLAY IMP-RR AS SECOND PARAMETER> on the OTHER page

of the RESP/CO2 window is set to ON, the respiration rate is detected from two
parameters. Refer to the User’s Guide Part II, Section 2.

4. HOME SCREEN
You can “freeze” (stop sweeping) the waveforms on the home screen. By
freezing the waveforms, you can observe one part of a waveform in detail.
The numerical data on the screen are not frozen. For details, refer to “Freezing
Waveforms” section.
The latest 30 minute parameter data can be displayed as trendgraph on the

home screen. This trendgraph can be dragged by touching the right edge of the 4
trendgraph and moving it right or left.
An OCRG can be displayed on the home screen instead of a trendgraph. Refer to

“Displaying OCRG” section.
The timer can be displayed on the home screen. Refer to the “Using the Timer”
section.
Settings for the Home Screen

Waveform Sweep Mode and Speed
The waveform displaying mode (fixed or moving) on the home screen can be set
on the DISPLAY window of the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to “SYSTEM
Window” in the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
The sweep speed of waveforms other than respiration/CO2 and EEG waveforms
on the home screen can be selected from one of four speeds: 6, 12.5, 25 or 50
mm/s at <SWEEP SPEED> on the DISPLAY window.
The respiration and CO2 waveform sweep speed on the home screen can be
selected from one of four speeds: 1, 6, 12.5 or 25 mm/s at <RESP/CO2 SWEEP
SPEED> on the DISPLAY or RESP/CO2 window.
Waveform Display on the Home Screen

The waveform display of the following parameters on the home screen can be
selected in <WAVE DISPLAY> on the WAVES page of the DISPLAY window.
Available parameters are SpO2, FLOW, Paw, VOL, EEG, EEG2, ART, PAP and
CVP.
Pacing Mark Position on the ECG Waveform

The position of the pacing mark on the ECG waveform displays on the home
screen and ECG window can be selected on the PARAMETERS window of
the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to “PARAMETERS Window” in the
ST Waveform and Reference ST Recall Waveform Display on the

Home Screen On or Off
The ST waveforms, reference ST recall waveforms, selected monitoring ECG
leads and ST levels display on the home screen are set in <ST WAVE ON HOME
SCREEN> and <ST REF WAVE ON HOME SCREEN> on the ST window of
the REVIEW window.

4. HOME SCREEN
Blood Pressure Waveform Display Mode

There are three ways of displaying blood pressure waveforms. This can be
changed at <PRESS SCALE> on the DISPLAY window or PRESS window.
Refer to “Changing Waveform Display Settings” in Section 3 when changing
the press scale on the DISPLAY window or refer to the “Selecting the IBP
Waveform Display Mode” in the User’s Guide Part II, Section 6 when changing
the press scale on the PRESS window.
SEPARATE: Blood pressure waveforms are displayed separately on different

scales.
COMMON: Blood pressure waveforms are displayed on the same scale.
DUAL: Blood pressure waveforms are separated into arterial blood
pressures and other type of blood pressures. The arterial blood
pressures are labeled ART, ART2, RAD, DORS, AO, FEM, UA,
LVP and P1 to P7*1*2.
* The P4 to P7 labels are available only when the QI-374P interface is installed
2
to the bedside monitor.
IBP Waveform Display Area on the Home Screen

The IBP waveform display area on the home screen can be selected on the
SYSTEM window of the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to “SYSTEM
PPV or SPV Display on the Home Screen

The PPV or SPV display on the home screen can be selected on the OTHER
page of PRESS window. Refer to the “Displaying PPV or SPV on the Home
Screen” in the User’s Guide Part II.
Pulse Rate Display on the Home Screen

On the BSM-3562/3572/3763/3773 bedside monitor, the pulse rates and pulse-
amplitude index (PI) displays in SpO2 areas on the home screen can be set to
on or off on the NUMERIC DISPLAY page of the SpO2 window. Refer to the
“Displaying Pulse Rate and PI on the Home Screen” in the User’s Guide Part II,
Section 4-1.
On the BSM-3552/3753 bedside monitor, the pulse rates display in the SpO2
areas on the home screen can be set to on or off on the NUMERIC DISPLAY
page of the SpO2 window. Refer to the “Displaying Pulse Rate on the Home
Screen” in the User’s Guide Part II, Section 4-2.
On the BSM-3532/3733 bedside monitor, the pulse rate and perfusion index
(PI) display in SpO2 area on the home screen can be set to on or off. Refer to the
“Displaying Pulse Rate and Perfusion Index (PI) on the Home Screen” in the
User’s Guide Part II, Section 4-3.

4. HOME SCREEN
Current Average CO and PCWP Values Display on the Home Screen

Current average CO and PCWP values and the measured time are displayed on
the home screen. The data dims after 15 minutes and disappears from the home
screen after 24 hours. When data is added to the hemodynamics trend table in the
HEMO TREND page of the TREND window, the data disappears from the home
screen.
4
Trendgraph/OCRG Display on the Home Screen On or Off
The trendgraph and OCRG display on the home screen is set at <CURRENT
TREND> setting on the DISPLAY page of the SYSTEM window in the
SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to “SYSTEM Window” in the Administrator’s
Guide, Section 3.
NORMAL: Trendgraph display on the home screen

OCRG 1 cm/min: OCRG display with the horizontal scale 1 cm/min
OCRG 3 cm/min: OCRG display with the horizontal scale 3 cm/min
OFF: No trendgraph/OCRG display on the home screen
Scale Setting for the Trendgraph on the Home Screen

The scale for the trendgraph on the home screen is the same as the setting on the
TREND GRAPH window.
Parameter Colors
The parameter colors are set on the COLOR window of the SYSTEM SETUP
window. Refer to “COLOR Window” in the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
Waveform Sensitivity
Waveform sensitivity can be changed on the parameter window. Refer to the
User’s Guide Part II.
Cascade ECG Waveform

The ECG waveform can be cascaded. Refer to “DISPLAY Window” in the

4. HOME SCREEN
Displaying Other Windows from the Home Screen

Touching the following items on the home screen displays the following
windows.
Item Window
Numeric value: Parameter setting window
Patient name: ADMIT DISCHARGE window
Time: DATE window
Function key: Window assigned to the function key

4. HOME SCREEN
Displaying OCRG
The OCRG (oxygen-cardio-respirogram) can be displayed on the home screen

instead of a trendgraph.
4
On the OCRG, only HR and SpO2 trendgraphs and compressed respiration
waveform are displayed. When other parameter is monitored, only the numeric
data and waveform for that parameter are displayed on the home screen.
To display OCRG on the home screen, set <CURRENT TREND> to either

OCRG 1 cm/min or OCRG 3 cm/min on the DISPLAY page of the SYSTEM
SETUP window. Refer to “SYSTEM Window” in the Administrator’s Guide,
Section 3.
When the optional WS-371P recorder module is installed in the monitor, OCRG
can be recorded. To record OCRG at any time, assign “RECORD OCRG” to
one of the function keys at the upper left corner of the screen. The OCRG on the
home screen is recorded when the “RECORD OCRG” function key is pressed.
Refer to “KEYS Window” in the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
To record OCRG periodically, set <PERIODIC REC INTERVAL (min)> on the

RECORD window to 5 (OCRG) or 15 (OCRG). The OCRG is recorded at 5 or
15 minute intervals. Refer to “Setting Periodic Recording” in Section 10.
The OCRG on the home screen can be printed on the network printer. To print
OCRG, assign PRINT OCRG key to one of the function keys. Refer to “KEYS
OCRG 1 cm/min OCRG 3 cm/min

4. HOME SCREEN
Freezing Waveforms
Normally, the waveforms continuously sweep across the screen. You can also
“freeze” (stop sweeping) the waveforms. By freezing the waveforms, you can
observe one part of a waveform in detail. The numerical data on the screen are
not frozen.
To freeze waveforms, the freeze function must be assigned to one of the function
keys in the upper left corner of the screen. Refer to “KEYS Window” in the
When the freeze function is assigned to a function key, waveforms on the home
screen can be frozen any time by touching the FREEZE key.
When the waveforms are frozen, the “FREEZE” message appears with the frozen
time.
The waveforms are unfrozen automatically when:

• 3 minutes pass.
• The interbed window appears. (<AUTO INTERBED DISPLAY> on the
Settings page of the INTERBED window must be set to ON. Refer to Section
9 “Interbed Window”.)
To unfreeze the waveforms manually:

• Touch any key on the screen.
• Press any key on the bedside monitor.
When the waveforms are unfrozen by pressing a hard key, the function of that
hard key is also performed. For example, if the [NIBP Start/Stop] key is
pressed, NIBP measurement in manual mode is performed.
4. HOME SCREEN
Using Sleep Mode
In sleep mode, the screen is darkened and sync sound is turned off. The sleep
mode is available only when the site mode is set to ICU or NICU and ZS-900P*
transmitter is connected or the bedside monitor is connected to the central 4
monitor network. To change the site mode, refer to “SITE Window” in the
* The ZS-900P transmitter is not available in USA.
Use this mode when you want to prevent the monitor from disturbing the patient,
such as during sleep.
When <EXIT SLEEP MODE ON CRISIS ALARM> on the SLEEP window of

the SYSTEM SETUP window is set to:
YES: Sleep mode is turned off and the home screen appears when a CRISIS
level alarm occurs.
NO: Sleep mode continues even when an alarm occurs.
When the time is set in the <SLEEP MODE WILL END AT> box on the SLEEP
window of the SYSTEM SETUP window, the monitor exits the sleep mode on
the set clock time.
When the communication between the bedside monitor and central monitor is
interrupted, the bedside monitor exits sleep mode.
WARNING
When using sleep function, monitor the patient on the central
monitor or telemetry system. Otherwise, the bedside monitor alarm
may be overlooked. When <EXIT SLEEP MODE ON CRISIS
ALARM> check box on the ALARM page of the SYSTEM SETUP
window is OFF, bedside monitor alarms and sync sound appear on
the central monitor but do not appear on the bedside monitor during
sleep mode.

4. HOME SCREEN
Turning Sleep Mode On

1. Press the [Menu] key. The MENU window appears.
2. Touch the SLEEP key to set the sleep mode.
When SLEEP is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper left of the
screen or one of the function keys on the remote control keys, the SLEEP
window can be displayed by touching the SLEEP function key. Refer
to “KEYS Window” in the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3 to assign a
function to the function key.
During the sleep mode, the following screen is displayed.
Turning Sleep Mode Off

Touch the screen or press any hard key.
When the sleep mode is turned off by pressing a hard key, the function of that
hard key is also performed. For example, if the [NIBP Start/Stop] key is
pressed, NIBP measurement in manual mode is performed.

4. HOME SCREEN
Displaying the LARGE NUMERICS Screen
The numeric data of all monitoring parameters are enlarged on the LARGE
NUMERICS screen. This window is useful for viewing at a distance.
4
Two types of the LARGE NUMERICS screen are provided. For the difference,
refer to the next page. You can select either type on the DISPLAY page of the
SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to “SYSTEM Window” in the Administrator’s
Guide, Section 3.
When respiration by impedance method, CO2 and anesthetic gas are monitored
at the same time, the respiration rate data on the LARGE NUMERICS screen is
detected in the following priority.
Gas > CO2 > respiration by impedance
2. Touch the LARGE NUMERICS key. The LARGE NUMERICS screen

appears.

4. HOME SCREEN
2×2
Heart rate
IBP SYS/
DIAS
(MEAN)
CVP
SpO2
VPC ST level NIBP IMP-RR Temperature
3×4
Heart rate
IBP SYS/
DIAS
(MEAN)
CVP
SpO2 NIBP
VPC ST level Temperature

4. HOME SCREEN
The NIBP oscillation graph is displayed when:

• <DISPLAY OSCILLATION GRAPH> is set to ON on the OTHER page
of the NIBP window
• Only a few parameters are monitored
Touching the numeric value displays the parameter setting window.
On the LARGE NUMERICS screen, the trendgraph can be dragged by

touching the right edge of the trendgraph and moving it right or left.

4. HOME SCREEN
Using the Timer
A timer window can be displayed on the home screen.
2. Touch the TIMER key. The TIMER window appears on the home screen.
When TIMER is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper left of the
screen or one of the function keys on the remote control keys, the TIMER
window can be displayed by touching the TIMER function key. Refer
to “KEYS Window” in the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3 to assign a

4. HOME SCREEN
3. Touch the START key on the TIMER window. It counts up to 99:59:59.
4. Touch the STOP key to stop the timer. To restart the timer, touch the START
key. 4
5. When stop using the timer, touch the RESET key to reset the timer. The time
returns to 00:00:00.
6. Touch the key to close the TIMER window.
When ALL ALARMS OFF or BYPASS is assigned to one of the function keys
at the upper left of the home screen and the ALL ALARMS OFF or BYPASS
function key is touched, the TIMER window appears on the home screen and it
starts counting up automatically.

Section 5 Alarm Function
Overview of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................. 5.4

What is an Alarm........................................................................................................................................ 5.5 5
Alarm Level................................................................................................................................................ 5.5
Alarm Escalation.............................................................................................................................. 5.5
Alarm Priority.............................................................................................................................................. 5.6
Alarm Sound/Alarm Indicator........................................................................................................... 5.6
Alarm Messages on the Screen....................................................................................................... 5.6
Silencing/Suspending Alarms.................................................................................................................... 5.6
Alarm Master.............................................................................................................................................. 5.7
Automatic Recording.................................................................................................................................. 5.7
Alarm Setting.............................................................................................................................................. 5.7
Canceling the Technical Alarm................................................................................................................... 5.8
Adjusting Alarm Sound Volume.................................................................................................................. 5.8
Alarm Activation After Power On................................................................................................................ 5.9
ALARM HISTORY Window......................................................................................................................... 5.9
Interbed Alarm............................................................................................................................................ 5.9
Alarm Types........................................................................................................................................................ 5.10
Vital Signs Alarms.................................................................................................................................... 5.10
Arrhythmia Alarms.................................................................................................................................... 5.10
Technical Alarms...................................................................................................................................... 5.11
ECG Related Alarms...................................................................................................................... 5.11
CO2 Related Alarms....................................................................................................................... 5.11
Microcap®/Micropod™ Related Alarms.......................................................................................... 5.12
SpO2 Related Alarms..................................................................................................................... 5.12
NIBP Related Alarms..................................................................................................................... 5.13
IBP Related Alarms........................................................................................................................ 5.13
Temperature Related Alarms......................................................................................................... 5.13
BIS Related Alarms........................................................................................................................ 5.14
CO Related Alarms........................................................................................................................ 5.14
Gas Related Alarms....................................................................................................................... 5.14
VENT Related Alarms.................................................................................................................... 5.15
TOF Related Alarms...................................................................................................................... 5.15
CCO (APCO) Related Alarms........................................................................................................ 5.15
CCO Related Alarms..................................................................................................................... 5.16
PiCCO Related Alarm.................................................................................................................... 5.16
FLOW/Paw Related Alarms........................................................................................................... 5.16
EEG Related Alarms...................................................................................................................... 5.16
tcPO2/tcPCO2 Related Alarms........................................................................................................ 5.17
rSO2 Related Alarm........................................................................................................................ 5.17
Other Alarms............................................................................................................................................ 5.17
Messages................................................................................................................................................. 5.18
ECG Related Messages................................................................................................................. 5.18
Respiration Related Messages...................................................................................................... 5.18

CO2 Related Messages.................................................................................................................. 5.18
SpO2 Related Messages................................................................................................................ 5.19
NIBP Related Messages................................................................................................................ 5.19
IBP Related Message.................................................................................................................... 5.20
BIS Related Messages................................................................................................................... 5.20
CO Related Messages................................................................................................................... 5.20
Gas Related Messages.................................................................................................................. 5.21
CCO (APCO) Related Messages................................................................................................... 5.21
FLOW/Paw Related Messages...................................................................................................... 5.21
EEG Related Messages................................................................................................................. 5.22
Microcap®/MicropodTM Related Messages..................................................................................... 5.22
Other Messages............................................................................................................................. 5.22
Alarm Indications................................................................................................................................................ 5.23
Overview.................................................................................................................................................. 5.23
Individual Alarm Indications..................................................................................................................... 5.24
Vital Signs Alarms.......................................................................................................................... 5.25
Arrhythmia Alarms.......................................................................................................................... 5.30
Technical Alarms............................................................................................................................ 5.30
Other Alarms.................................................................................................................................. 5.37
Interbed Alarms.............................................................................................................................. 5.37
Alarm Control Marks................................................................................................................................ 5.38
Individual Vital Signs Alarm Off Marks........................................................................................... 5.38
Flow of Alarm Function............................................................................................................................ 5.39
Silencing and Suspending Alarms...................................................................................................................... 5.40
Overview.................................................................................................................................................. 5.40
Silencing an Alarm......................................................................................................................... 5.40
Suspending Alarms........................................................................................................................ 5.40
Silencing Alarms After Alarm Occurrence................................................................................................ 5.43
Silencing an Alarm......................................................................................................................... 5.43
Canceling Alarm Silence................................................................................................................ 5.43
Suspending Alarms Before Alarm Occurrence........................................................................................ 5.43
Suspending Alarms........................................................................................................................ 5.43
Suspending All Alarms Indefinitely................................................................................................. 5.44
Suspending All Alarms and NIBP STAT and Auto Measurement Indefinitely................................. 5.47
Turning Automatic Alarm Recording On/Off....................................................................................................... 5.49
Setting Alarms.................................................................................................................................................... 5.50
Overview.................................................................................................................................................. 5.50
Alarm Limits Ranges................................................................................................................................ 5.50
Vital Signs Alarms.......................................................................................................................... 5.51
Arrhythmia Alarms.......................................................................................................................... 5.57
Setting Vital Signs Alarms Individually..................................................................................................... 5.59
Automatically Setting All Upper and Lower Alarm Limits......................................................................... 5.60
Automatic Setting Range............................................................................................................... 5.60
Setting All Vital Signs Alarms to a Preset Pattern (Alarm Master)........................................................... 5.62
Setting Arrhythmia Alarms Individually..................................................................................................... 5.63
Setting All Arrhythmia Alarms to a Preset Pattern (Alarm Master)........................................................... 5.65
Interbed Alarm.................................................................................................................................................... 5.67

5. ALARM FUNCTION
This section explains:

• An overview of alarms.
• Alarm types.
• Alarm indications.
• Silencing an alarm.
• Suspending all alarms before occurrence.
• Setting individual alarms, turning automatic alarm recording on or off and all
other functions for alarms.
5

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Overview of Alarms
WARNING WARNING
A physician must be within the range where he/she Do not diagnose a patient based on only the alarm
can hear the alarm sound of the bedside monitor information of the bedside monitor. An alarm may
while monitoring a patient on the bedside monitor. not be indicated due to alarm level or alarm on/off
If the physician cannot hear the alarm sound, setting and critical changes on the patient may be
critical changes on the patient may be overlooked. overlooked.
WARNING WARNING
Check the alarm settings when admitting a If more than one medical equipment is used
new patient and whenever the patient condition together in the same facility, make sure all
changes and change the alarm settings if equipments have the same alarm default settings
necessary. The alarm settings return to the alarm (alarm master). If the medical equipments
master settings on the SYSTEM SETUP window have different alarm default settings and when
when: initialized, the alarm settings differ with the other
• A patient is admitted or discharged. equipments and alarm cannot be managed
• <SHOW ADMIT CONFIRMATION WINDOW> is appropriately in the facility. If using different alarm
set to “Off” in the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION default settings according to areas or wings in the
screen and 30 minutes elapse after monitor facility, manage the alarms appropriately.
power off.
• “PATIENT TYPE” is changed on the ADMIT
DISCHARGE window.
WARNING
When an alarm occurs:
• Check the patient first and take necessary
measure to ensure patient’s safety.
• Remove the cause of the alarm.
• Check the alarm settings on the bedside monitor
and change the alarm settings if necessary.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
What is an Alarm
When the monitor detects an abnormal patient condition, it can generate an alarm
sound, screen indication and alarm lamp indication. When the optional recorder
is installed in the monitor, ECG waveforms and data can be recorded at an alarm
occurrence. You can set each individual alarm condition. There are four types
of alarms: vital signs, arrhythmias, technical and interbed alarms, and three
levels of alarm: crisis, warning and advisory. The different alarm types are fully
explained in the “Alarm Types” section and different alarm levels are explained
5
in the “Alarm Indications” section.
NOTE
When admitting a new patient, check the alarm settings.
Alarm indicator Silence Alarms key
Alarm message
Alarm sound
Alarm Level
There are three alarm levels.
CRISIS: Patient is in critical condition and the patient’s life may be at
risk. Immediate action must be taken. Electrodes or probe off, or
incorrect lead or other cable connections may also cause this alarm.
WARNING: Patient is in critical condition. Prompt action should be taken.
Electrodes or probe off, or incorrect lead or other cable
connections may also cause this alarm.
ADVISORY: Electrodes, probe, cuff, lead and other cable connections
or settings on the monitor are not appropriate for accurate
measurement. Prompt action should be taken.
Alarm Escalation
If the APNEA, SpO2, ECG CHECK ELECTRODES, CANNOT ANALYZE
or SpO2 CHECK PROBE alarm occurs and no action is taken for a selected
duration, the alarm level can be escalated. If an SpO2 value drops below a set
level for a selected duration, the alarm level can also be escalated. Refer to the

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Priority
Alarm Sound/Alarm Indicator
When several alarms occur at the same time, only the alarm with the highest
alarm level is indicated.
Alarm Messages on the Screen

When several alarms (arrhythmia, vital sign and technical alarms) with the same
alarm level occur, the alarm messages for each alarm are alternately displayed on
the home screen. The message display position depends on the alarm level.
Only one interbed ID can be displayed at a time on the home screen. When more
than one interbed alarm occurs, the alarm messages for each alarming interbed
ID are alternately displayed in the alarm level color when the <INTERBED
ALARMS TO DISPLAY> is set to ALL, CRISIS AND WARNING, or CRISIS.
Silencing/Suspending Alarms
You can temporarily silence current alarm sounds and indications for a 1, 2 or 3
minute period. For details, refer to “Silencing and Suspending Alarms” later in
this section. You can also silence an interbed alarm from this bedside monitor but
the alarm silence time depends on the setting on the alarmed bed. For interbed
alarms, refer to Section 9 “Interbed Window”.
WARNING WARNING
During alarm suspension (“ALARMS Do not turn all alarms off with the ALL ALARMS
SUSPENDED” or “ALL ALARMS OFF” message OFF or BYPASS key when there is no medical
displayed), all alarms are turned off. Be careful staff around the patient or when the patient is
when you suspend the alarm. connected to a ventilator.
The BYPASS key is only available in OR mode. The site mode is set on the
SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
Either the SUSPEND MONITORING, SUSPEND ALARMS or ALL ALARMS

OFF/BYPASS key is displayed on the MENU window. The key to be displayed
on the MENU window is set on the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the
The SUSPEND MONITORING, SUSPEND ALARMS or BYPASS key can be

assigned to one of the function keys. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section
3.
When the monitor connected to the central monitor network, the bedside monitor
alarm can be silenced by touching the Silence Alarms key on the central monitor.
For details, refer to the central monitor Operator’s Manual.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Master
For fast and easy alarm setup, a group of alarm items can be set all together
at one time. For example, there may be typical alarm settings at your hospital,
or you may have certain alarm settings for certain patients. There is one alarm
master for vital signs and one alarm master for arrhythmias. The alarm masters
are set by the administrator on the MASTER window of the SYSTEM SETUP
window.
5
Even when alarms are set by an alarm master, individual alarm settings can still
be changed on the ALARM LIMITS and ARRHYTH ALARMS windows or the
alarm setting window of each parameter window. Refer to “Setting Alarms” in
this section.
WARNING
If more than one medical equipment is used together in the same
facility, make sure all equipments have the same alarm default
settings (alarm master). If the medical equipments have different
alarm default settings and when initialized, the alarm settings
differ with the other equipments and alarm cannot be managed
appropriately in the facility. If using different alarm default settings
according to areas or wings in the facility, manage the alarms
appropriately.
Automatic Recording
When the optional recorder is installed in the monitor, you can set the monitor to
automatically record ECG waveforms and data when an alarm occurs. Refer to
“Turning Automatic Alarm Recording On/Off” later in this section.
If a higher level alarm occurs during another alarm recording, the present alarm
recording is canceled and the higher level alarm is recorded.
From the bedside monitor, the alarm recording cannot be recorded on the
recorder of the connected central monitor.
Alarm Setting
Usually, alarms are set before monitoring, but alarms can be set or changed
anytime without interrupting monitoring.
All alarm settings return to the alarm master settings of the SYSTEM SETUP
window when:
• The monitor power is off for more than 30 minutes when <SHOW
ADMIT CONFIRMATION WINDOW> is set to Off in the SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION screen.
• The patient is admitted or discharged.
• PATIENT TYPE is changed on the ADMIT DISCHARGE window.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
To set a parameter alarm to off, set the upper and lower limits to OFF.
WARNING WARNING
Check the alarm settings when admitting a If more than one medical equipment is used
new patient and whenever the patient condition together in the same facility, make sure all
changes and change the alarm settings if equipments have the same alarm default settings
necessary. The alarm settings return to the alarm (alarm master). If the medical equipments
master settings on the SYSTEM SETUP window have different alarm default settings and when
when: initialized, the alarm settings differ with the other
• A patient is admitted or discharged. equipments and alarm cannot be managed
• <SHOW ADMIT CONFIRMATION WINDOW> is appropriately in the facility. If using different alarm
set to “Off” in the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION default settings according to areas or wings in the
screen and 30 minutes elapse after monitor facility, manage the alarms appropriately.
power off.
• “PATIENT TYPE” is changed on the ADMIT
DISCHARGE window.
CAUTION CAUTION
When the alarm limit is set to OFF, there will be When the alarm is turned OFF for an arrhythmia,
no alarm for that limit. Be careful when you set there will be no alarm for that arrhythmia type.
the alarm limit to OFF. There is no message or mark to indicate that a
certain arrhythmia alarm is turned off. Therefore,
be careful when you turn off an arrhythmia alarm.
CAUTION
When the ZS-900P transmitter is attached to the
bedside monitor, check the alarm, arrhythmia
and monitoring settings on the central monitor
or telemetry system. The transmitter does not
transmit the alarm, arrhythmia and monitoring
setting information.
Canceling the Technical Alarm

When you remove a sensor cable or probe cable from the bedside monitor and
press the [Silence Alarms] key, the technical alarm can be canceled. Touching
the SUSPEND MONITORING, SUSPEND ALARMS, BYPASS and ALL
ALARMS OFF keys also cancel the technical alarm.
Adjusting Alarm Sound Volume

The alarm sound volume can be adjusted on the VOLUME window. Refer to
“Changing Sound Volume Settings” in Section 3.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Activation After Power On
CAUTION
After the monitor power is turned on, parameter-related alarms do
not function until the parameters are monitored.
5
starts when the connection cord is connected to the socket on the monitor and the
electrodes or probe are attached to the patient. The alarm activates when one of
the following occurs:
• ECG, SpO2 or IBP is monitored or NIBP is measured and a value is displayed
(when AUTO is selected for <ALARM ACTIVATION DELAY> on the
ALARM window of the SYSTEM SETUP window).
• ECG, SpO2 or IBP is continuously monitored for the selected time (when 1
min, 2 min or 3 min is selected for <ALARM ACTIVATION DELAY>).
• NIBP is measured (when 1 min, 2 min or 3 min is selected for <ALARM
ACTIVATION DELAY>).
ALARM HISTORY Window

The vital sign data is saved as a file on a vital sign or arrhythmia alarm
occurrence. These data can be viewed on the ALARM HISTORY window. Refer
to “Alarm History Window” in Section 6.
Interbed Alarm
When an alarm occurs on an interbed bed, the interbed alarm occurs on this
bedside monitor. For details, refer to “Interbed Alarm” later in this section.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Types
Alarms are divided into four categories: vital signs, arrhythmia, technical and
interbed alarms. The alarm name is displayed on the screen when an alarm
occurs. For the vital signs and arrhythmia alarms, waveforms and data can be
recorded in automatic alarm recording when an optional recorder is installed in
the monitor.
For the alarm types which are not classified into alarm levels, only the message
is displayed.
Vital Signs Alarms

Vital sign alarm occurs when the parameter value exceeds the upper or lower
alarm limit.
Arrhythmia Alarms
Arrhythmia Name Description
Longer than 3 to 10 seconds (selectable) with no
ASYSTOLE
QRS complex.
VF Ventricular fibrillation longer than 4 seconds.
Ventricular tachycardia. 3 to 9 (selectable*1) or more
VT consecutive VPCs when heart rate exceeding the VT
heart rate limit (16 to 300 beats/min selectable*1).
Extreme tachycardia exceeding the EXTREME
EXT TACHY*1
TACHY limit.
Extreme bradycardia dropping below the
EXT BRADY*1
EXTREME BRADY limit.
Ventricular bradycardia. 3 or more consecutive
V BRADY*1 VPCs when heart rate dropping below V BRADY
heart rate limit (15 to 299 beats/min selectable).
VPC short run. 3 to 8 (selectable) consecutive VPCs
VPC RUN when heart rate exceeds the VPC RUN heart rate
limit (16 to 300 beats/min selectable*1).
Supraventricular tachycardia. 3 to 9 (selectable)
or more consecutive normal QRS of regular R-R
SV TACHY*1
interval when heart rate exceeding the SV TACHY
TACHYCARDIA Heart rate above the upper heart rate limit.
BRADYCARDIA Heart rate below the lower heart rate limit.
PAUSE*1 1 to 3 seconds (selectable) with no QRS.
V RHYTHM*1 Ventricular rhythm. 3 or more consecutive VPCs.
COUPLET VPC couplet (paired VPCs). 2 consecutive VPCs.
Early VPC including R-on-T type. VPC with a time
interval from the preceding normal QRS complex of
EARLY VPC less than approximately one-third of the normal R-R
interval, at heart rate dropping below
120*2 beats/min.
Two different shaped VPCs within the last
MULTIFORM*1
3 minutes.

5. ALARM FUNCTION

Ventricular bigeminy. 3 or more consecutive pairs of
BIGEMINY VPC and normal QRS. A dominant rhythm of N-V-
N-V-N-V (N = normal beat, V = ventricular beat).
Ventricular trigeminy. A dominant rhythm of N-N-
TRIGEMINY*1
V-N-N-V.
Frequent VPCs. VPC rate (VPCs/min) reaching
FREQ VPC or exceeding the preset limit of 1 to 99 VPCs/min
(selectable).
VPC Ventricular premature contraction. 5
IRREGULAR RR*1 Consistently irregular R-R intervals.
R-R interval 1.75 times longer than the dominant
PROLONGED RR*1
R-R interval.
No QRS and pacing pulse within the bradycardia
NO PACER PULSE*1*3
limit. Oversensing.
No QRS from the preceding pacing pulse for the
PACER NON-
preset time interval (40 to 480 ms selectable). Non-
CAPTURE*1*3
capture.
*1 These become available when EXTENDED is selected for <ARRHYTHMIA

TYPE> on the SYSTEM SETUP screen.
*2 120 beats/min when <QRS DETECTION TYPE> is set to ADULT, 150 beats/
min when <QRS DETECTION TYPE> is set to CHILD or NEONATE.
* Available only when DETECT in the <PACING> box is set to ON.
3
When an arrhythmia alarm is generated, even if the patient recovers quickly from
the arrhythmia, the alarm status continues for a short time. The time depends on
the alarm level.
• CRISIS: 30 s
• WARNING: 20 s
• ADVISORY: 10 s
Technical Alarms
ECG Related Alarms
Alarm Name Description

ECG CHECK
Electrode loose or disconnected.
ELECTRODES
ECG CHECK
Specified electrode loose or disconnected.
ELECTRODE --
ECG MODULE ERROR Module malfunction.
CO2 Related Alarms

The respiration circuit has fluid or fluid prevents
measurement.
CHECK CO2 CELL*1
The respiration circuit has fluid and CO2 cannot be
measured.
CO2 APNEA Apnea exceeded the apnea alarm limit.
CO2 CELL OFF*1 The airway adapter is disconnected.
CO2 CHANGE The CO2 absorption agent must be replaced.
ABSORBENT (Sidestream method only)

5. ALARM FUNCTION

CO2 CHANGE The CO2 adapter is damaged. (Mainstream method
ADAPTER only)
CO2 CHECK SENSOR*2Insufficient sensor light. (Mainstream method only)
CO2 CHECK The AG-400R CO2 unit is disconnected from the
EXTERNAL DEVICE bedside monitor.
CO2 connection cord is disconnected from the socket
CO2 CONNECTOR OFF
during measurement. (Mainstream method only)
CO2 DEVICE ERROR CO2 unit failure. (Sidestream method only)
The airway adapter, FilterLine or exhaust gas
CO2 LINE BLOCK
adapter is clogged. (Sidestream method only)
The FilterLine is not properly connected to the
CO2 NO FILTERLINE CO2 unit or an unspecified sampling tube is used.
(Sidestream method only)
CO2 SENSOR ERROR CO2 sensor is damaged. (Mainstream method only)
*1 These alarms are displayed when <AVAILABLE ALARM TYPES> is set to
ALL on the SYSTEM SETUP window.
*2 This alarm is displayed when <AVAILABLE ALARM TYPES> is set to
MAIN on the SYSTEM SETUP window.
Microcap®/Micropod™ Related Alarms

CO2 CHECK The external instrument is disconnected from the
EXTERNAL DEVICE bedside monitor.
The external instrument or interface failure.
CO2 DEVICE ERROR Communication error between the bedside monitor
and external instrument.
The airway adapter, filterline or exhaust gas tube is
CO2 LINE BLOCK
clogged and CO2 cannot be measured.
The filterline is not connected to the external
CO2 NO FILTERLINE
instrument or an unspecified tube is connected.
SpO2 Related Alarms

SpO2 CANNOT
Pulse cannot be detected.
DETECT PULSE
SpO2 CHANGE PROBE SpO2 probe or connection cord is damaged.
Finger probe is not attached to the patient firmly
SpO2 CHECK PROBE or the amount of transmitted light is too small to
measure.
SpO2 CHECK PROBE The probe is not attached at the appropriate site or
SITE the probe is past its expiration date.
SpO2 connection cord is disconnected from the SpO2
socket during monitoring.
The probe cable is disconnected from the SpO2
connection cord. (when using a Nellcor or a Masimo
SpO2 CONNECTOR
probe only)
OFF
The probe is not connected to the patient cable
correctly. (when using a Masimo probe only)
The monitor cannot identify the connected probe.
(when using a Masimo probe only)
SpO2 LIGHT
Too much light on probe.
INTERFERENCE

5. ALARM FUNCTION

SpO2 MODULE ERROR SpO2 hardware malfunction.
The probe is not connected to the SpO2 connection
SpO2 NO PROBE
cord.
NIBP Related Alarms

NIBP AIR LEAK Cuff pressure does not change after inflation. 5
Measurement cannot be performed because the
NIBP CANNOT patient’s pulse wave is small, the cuff or hose leaks
DETECT PULSE air, the cuff hose is obstructed or the cuff is not
connected.
NIBP CHECK NIBP is measured at 1 minute intervals for more
INTERVAL SETTING than 30 minutes.
NIBP CONNECTOR NIBP hose is disconnected from the cuff socket
OFF during monitoring.
NIBP CUFF Cuff pressure does not decrease after measurement
OCCLUSION has completed.
NIBP HIGH CUFF Enormous pressure was applied by the pressure of
PRESS the cuff.
NIBP MEAS TIME
The measuring time exceeded the specified time.
OUT
NIBP MODULE
NIBP module malfunction.
ERROR
NIBP SAFETY
Instrument automatically stopped inflating.
CIRCUIT RUNNING
NIBP SYSTOLIC OVER Systolic value is outside the measurable range.
IBP Related Alarms

Blood pressure transducer is disconnected from the
PRESS CHECK
IBP connection cord or the IBP connection cord is
SENSOR
damaged.
PRESS CONNECTOR IBP connection cord is disconnected from the socket
OFF during measurement.
PRESS THIS LABEL
More than one IBP connection cord with the same
IS ALREADY
label are used.
REGISTERED
Temperature Related Alarms

Temperature sensor is disconnected from the
TEMP CHECK TEMP socket or temperature connection cord is
SENSOR disconnected from the MULTI socket, or the probe
or connection cord is damaged.
TEMP CONNECTOR Temperature connection cord is disconnected from
OFF the socket during monitoring.
TEMP THIS LABEL
More than one temperature probe with the same
IS ALREADY
label are used.
REGISTERED

5. ALARM FUNCTION
BIS Related Alarms

BIS CHECK The BIS monitor is disconnected from the bedside
EXTERNAL DEVICE monitor. (when using a BIS monitor only)
The BIS sensor is detached from the patient. (when
using a BIS processor or a BISx only)
The BIS sensor is disconnected from the PIC Plus
patient interface cable. (when using a BIS processor
or a BISx only)
BIS CHECK SENSOR The PIC Plus patient interface cable is disconnected
from the BIS processor. (when using a BIS processor
or a BISx only)
The impedance between the BIS sensor and skin
is too high. (when using a BIS processor or a BISx
only)
The BIS processor is disconnected from the
connection cord or the connection cord is
BIS CONNECTOR OFF
disconnected from the monitor. (when using a BIS
processor or a BISx only)
BIS MODULE Faulty BIS processor. (when using a BIS processor
FAILURE or a BISx only)
The BIS sensor failure. (when using a BIS processor
BIS SENSOR ERROR
or a BISx only)
BIS sensor is past its expiration date. (when using a
BIS SENSOR EXPIRED
BIS processor or a BISx only)
CO Related Alarms

Tb sensor is disconnected from the CO connection
CO CHECK SENSOR
cord or the CO connection cord is damaged.
CO connection cord is disconnected from the socket
CO CONNECTOR OFF
during monitoring.
Gas Related Alarms

GAS APNEA Apnea exceeded the apnea alarm limit.
Measure switch on the unit is turned off.
The connection cable is disconnected from the
monitor.
An error occurs in the communication between the
GAS CHECK
unit and monitor.
EXTERNAL DEVICE
The power cord is disconnected. (GF-210R/220R
only)
<GAS MEASUREMENT> on the GAS window is
OFF. (GF-110PA/120PA and GF-210R/220R only)
The sampling gas inlet on the water trap or sampling
GAS CHECK SAMPLE
gas outlet on the rear panel of the unit is pressurized.
LINE
(AG-920R only)
The water trap is not attached properly. The
GAS CHECK WATER sampling line is not connected properly.
TRAP An unspecified sampling line is used. (GF-210R/
220R only)

5. ALARM FUNCTION

GAS CHECK The water trap is clogged.
WATERTRAP AND The sampling line is clogged.
SAMPLE LINE The exhaust gas tube is clogged.
GAS DEVICE ERROR Faulty unit.
The water trap is clogged.
GAS LINE BLOCK The sampling line is clogged.
The exhaust gas tube is clogged.
Two anesthetic agents are detected at the same time 5
when the vaporizer is changed.
GAS MIXED GAS Wrong agent is delivered to the vaporizer.
Two anesthetic agents are detected when two
vaporizers operated at the same time.
GAS OVERHEAT Faulty fan. (GF-210R/220R only)
VENT Related Alarms

VENT ALARM Alarm occurring on the ventilator.
The ventilator is disconnected from the bedside
VENT CHECK monitor.
EXTERNAL DEVICE Communication error between the bedside monitor
and ventilator.
TOF Related Alarms

TOF ALARM There is an error on the TOF-watch® SX.
The TOF-watch® SX is disconnected from the
TOF CHECK bedside monitor.
and TOF-watch® SX.
CCO (APCO) Related Alarms

The FloTrac sensor is disconnected from the APCO/
IBP processor.
CCO CHECK SENSOR The specified FloTrac sensor is not used.
The cable or sensor is damaged.
APCO/IBP processor internal system failure.
The arterial waveform is not accurate enough for
measuring CCO.
The arterial waveform is not accurate enough for a
CCO CHECK
long period.
WAVEFORM
The IBP line is not appropriate.
The arterial systolic pressure is too high or arterial
diastolic pressure is too low.
The APCO/IBP processor is disconnected from the
CCO CONNECTOR
monitor.
OFF
The APCO/IBP processor is damaged.
CCO MODULE
Faulty APCO/IBP processor.
FAILURE

5. ALARM FUNCTION

CCO SVV: HIGHLY
The pulse rate changes greatly from the arrhythmia,
VARIABLE PULSE
etc. The SVV value might not be reliable.
RATE
CCO Related Alarms

CCO ALARM Alarm on the CCO monitor.
The CCO monitor is disconnected from the bedside
CCO CHECK monitor.
and external device.
PiCCO Related Alarm

The PiCCO monitor is disconnected from the
PCCO CHECK bedside monitor.
and external device.
FLOW/Paw Related Alarms

FLOW APNEA Apnea exceeded the apnea alarm limit.
Measure switch on the unit is turned off.
The connection cable is disconnected from the
monitor.
FLOW CHECK An error occurs in the communication between the
EXTERNAL DEVICE unit and monitor.
The power cord is disconnected. (GF-220R)
<FLOW/Paw MEASUREMENT> on the FLOW/
Paw window is OFF.
FLOW CONNECTOR Faulty flow tube.
OFF The flow tube is disconnected from the unit.
FLOW DEVICE ERROR Faulty unit.
EEG Related Alarms

The electrode is dry or not attached to the patient.
The electrode lead is disconnected from the EEG
connection cord.
Contact between the electrode lead clip and
electrode is poor (when using disposable
EEG CHECK electrodes).
ELECTRODES
The electrode lead is damaged.
Abnormal electrode polarization.
The electrode impedance is too high.
The EEG connection cord is disconnected then
connected.

5. ALARM FUNCTION

EEG CHECK The neuro unit is disconnected from the bedside
EXTERNAL DEVICE monitor.
The EEG connection cord is disconnected from the
EEG CONNECTOR
neuro unit.
OFF
The EEG connection cord is damaged.
tcPO2/tcPCO2 Related Alarms

5
tcPO2/PCO2 ALARM Alarm on the transcutaneous monitor.
The transcutaneous monitor is disconnected from
tcPO2/PCO2 CHECK the bedside monitor.
and transcutaneous monitor.
rSO2 Related Alarm

The cerebral/somatic oximeter is disconnected from
rSO2 CHECK the bedside monitor
and cerebral/somatic oximeter.
Other Alarms
– – – ALARM Alarm concerning the – – – (parameter name).
BATTERY ERROR Battery problems.
BATTERY WEAK Battery pack is fully discharged.
CLOCK IC FAILURE The clock IC is damaged.
COMMUNICATION
LAN cable problems or incorrect network settings.
LOSS
The settings for HL7 are not correct.
HIS SYNC ERROR
The entered patient ID is not correct.
MPU MODULE
MPU circuit malfunction.
ERROR
Communication failure between QF series
MULTILINK CONFIG
interface or IF series communication cable and
ERROR
monitor.
MULTILINK POWER
Multi-link power supply failure.
ERROR
PARAMETER NOT Connected cord or cable of the parameter is not
AVAILABLE available on the monitor.
PRINT ERROR Printing failed.
--- THIS PARAMETER
More than the specified number of channels are used
IS ALREADY
for a parameter.
REGISTERED
TRANSMITTER The connection cord of the transmitter is
CONNECTOR OFF disconnected from the monitor.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Messages
The following messages are monitoring information and are not considered
alarms.
ECG Related Messages
Message Description
ARRHYTHMIA
Arrhythmia analysis is turned off.
ANALYSIS OFF
ECG AUTO LEAD Monitoring lead is being changed by auto lead
CHANGE change function.
Noise interference for more than 30 seconds and
CANNOT ANALYZE* heart rate cannot be counted and arrhythmia cannot
be analyzed.
ECG LEARNING Learning QRS for arrhythmia analysis.
The baseline is not stable due to respiration or body
movement.
EMG noise is superimposed.
The electrode is pulled by the lead.
The electrode is dry.
ECG NOISE* The contact between the lead and electrode is poor.
High electrode impedance.
An electric blanket is used.
Equipment which emits strong electromagnetic
interference is nearby. e.g. ESU, cellular phone.
Equipotential grounding is not acquired.
Paced QRS is detected. (This message appears only
ECG PACING
when <PACING DETECT> is set to ON.)
* When <ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS> on the ECG window is set to ON, a

“CANNOT ANALYZE” message appears instead of “ECG NOISE”. If the
“CANNOT ANALYZE” message is displayed for more than 30 seconds, the
message changes to an alarm.
Respiration Related Messages
Message Description
Respiration monitoring in impedance mode is turned
RESP OFF
off.
CO2 Related Messages
Message Description
Zero calibration is not performed when using a
CO2 CAL??
TG-950P, TG-970P or TG-980P CO2 sensor kit.
CO2 CAL COMPLETE Calibration is complete. (Sidestream method only)
CO2 CAL ERROR Calibration failed. (Sidestream method only)
Measurement of the sensitivity calibration is
CO2 PLEASE WAIT completed and calculation is started. (Sidestream
method only)
Purging to remove clogging of the sampling path.
CO2 PURGING
(Sidestream method only)
The CO2 unit is warming up. (Sidestream method
CO2 WARMING UP
only)

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Message Description
CO2 ZERO Zero calibration is being performed. (Sidestream
CALIBRATING method only)
Zero calibration is being performed when using a
TG-900P or TG-920P CO2 sensor kit.
CO2 CALIBRATING
Calibration is being performed. (Sidestream method
only)
CO2 measurement value exceeds the measurement
OUT OF RANGE*
range.
UNSPECIFIED Temperature or pressure exceeds the operating 5
ACCURACY* environment.
* These messages are displayed when <AVAILABLE ALARM TYPES> is set to
ALL on the SYSTEM SETUP window.
SpO2 Related Messages
Message Description
SpO2 CANNOT
Pulse cannot be detected.
DETECT PULSE
SpO2 CHECK PROBE The probe is not attached to the appropriate site or
SITE the probe is damaged.
Searching for the correct pulse wave. Auto gain
SpO2 DETECTING control is being done. When the message is
PULSE* displayed for more than 20 seconds, the detected
pulse is too small to measure.
SpO2 LOW QUALITY
Pulse waveform is not stable.
SIGNAL
SpO2 WEAK PULSE Poor peripheral circulation.
* When this message is displayed for more than 30 seconds, the message
changes to the “CANNOT DETECT PULSE” alarm.
NIBP Related Messages
Message Description
NIBP INFLATION
Insufficient cuff inflation pressure.
PRESS LOW
NIBP INFLATION
Venous puncture cuff inflation time is passed.
TIME PASSED
NIBP MEASURING
Start venous puncture during NIBP.
NIBP
Measurement and cuff inflation started before the
NIBP PLEASE WAIT
cuff is deflated enough.
NIBP REMEASURING Remeasuring NIBP.
NIBP zero balance adjustment is performed. If
NIBP ZEROING the message does not disappear, the monitor has a
malfunction.
NIBP WEAK PULSE Patient’s pulse is small.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
IBP Related Message
Message Description
PRESS OUT OF
The measured value is outside the measurable range.
RANGE
PRESS ZERO
Zero balance adjustment is performed.
CALIBRATING
PRESS ZERO
Zero balance is not adjusted.
IMBALANCE
PRESS ZERO OUT OF
Cannot adjust zero balance.
RANGE
PRESS ZERO
Unstable zero balance.
UNSTABLE
PRESS ZEROING
Zero balance adjustment is complete.
COMPLETE
BIS Related Messages
Message Description
The impedance between the BIS sensor and skin
BIS HIGH
is too high. (when using a BIS processor or a BISx
IMPEDANCE
only)
BIS CHECKING The impedance of the BIS sensor is being checked.
IMPEDANCE (when using a BIS processor or a BISx only)
Noise interference. (when using a BIS processor or a
BIS NOISE
BISx only)
CO Related Messages
Message Description
CO BASELINE DRIFT Baseline is not stable.
CO CHECK Ti TEMP* The injectate temperature is not measured.
CO DETECTING
Searching for the baseline of the blood temperature.
BASELINE
CO INJECT Injectate is not injected.
CO INJECTION TIME
The injectate is not injected within the specified time.
OUT
CO MEASURING CO Measuring the CO value.
CO OUT OF RANGE Measured value is outside the measurable range.
CO Tb TEMP ERROR The blood temperature is out of range.
CO Returned to the baseline of the thermodilution curve
THERMODILUTION too late.
CURVE ERROR Possible endocardial shunt.
CO Ti TEMP ERROR The injectate is not cooled.
* On the Op No. 32K, 52K, 62K, 72K, 33K, 53K, 63K and 73K, when
<“CHECK Ti TEMP” MESSAGE> on the OTHER PARAM window of the
SYSTEM SETUP window is turned off, this message does not appear. Refer to
“OTHER PARAM Page” in Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Gas Related Messages
Message Description
GAS CALIBRATING Air or gas calibration is being performed.
Air or gas calibration is complete. (GF-110P/120P
GAS CAL COMPLETE
and GF-210R/220R only)
The sampling line or exhaust gas tube is clogged.
Contaminated air due to leaking prevented air
calibration.
GAS CAL ERROR The pressure in the gas cylinder is less than 0.1 MPa. 5
(AG-920R and GF-110PA/120PA only)
Correct gas is not used for calibration. (AG-920R
and GF-110PA/120PA only)
GAS OUT OF RANGE
The measurement sensitivity has shifted.
Purging to remove clogging from the sampling line.
GAS PURGING
(AG-920R only)
The measured value is outside the accuracy range.
GAS UNSPECIFIED (AG-920R only)
ACCURACY The measurement sensitivity has shifted. (AG-920R
only)
GAS WARMING UP The unit is still warming up.
CCO (APCO) Related Messages
Message Description
The patient’s gender, age and/or BSA are not
CCO CHECK PATIENT entered.
INFORMATION The patient’s gender, age and/or BSA are out of
range.
The arterial waveform is not accurate enough for
measuring CCO.
The IBP line is not appropriate.
CCO UNSTABLE
The arterial systolic pressure is too high or arterial
diastolic pressure is too low.
The patient’s pulse is getting low.
CCO ZERO
Zero balance is not adjusted.
IMBALANCE
The circuit is not exposed to air during zero balance
CCO ZERO adjustment.
UNSTABLE
The pressure of zero balance is unstable.
CCO ZEROING
Zero balance adjustment is complete.
COMPLETE
FLOW/Paw Related Messages
Message Description
FLOW CAL
Zero calibration is complete.
COMPLETE
There was vibration during calibration and zeroing
failed.
FLOW CAL ERROR
Nearby device was generating a strong noise during
calibration and zeroing failed.
FLOW OUT OF
RANGE

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Message Description
FLOW ZERO
Zero calibration is being performed.
CALIBRATING
EEG Related Messages
Message Description
The CAL key on the EEG window is touched to
EEG CALIBRATING
display the calibration waveforms.
EEG CHECKING
Checking electrode impedance.
IMPEDANCE
EEG HIGH
The electrode impedance is too high.
IMPEDANCE
EEG RESETTING The RESET key on the EEG window is touched to
BASELINE return all EEG waveforms to the baseline position.
Microcap®/MicropodTM Related Messages
Message Description
CO2 PURGING Purging to remove clog from the sampling path.
The external instrument is warming up.
CO2 WARMING UP
Measurement is not possible.
CO2 ZERO
Auto zero balance adjustment is being performed.
CALIBRATING
Other Messages
Message Description
ALARMS SILENCED Alarm is suspended.
The [Silence Alarms] key was pressed before
ALARMS SUSPENDED
alarm occurrence.
ALARMS SUSPENDED: X min Remaining suspended time.
ALL ALARMS OFF All alarms are OFF.
CALIBRATING Monitor is calibrated.
CLOSE PAPER MAGAZINE Recorder door is open.
FREEZE Waveforms are frozen.
INSERT REC PAPER No recording paper.
Alarm occurred on an interbed bed of the
Bed name INTERBED ALARM
bed name.
INVALID CARD Invalid SD card is inserted.
MONITOR OFF Monitor cannot access to interbed bed.
PRINTING Printing now.
SIMULATED DATA The displayed data is simulated data.
UPDATING DATA Changing the parameter on the trend screen.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Indications
Overview
The monitor can indicate alarms both visually and audibly:
• Alarm sound
• Alarm message or highlighted numeric data on the screen
• Alarm indicator: red blinking, yellow blinking or cyan or yellow lit LED 5
Alarm control marks indicating that various alarm functions are turned off are
also displayed.
There are two color display modes. The color mode and colors are set on the
PARAMETER: Different colors can be set for each parameter. When an
alarm occurs, the alarmed parameter data is highlighted.
ALARM: The same color is set for all parameters. When an alarm
occurs, the alarmed parameter color changes according to
the alarm level set on the SYSTEM SETUP window.
CRISIS: red
WARNING: yellow
ADVISORY: cyan
or,
CRISIS: red
WARNING: orange
ADVISORY: yellow
The alarm indicator on the monitor indicates three alarm levels: crisis, warning and
advisory. The lamp blinks or lights according to the alarm level. The colors are set
on the SYSTEM SETUP window.
CRISIS: Blinking red
WARNING: Blinking yellow
ADVISORY: Lights in cyan or yellow
Alarm Latching Function

Op No. 32A, 52A, 72A, 33A, 53A and 73A have an alarm latching function. If
alarm latching is enabled, human intervention is required to end the alarm. When
alarm latching is enabled, audible and visual alarms continue until the operator
acknowledges the alarm by silencing or suspending alarms on the bedside
monitor or central monitor. Refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Individual Alarm Indications

The alarm level for the HR/PR (upper and lower), VPC, ST, RR (upper and
lower), APNEA, CO2(E) (upper and lower), CO2(I), SpO2 (upper and lower),
BIS, NIBP, PRESS, TEMP, ΔT, O2(E), O2(I), N2O(E), N2O(I), HAL(E),
HAL(I), ISO(E), ISO(I), ENF(E), ENF(I), DES(E), DES(I), SEV(E), SEV(I),
MV*, Ppeak*, PEEP*, SEF, TP, CCO*, CCI*, ECG CHECK ELECTRODES,
CANNOT ANALYZE, SpO2 CHECK PROBE, and arrhythmia (ASYSTOLE,
VF, VT, V BRADY, EXT TACHY, EXT BRADY, SV TACHY, VPC RUN,
TACHYCARDIA, BRADYCARDIA, COUPLET, EARLY VPC, MULTIFORM,
V RHYTHM, PAUSE, BIGEMINY, TRIGEMINY, VPC, IRREGULAR RR,
PACER NON-CAPTURE, PROLONGED RR, NO PACER PULSE) alarms
can be selected on the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the Administrator’s
Guide, Section 3.
* These alarms are not available for the Op No. 32A, 52A, 72A, 33A, 53A and
73A.
WARNING level arrhythmia, ADVISORY level arrhythmia,

CRISIS level arrhythmia and vital vital sign and technical alarms vital sign and technical
sign alarms message display area message display area alarms message display area
Vital sign alarm display area ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS Interbed alarm display area
(Numeric data is highlighted) message display area
ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS message is not highlighted when the site setting is

NICU.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Vital Signs Alarms

Alarm Sound/Display Alarm
Alarm Alarm Sound Alarm Display
Level Duration Indicator LED
NK1 (Continuous pip sound),
Blinking highlighted
CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or Blinking red
numeric data
IEC standard (ceg-gC)
UPPER/ NK1 (Continuous bing bong
Highlighted numeric
LOWER WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding During detection Blinking yellow
data
HR*/PR ding sound) or IEC standard (ceg)
NK1 and NK2 (Single beep 5
Highlighted numeric Lights in cyan/
ADVISORY every 20 or 120 seconds) or IEC
data yellow
standard (ec)
numeric data
NK1 (Continuous bing bong
Highlighted numeric
VPC WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding During detection Blinking yellow
data
ding sound) or IEC standard (ceg)
NK1 and NK2 (Single beep
data yellow
standard (ec)
numeric data
Highlighted numeric
ST WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding During detection Blinking yellow
data
data yellow
standard (ec)
numeric data
UPPER/ NK1 (Continuous bing bong
Highlighted numeric
LOWER WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding During detection Blinking yellow
data
RR ding sound) or IEC standard (ceg)
data yellow
standard (ec)
NK1 (Continuous pip sound), Highlighted
CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or “APNEA ALARM” Blinking red
IEC standard (ceg-gC) message
NK1 (Continuous bing bong Highlighted
APNEA WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding “APNEA ALARM” During detection Blinking yellow
ding sound) or IEC standard (ceg) message
NK1 and NK2 (Single beep Highlighted
Lights in cyan/
ADVISORY every 20 or 120 seconds) or IEC “APNEA ALARM”
yellow
standard (ec) message
numeric data
UPPER Highlighted numeric
WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding During detection Blinking yellow
SpO2 data
data yellow
standard (ec)
* When arrhythmia analysis is turned on, the “TACHYCARDIA” or “BRADYCARDIA” message also appears.
5. ALARM FUNCTION

numeric data
LOWER IEC standard (ceg-gC)
During detection
SpO2 NK1 (Continuous bing bong
Highlighted numeric
WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding Blinking yellow
data
numeric data
Highlighted numeric
NIBP WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding During detection Blinking yellow
data
data yellow
standard (ec)
numeric data
Highlighted numeric
PRESS WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding During detection Blinking yellow
data
data yellow
standard (ec)
numeric data
Highlighted numeric
TEMP, ΔT WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding During detection Blinking yellow
data
data yellow
standard (ec)
UPPER/ numeric data
LOWER During detection
CO2(E) Highlighted numeric
data
numeric data
CO2(I) During detection
Highlighted numeric
data
numeric data
Highlighted numeric
O2(E) WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding During detection Blinking yellow
data
data yellow
standard (ec)

5. ALARM FUNCTION

numeric data
O2(I) During detection
Highlighted numeric
data
CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or
numeric data
Blinking red 5
Highlighted numeric
N2O(E) WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding During detection Blinking yellow
data
data yellow
standard (ec)
numeric data
N2O(I) During detection
Highlighted numeric
data
numeric data
Highlighted numeric
HAL(E) WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding During detection Blinking yellow
data
data yellow
standard (ec)
numeric data
HAL(I) During detection
Highlighted numeric
data
numeric data
Highlighted numeric
ISO(E) WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding During detection Blinking yellow
data
data yellow
standard (ec)
numeric data
ISO(I) During detection
Highlighted numeric
data

5. ALARM FUNCTION

numeric data
Highlighted numeric
ENF(E) WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding During detection Blinking yellow
data
data yellow
standard (ec)
numeric data
ENF(I) During detection
Highlighted numeric
data
numeric data
Highlighted numeric
DES(E) WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding During detection Blinking yellow
data
data yellow
standard (ec)
numeric data
DES(I) During detection
Highlighted numeric
data
numeric data
Highlighted numeric
SEV(E) WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding During detection Blinking yellow
data
data yellow
standard (ec)
numeric data
SEV(I) During detection
Highlighted numeric
data
numeric data
Highlighted numeric
MV* WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding During detection Blinking yellow
data
data yellow
standard (ec)
* Not available for the Op No. 32A, 52A, 72A, 33A, 53A and 73A.

5. ALARM FUNCTION

numeric data
Highlighted numeric
PEEP* WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding During detection Blinking yellow
data
data yellow
5
standard (ec)
numeric data
Highlighted numeric
Ppeak* WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding During detection Blinking yellow
data
data yellow
standard (ec)
numeric data
Highlighted numeric
SEF WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding During detection Blinking yellow
data
data yellow
standard (ec)
numeric data
Highlighted numeric
TP WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding During detection Blinking yellow
data
data yellow
standard (ec)
numeric data
Highlighted numeric
CCO* WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding During detection Blinking yellow
data
data yellow
standard (ec)
numeric data
Highlighted numeric
CCI* WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding During detection Blinking yellow
data
data yellow
standard (ec)
* Not available for the Op No. 32A, 52A, 72A, 33A, 53A and 73A.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Arrhythmia Alarms

NK1 (Continuous pip
ASYSTOLE Blinking
sound), NK2 (Continuous
VF CRISIS highlighted During detection Blinking red
ping sound) or IEC standard
VT message
(ceg-gC)
NK1 (Continuous pip
Blinking
VPC RUN sound), NK2 (Continuous
CRISIS highlighted Blinking red
COUPLET ping sound) or IEC standard
message
EARLY VPC (ceg-gC)
FREQ VPC NK1 (Continuous bing bong
EXT TACHY* sound), NK2 (Continuous Highlighted During detection
WARNING Blinking yellow
EXT BRADY* ding ding sound) or IEC message
V BRADY* standard (ceg)
SV TACHY* NK1 and NK2 (Single beep
PAUSE* Highlighted Lights in cyan/
ADVISORY every 20 or 120 seconds) or
message yellow
IEC standard (ec)
MULTIFORM* NK1 (Continuous pip
Blinking
V RHYTHM* sound), NK2 (Continuous
CRISIS highlighted Blinking red
BIGEMINY ping sound) or IEC standard
message
TRIGEMINY* (ceg-gC)
IRREGULAR RR* NK1 (Continuous bing bong
PROLONGED sound), NK2 (Continuous Highlighted At detection
WARNING Blinking yellow
RR* ding ding sound) or IEC message
NO PACER standard (ceg)
PULSE* NK1 and NK2 (Single beep
PACER NON- Highlighted Lights in cyan/
CAPUTRE* message yellow
IEC standard (ec)
* Available only when <ARRHYTHMIA TYPE> on the ECG page of the SYSTEM SETUP window is set to
EXTENDED.
Technical Alarms
ECG related alarms
Highlighted
ECG CHECK sound), NK2 (Continuous
WARNING numeric data and Blinking yellow
ELECTRODES ding ding sound) or IEC
message
standard (ceg)
ECG CHECK During detection
ELECTRODE – – NK1 and NK2 (Single beep
Highlighted Lights in cyan/
message yellow
ECG MODULE IEC standard (ec)
ERROR

5. ALARM FUNCTION
CO2 related alarms

Mainstream method
Alarm Display Sound/ Alarm

Alarm
Alarm Alarm Sound Home When a window Display Indicator
Level
screen is open Duration LED
sound), NK2 (Continuous Blinking
WARNING Highlighted message
ding ding sound) or IEC yellow
CHECK CO2 During
standard (ceg)
CELL*1 detection 5
Lights in
ADVISORY every 20 seconds) or IEC Highlighted message
cyan/yellow
standard (ec)
CO2 CELL OFF*1
CO2 CHANGE
ADAPTER
CO2 CHECK NK1 and NK2 (Single beep

During Lights in
SENSOR*2 ADVISORY every 20 or 120 seconds) or Highlighted message
detection cyan/yellow
IEC standard (ec)
CO2 CONNECTOR
OFF
CO2 SENSOR
ERROR
*1 These alarms are displayed when <AVAILABLE ALARM TYPES> is set to ALL on the SYSTEM SETUP window.
*2 This alarm is displayed when <AVAILABLE ALARM TYPES> is set to MAIN on the SYSTEM SETUP window.
Sidestream method

Alarm
Level
CO2 CHANGE NK1 (Continuous bing bong
ABSORBENT sound), NK2 (Continuous During Blinking
ding ding sound) or IEC detection yellow
CO2 LINE BLOCK standard (ceg)
CO2 CHECK
EXTERNAL
DEVICE
During Lights in
CO2 DEVICE ADVISORY every 20 or 120 seconds) or Highlighted message
ERROR IEC standard (ec)
CO2 NO
FILTERLINE

5. ALARM FUNCTION
SpO2 related alarms

Alarm
Level
SpO2 CHANGE
PROBE NK1 (Continuous bing bong
sound), NK2 (Continuous During Blinking
SpO2 CHECK standard (ceg)
PROBE
SpO2 CANNOT
DETECT PULSE
SpO2 CHECK
PROBE SITE
SpO2 NK1 and NK2 (Single beep

During Lights in
CONNECTOR OFF ADVISORY every 20 or 120 seconds) or Highlighted message
IEC standard (ec)
SpO2 LIGHT
INTER-
FERENCE
SpO2 MODULE
ERROR
NIBP related alarms

Alarm
Level
NIBP CUFF
OCCLUSION NK1 (Continuous bing bong
NIBP SAFETY ding ding sound) or IEC detection yellow
CIRCUIT standard (ceg)
RUNNING
NIBP AIR LEAK
NIBP CANNOT
DETECT PULSE
NIBP CHECK
INTERVAL
SETTING NK1 and NK2 (Single beep
During Lights in
ADVISORY every 20 or 120 seconds) or Highlighted message
NIBP MEAS IEC standard (ec)
TIME-OUT
NIBP MODULE
ERROR
NIBP SYSTOLIC
OVER

5. ALARM FUNCTION
IBP related alarms

Alarm
Level
PRESS* CHECK
SENSOR
PRESS*
CONNECTOR OFF During Lights in
ADVISORY every 20 or 120 seconds) or Highlighted message 5
IEC standard (ec)
PRESS* THIS
LABEL IS
ALREADY
REGISTERED
* The labels are displayed for BP.
Temperature related alarms

Alarm
Level
TEMP CHECK
SENSOR
TEMP
IEC standard (ec)
TEMP THIS
LABEL IS
ALREADY
REGISTERED
BIS related alarms

Alarm
Level
BIS CHECK
EXTERNAL
DEVICE
BIS CHECK
SENSOR
BIS MODULE
FAILURE
During Lights in
BIS SENSOR detection cyan/yellow
IEC standard (ec)
ERROR
BIS SENSOR
EXPIRED
BIS THIS
PARAMETER
IS ALREADY
REGISTERED

5. ALARM FUNCTION
CO related alarms

Alarm
Level
CO CHECK
SENSOR NK1 and NK2 (Single beep
During Lights in
CO CONNECTOR IEC standard (ec)
OFF
Gas related alarms

Alarm
Level
GAS APNEA
GAS CHECK NK1 (Continuous bing bong

SAMPLE LINE sound), NK2 (Continuous During Blinking
GAS LINE BLOCK standard (ceg)
GAS MIXED GAS

GAS CHECK
WATER TRAP
AND SAMPLE
LINE
GAS CHECK
EXTERNAL
DEVICE During Lights in
IEC standard (ec)
GAS CHECK
WATERTRAP
GAS DEVICE
ERROR
GAS OVERHEAT
VENT related alarm

Alarm
Level
VENT ALARM
During Lights in
VENT CHECK ADVISORY every 20 or 120 seconds) or Highlighted message
EXTERNAL IEC standard (ec)
DEVICE

5. ALARM FUNCTION
TOF related alarm

Alarm
Level
TOF ALARM
During Lights in
TOF CHECK ADVISORY every 20 or 120 seconds) or Highlighted message
DEVICE
5
CCO (APCO) related alarm

Alarm
Level
CCO CHECK
SENSOR
CCO CHECK
WAVEFORM
CCO
IEC standard (ec)
CCO MODULE
FAILURE
CCO SVV:
HIGHLY
VARIABLE PULSE
RATE
CCO and CCO/SvO2 related alarm

Alarm
Level
CCO ALARM
During Lights in
CCO CHECK ADVISORY every 20 or 120 seconds) or Highlighted message
DEVICE
PiCCO related alarm

Alarm
Level
PCCO CHECK NK1 and NK2 (Single beep Lights
During
EXTERNAL ADVISORY every 20 or 120 seconds) or Highlighted message in cyan/
detection
DEVICE IEC standard (ec) yellow

5. ALARM FUNCTION
FLOW/Paw related alarms

Alarm
Level
FLOW APNEA WARNING Highlighted message
standard (ceg)
FLOW
CONNECTOR OFF
FLOW CHECK NK1 and NK2 (Single beep

During Lights in
EXTERNAL ADVISORY every 20 or 120 seconds) or Highlighted message
DEVICE IEC standard (ec)
FLOW DEVICE
ERROR
EEG related alarms

Alarm
Level
EEG CHECK
ELECTRODES
EEG CHECK NK1 and NK2 (Single beep

During Lights in
EEG
CONNECTOR OFF
tcPO2/tcPCO2 related alarms

Alarm
Level
tcPO2/PCO2
ALARM
During Lights in
tcPO2/PCO2 ADVISORY every 20 or 120 seconds) or Highlighted message
CHECK IEC standard (ec)
EXTERNAL
DEVICE
rSO2 related alarm
Alarm display Sound/ Alarm

Alarm
Alarm Alarm sound Home When a window display indicator
level
screen is open duration LED
rSO2 CHECK NK1 and NK2 (Single beep
During Lights in

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Other Alarms
Sound/
Alarm Alarm
Alarm Alarm Sound Alarm Display Display
Level Indicator LED
Duration
BATTERY ERROR
BATTERY WEAK NK1 (Continuous bing

bong sound), NK2
Highlighted
MULTI LINK CONFIG WARNING (Continuous ding ding During detection Blinking yellow
message 5
ERROR sound) or IEC standard
(ceg)
MULTI LINK POWER
ERROR
COMMUNICATION LOSS
HIS SYNC ERROR
MPU MODULE ERROR
PARAMETER NOT NK1 and NK2 (Single

AVAILABLE beep every 20 or Highlighted Lights in cyan/
ADVISORY During detection
120 seconds) or IEC message yellow
PRINT ERROR standard (ec)
- - - THIS PARAMETER IS
ALREADY REGISTERED
TRANSMITTER
CONNECTOR OFF
Interbed Alarms
The interbed alarm indication depends on the <INTERBED ALARMS TO
DISPLAY> setting on the INTERBED page of the SYSTEM SETUP window.
When set to ALL, CRISIS AND WARNING, or CRISIS, the highlighted bed
name is displayed on the upper right corner of the home screen and three ping
sounds at detection. When set to NONE, only the bed ID of the alarmed bed is
indicated at the upper right corner of the home screen. For details, refer to the

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Control Marks

When certain alarm functions are not available, an alarm control mark and the
message is displayed in the upper part of the screen.
Alarm is silenced by pressing the [Silence Alarms] key on the

bedside monitor or [SILENCE ALARMS] key on the remote control.
Remaining minutes appears.
Alarms are suspended for a certain period.
Alarms are suspended infinitely or vital sign alarm limit is set to off.
Individual Vital Signs Alarm Off Marks

The vital sign alarm off mark can be displayed at every parameter which has
the vital signs alarm limit set to OFF. The upper/lower alarm limits can also be
displayed at each parameter.
Set this setting at <LIMIT DISPLAY> of the ALARM window on the SYSTEM
SETUP window. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3. The default
setting is VALUES.
When <LIMIT DISPLAY> is set to VALUES, for the Op No. 32A, 52A, 72A,
33A, 53A and 73A series, when the limit is set to OFF, “OFF” is displayed. For
Op No. 32K, 52K, 62K, 72K, 33K, 53K, 63K and 73K, when the limit is set to
OFF, “---” is displayed.
Op No. 32A, 52A, 72A, 33A, Op No. 32K, 52K, 62K, 72K,
53A and 73A 33K, 53K, 63K and 73K
LIMIT DISPLAY set to VALUES
LIMIT DISPLAY set to MARK LIMIT DISPLAY set to MARK DIM

BRIGHT

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Flow of Alarm Function
Start monitoring
Suspend all alarms indefinitely
Suspend all alarms by touching the ALL ALARMS

OFF or BYPASS key on the MENU window
The “ALL ALARMS OFF” message with all alarms off mark
appears at the top of the screen. Or, the “BYPASS” and Suspend all alarms by touching the SUSPEND
“ALL ALARMS OFF” message with all alarms off mark MONITORING key on the MENU window
Suspend all alarms for a period

alternately appears at the top of the screen.
No alarms are generated until the alarm function is
re-activated.
The “SUSPEND MONITORING” and “ALARMS SUSPENDED”
message with alarm suspended mark alternately appears at the 5
top of the screen. No alarms are generated until the system resumes
monitoring or alarm function is re-activated.
Suspend all alarms by touching the SUSPEND

ALARMS key on the MENU window
The “ALARMS SUSPENDED --- min” message appears at the
top of the screen. No alarms are generated for a set period.
Arrhythmia Technical Interbed

Vital sign alarm
alarm alarm alarm
Set the upper/lower limits ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS on Connect the monitor to the
on the ALARM LIMIT or off on the ECG window network
window or parameter
Alarm setting and alarm behaviors
window
Off Not connected
Arrhythmia is No interbed
On not analyzed Connected operation
Set alarm on or off for each

Set interbed alarm display
arrhythmia and alarm threshold on the INTERBED page of
Off on the ARRHYTH page of the the SYSTEM SETUP
No alarms ECG window or ARRHYTH window
generated ALARMS window
On Off ALL, CRISIS AND NONE
No alarms generated WARNING, CRISIS No alarms
On even if arrhythmia is generated
detected
An alarm is generated when An alarm is generated An alarm is generated An alarm is generated

the alarm setting value when an arrhythmia is when a technical alarm when an alarm is detected
is exceeded. detected. is detected. on an interbed bed.
Silence Alarms
Identify the cause of the generated alarm and silence the alarm Identify the cause of the
Silence an alarm
by pressing the [Silence Alarms] key generated alarm and

silence the alarm by
The “ALARMS SILENCED --- min” message and the period in which
touching the SILENCE
the alarm is silenced appear at the top of the screen.
ALARM key on the
INTERBED window

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Silencing and Suspending Alarms
Overview
Silencing an Alarm
When an alarm occurs, you can silence the alarm sound and indications for one,
two or three minutes by pressing the [Silence Alarms] key on the bedside
monitor or remote control. When a vital signs alarm or arrhythmia alarm is
silenced, the alarm resumes after the alarm silence ends. When a vital signs
alarm other than NIBP or arrhythmia alarm is silenced, the alarm resumes after
the alarm silence ends. When a technical alarm other than the following alarms is
silenced, the alarm indication does not resume after the alarm silence ends. If the
following alarms are silenced, the alarm resumes after the alarm silence ends.
• BATTERY ERROR
• BATTERY WEAK
• CO2 CHANGE ABSORBENT
• CO2 LINE BLOCK
• ECG CANNOT ANALYZE
• EXTERNAL DEVICE ALARM
• GAS CHECK SAMPLE LINE
• GAS LINE BLOCK
• MULTILINK CONFIG ERROR
• MULTILINK POWER ERROR
• NIBP CUFF OCCLUSION
• NIBP SAFETY CIRCUIT RUNNING
• SpO2 CHANGE PROBE
When several alarms occur together and the [Silence Alarms] key is pressed,
all alarms are silenced. To cancel vital sign or arrhythmia alarm silence, press the
[Silence Alarms] key. <SILENCE ALARMS TIME> is set on the ALARM
window of the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide,
Section 3.
When the Monitor is Connected to the Central Monitor

When the bedside monitor is connected to a central monitor network, all alarms
are temporarily silenced by touching the Silence Alarms key on the central
monitor. Refer to the central monitor operator’s manual for details.
Suspending Alarms
All alarms can also be suspended before they occur. During alarm suspension, all
alarms are off. This monitor has three types of alarm suspension according to the
site mode.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Monitor Example of How This How the Alarm Function

Key to Press
Operation Function is Used Comes Back
Suspends all alarms For electrode replacement. [SUSPEND When 1, 2 or 3 minutes set on
for 1, 2 or 3 minutes ALARMS] key on the the <SUSPEND ALARMS
bedside monitor or TIME> elapse.
remote control When the [SUSPEND
ALARMS] key is pressed
again.
Suspends all When the patient is being examined. SUSPEND When the SUSPEND
alarms and NIBP MONITORING key MONITORING key is touched 5
STAT/SIM and on the screen again.
auto measurement When the patient is connected to a heart- When the condition set for
indefinitely lung machine or being examined. the <ALARM ACTIVATION
DELAY> is met.*1
BYPASS key on the When the BYPASS key is
screen (OR mode only) touched again.
Suspends all alarms When you want to turn off an unnecessary ALL ALARMS OFF When the ALL ALARMS OFF
indefinitely alarm in such situations as when the key on the screen key is touched again.
patient’s vital signs are obviously out
of normal range and the medical staff
are aware that the patient is in an alarm
condition and are currently treating the
patient.
*1 Setting of <ALARM ACTIVATION DELAY> on the SYSTEM SETUP window
Setting Condition
Alarm function activates when ECG, SpO2 or IBP*2 is
monitored or NIBP*3 is measured and a value is displayed.
*2 When SYS > DIA, the difference between these two values
is 3 mmHg and this status continues for more than three
AUTO
seconds.
*3 When SYS, DIA or MAP value is measured.
The alarm function is also recovered when the heart rate is 0.

When one of the following requirements is met.
1 min ECG, SpO2 or IBP is continuously monitored for the selected
1
2 min time.
3 min 2 NIBP is measured (SYS, DIA or MAP value is measured).
3 Heart rate becomes 0.
The BYPASS key is only available in OR mode. The site mode is set on the
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide,
Section 2.
Either the SUSPEND MONITORING, SUSPEND ALARMS, ALL ALARMS

OFF/BYPASS key is displayed on the MENU window. The key to be displayed
on the MENU window is set on the ALARM window of the SYSTEM SETUP
window. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
The SUSPEND MONITORING, SUSPEND ALARMS or BYPASS key can be

assigned to one of the function keys. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section
3.
For the interbed alarm, refer to Section 9 “Interbed Window”.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
The alarm off key on the MENU window
Alarm off keys
ALARM INACTIVATION Setting ICU/NICU Site OR Site
SUSPEND ALARMS
ALARMS OFF TYPE: BYPASS
ALL ALARMS OFF

ALARMS OFF TYPE: ALL ALARMS OFF
Alarm off function

SUSPEND MONITORING key
Use this key to temporarily stop patient monitoring for examination. When this
key is touched, all alarms and NIBP STAT/SIM and auto measurements are
suspended. Alarms resume when the SUSPEND MONITORING key is touched
again or when the <ALARM ACTIVATION DELAY> condition is met.
SUSPEND ALARMS key

Use this key to suspend all alarms for the time set in <SUSPEND ALARMS
TIME>.
BYPASS key
Use this key when the patient is connected to a heart-lung machine. When this
key is touched, all alarms and NIBP STAT/SIM and auto measurements are
indefinitely suspended. Touch the BYPASS key and touch the YES key on the
confirmation window. Alarms resume when the BYPASS key is touched again.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
ALL ALARMS OFF key

Use this key to suspend all alarms indefinitely. Touch the ALL ALARMS OFF
key and touch the YES key on the confirmation window. Alarms resume when
the ALL ALARMS OFF key is touched again.
Silencing Alarms After Alarm Occurrence

During alarm silence,
5
• the “ALARMS SILENCED” message, the suspended mark and the remaining
minutes are displayed
• the alarm sound is silenced
The alarm silence time can be set to either 1, 2 or 3 minutes at <SILENCE

ALARMS TIME> on the ALARM window of the SYSTEM SETUP window.
Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3. The default setting is 2 minutes.
If another alarm occurs during alarm silence, the alarm sound, indication and
recording occur as usual. The alarm silence does not affect alarms which occur
after the [Silence Alarms] key is pressed. (A new occurrence of the silenced
alarm condition is treated as a different alarm.)
Silencing an Alarm
Press the [Silence Alarms] key. The “ALARMS SILENCED” message and the
alarm silenced mark and the minutes remaining in the alarm silence are displayed
on the screen.
Canceling Alarm Silence

Vital sign and arrhythmia alarm silence can be cancelled by pressing the
[Silence Alarms] key. The alarm silence mark disappears and all alarms are
resumed. Parameter alarm and other alarm silence cannot be canceled.
Suspending Alarms Before Alarm Occurrence

Suspending Alarms
By touching the SUSPEND ALARMS key, all alarms for the patient are
suspended for 1, 2 or 3 minutes. The alarm silence time can be set to either 1, 2
or 3 minutes at <SILENCE ALARMS TIME> on the ALARM window of the
SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3. The
default setting is 2 minutes.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
During alarm suspension, all alarms are suspended and

• the “ALARMS SUSPENDED” message is displayed
• the alarm sound is silenced
• all alarm recording is suspended.
Resuming Alarms
Alarms resume when the set minutes elapses or when the [Silence Alarms]
key is pressed again.
Suspending All Alarms Indefinitely

Using the BYPASS Key
You can suspend all alarms and NIBP STAT/SIM and auto measurements for an
indefinite time by touching the BYPASS key on the MENU window.
The BYPASS key is displayed on the MENU window when the site mode is OR
and BYPASS is selected at <ALARMS OFF TYPE> on the ALARM window of
the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
WARNING
Do not turn all alarms off with the ALL ALARMS OFF or BYPASS
key when there is no medical staff around the patient or when the
patient is connected to a ventilator.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
2. Touch the BYPASS key. The following window appears for confirmation.
When BYPASS is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper left of
the screen, touching the BYPASS function key also opens the following
window.
NOTE
If the [Silence Alarms] key is pressed when this window is
displayed, the BYPASS function is cancelled and the alarm is silenced
or suspended.
3. Touch the YES key. To cancel it, touch the NO key.
The “BYPASS” and “ALL ALARMS OFF” messages appear on the screen
alternately.
When the <ALARM INDICATOR LIT> on the ALARM window of the

SYSTEM SETUP window is set to ON, the red lamp of the alarm indicator lights
when all alarms are indefinitely suspended with the BYPASS key.
When BYPASS is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper left of the
screen, touching the BYPASS function key displays the TIMER window. It starts
counting up automatically so that elapsed time can be checked. Refer to “Using
the Timer” in Section 4 for details on the timer.
To resume alarms, touch the “BYPASS” key again. Alarms can only resume by
touching the “BYPASS” key.
To resume NIBP measurement in STAT or Auto mode, press the [NIBP

START/STOP] key. Refer to the User’s Guide Part II, Section 5.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Using the ALL ALARMS OFF Key

You can suspend all alarms for an indefinite time by touching the ALL
ALARMS OFF key on the MENU window. When you start monitoring or during
monitoring, you can use this function to temporarily turn all alarms off.
The ALL ALARMS OFF key is displayed on the MENU window when it is
selected at <ALARMS OFF TYPE> on the ALARM window of the SYSTEM
SETUP window. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
WARNING
Do not turn all alarms off with the ALL ALARMS OFF or BYPASS
key when there is no medical staff around the patient or when the
patient is connected to a ventilator.
2. Touch the ALL ALARMS OFF key. The following window appears for
confirmation.
When ALL ALARMS OFF is assigned to one of the function keys at the
upper left of the screen, touching the ALL ALARMS OFF function key also
opens the following window.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
NOTE
If the [Silence Alarms] key is pressed when this window is
displayed, the ALL ALARMS OFF function is cancelled and the alarm
is silenced or suspended.
3. Touch the YES key. To cancel it, touch the NO key.

The “ALL ALARMS OFF” message appears on the screen.
When <ALARM INDICATOR LIT> on the ALARM window of the SYSTEM

SETUP window is set to ON, the red lamp of the alarm indicator lights when all
alarms are indefinitely suspended with the ALL ALARMS OFF key.
When ALL ALARMS OFF is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper
left of the screen, touching the ALL ALARMS OFF function key displays the
TIMER window. It starts counting up automatically so that elapsed time can be
checked. Refer to “Using the Timer” in Section 4 for details on the timer.
To resume alarms, touch the ALL ALARMS OFF key (or the ALL ALARMS
OFF function key) again. Alarms can only resume by touching the ALL
ALARMS OFF key.
Suspending All Alarms and NIBP STAT and Auto Measurement

Indefinitely
You can suspend all alarms and NIBP STAT/SIM and auto measurements for an
indefinite time by touching the SUSPEND MONITORING key.
The SUSPEND MONITORING key is displayed on the MENU window when

the SUSPEND ALARMS is selected at <ALARM INACTIVATION> on the
ALARM window of the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the Administrator’s
Guide, Section 3.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
2. Touch the SUSPEND MONITORING key. The “SUSPEND

MONITORING” and “ALARMS SUSPENDED” messages appear on the
screen alternately.
To resume alarms, touch the “SUSPEND MONITORING” key again. Alarms

can only resume by touching the “SUSPEND MONITORING” key.
To resume NIBP measurement in STAT or Auto mode, press the [NIBP

START/STOP] key. Refer to the User’s Guide Part II, Section 5.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Turning Automatic Alarm Recording On/Off
If <ALARM RECORDING> on the RECORD window is set to ON and an

alarm occurs, waveforms beginning 8 seconds before and ending 12 seconds
after the alarm are automatically recorded. If this setting is OFF, you can still
record waveforms manually.
5
Recording is only available when the optional recorder is installed in the monitor.
You can select which waveform(s) to record by changing the recording pattern.
Refer to Section 10 “Recording”.
To cancel recording while an automatic vital signs alarm is being recorded, press
the [Record] key.
NOTE
When an arrhythmia alarm is turned OFF on the ARRHYTH ALARMS or
ARRHYTH ALARMS window of the ECG window, there will be no alarm
recording for that arrhythmia type even when <ALARM RECORDING> is
set to ON on the RECORD window.
To set automatic vital signs alarm recording on or off:

1. Display the OTHER page on the RECORD window.
Press the [Menu] key → RECORD key → OTHER tab.
2. Touch the ON or OFF key in the <ALARM RECORDING> box to set alarm
recording on or off.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Setting Alarms
Overview
There are three ways to set alarm limits and on/off settings:
• Set all alarm limits at the same time on one window.
• Set a group of alarm items all together to a preset pattern using an alarm
master.
• Set the alarms for individual parameters separately from the ECG, RESP/CO2,
SpO2, NIBP, PRESS, TEMP, BIS, CO, GAS, FLOW/Paw and EEG windows.
Refer to the User’s Guide Part II.
Vital signs alarm limits can be set on two different windows: the ALARM
LIMITS window and the alarm setting page for the individual parameter. When
you change an alarm setting on one window, the same setting on the other
window is also automatically changed.
Arrhythmia alarm limits can be set on two different windows: the ARRHYTH
ALARMS window and the ARRHYTH window of the ECG window. When you
change an alarm setting on one window, the same setting on the other window is
also automatically changed.
The alarm settings return to the master settings when the monitor power is off for
more than 30 minutes and <SHOW ADMIT CONFIRMATION WINDOW> is
set to Off in the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen or the patient is admitted
or discharged.
To set NIBP alarm limits for neonate, the cuff for neonates must be connected to
the NIBP socket on the monitor.
Alarm Limits Ranges

The following tables show the setting ranges for each alarm. Any upper and
lower limit can also be set to OFF.
Master: Returns to this master setting when the monitor power is off for more
than 30 minutes and <SHOW ADMIT CONFIRMATION WINDOW>
is set to Off in the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen or the patient
is admitted or discharged.
WARNING
Change the anesthetic alarm settings by referring to anesthetic
agent reference information.
CAUTION
When the alarm limit is set to OFF, there will be no alarm for that
limit. Be careful when you set the alarm limit to OFF.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Vital Signs Alarms

If the upper limit is set to a value above the maximum, or the lower limit is set to
a value below the minimum, the alarm for that upper/lower limit is automatically
set to OFF.
Window Page Setting Items Settings Range Step Default Setting Backup
ADULT: 140 beats/min
OFF, 16 to 300 CHILD: 170 beats/min
Upper
HR/PR beats/min*1*3*4 NEONATE:
(When <SYNC 200 beats/min 5
1
SOURCE> is set to ADULT: 50 beats/min
ECG) OFF, 15 to 299 CHILD: 75 beats/min
Lower
beats/min*2*3*4 NEONATE:
100 beats/min
Upper
HR/PR beats/min*1*3*4 NEONATE:
(When <SYNC 200 beats/min
1
SOURCE> is set to ADULT: 50 beats/min
SpO2 or PRESS) OFF, 30 to 299 CHILD: 75 beats/min
Lower
beats/min*2*3*4 NEONATE:
100 beats/min
OFF, 2 to 150
Upper
counts/min*3*4
RR 2 OFF
OFF, 0 to 148
Lower
counts/min*3*4
APNEA Upper OFF, 5 to 40 s*3*4 5 20 s
OFF, 2 to 99 mmHg*3*4 1
Upper OFF
ALARM MAIN OFF, 0.2 to 13.0 kPa*3*4 0.1
CO2 Master
LIMITS ALARMS OFF, 1 to 98 mmHg*3*4 1
Lower OFF
OFF, 0.1 to 12.9 kPa*3*4 0.1
ADULT, CHILD:
OFF,
Upper OFF
51 to 100%SpO2*3*4
NEONATE: 95%SpO2
SpO2 1
ADULT, CHILD:
Lower OFF, 50 to 99%SpO2* * 3 4
90%SpO2
NEONATE: 85%SpO2
Upper OFF, 1 to 100 OFF
BIS 1
Lower OFF, 0 to 99 40
ADULT: 180 mmHg
CHILD: 140 mmHg
OFF, 15 to 260 mmHg 5
NEONATE:
Upper 100 mmHg
ADULT: 24.0 kPa
OFF, 1.5 to 35.0 kPa 0.5 CHILD: 18.5 kPa
NIBP-SYS NEONATE: 13.5 kPa
ADULT: 80 mmHg
OFF, 10 to 255 mmHg 5 CHILD: 65 mmHg
NEONATE: 50 mmHg
Lower
ADULT: 10.5 kPa
OFF, 1.0 to 34.5 kPa 0.5 CHILD: 8.5 kPa
NEONATE: 6.5 kPa
*1 When EXT TACHY alarm setting is ON, HR setting range is 16 (or 31) to EXT TACHY limit, OFF.
*2 When EXT BRADY alarm setting is ON, HR setting range is EXT BRADY limit to 299, OFF.
*3 On the Op No. 32A, 52A, 72A, 33A, 53A and 73A, if <ALARM PRIORITY> is set to CRISIS, the alarm setting is set
to the alarm master setting.
*4 On the Op No. 32A, 52A, 72A, 33A, 53A and 73A, the alarm setting is affected by the <ALARM CAP> setting.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Upper OFF
OFF, 1.5 to 35.0 kPa 0.5
NIBP-DIA
Lower OFF
MAIN OFF, 1.0 to 34.5 kPa 0.5
ALARMS OFF, 15 to 260 mmHg 5
Upper OFF
OFF, 1.5 to 35.0 kPa 0.5
NIBP-MAP
Lower OFF
OFF, 1.0 to 34.5 kPa 0.5
Upper
beats/min*1*2 NEONATE:
200 beats/min
HR/PR 1
ADULT: 50 beats/min
ECG Lower
beats/min*1*2 NEONATE:
ALARMS 100 beats/min
VPC*3 Upper OFF, 1 to 99 beats/min 1 OFF
OFF, –1.99 to 2.00 mV 0.01
Upper OFF
OFF, –19.9 to 20.0 mm 0.1
ST-I to ST-V6
OFF, –2.00 to 1.99 mV 0.01
Lower OFF
OFF, –20.0 to 19.9 mm 0.1
OFF, –48 to 300 mmHg 2
ALARM Upper OFF
P1-SYS to OFF, –6.0 to 40.0 kPa 0.5 Master
LIMITS
P7-SYS*4*5 OFF, –50 to 298 mmHg 2
Lower OFF
OFF, –6.5 to 39.5 kPa 0.5
Upper OFF
PRESS1 P1-DIA to OFF, –6.0 to 40.0 kPa 0.5
ALARMS P7-DIA*4*5 OFF, –50 to 298 mmHg 2
Lower OFF
OFF, –6.5 to 39.5 kPa 0.5
Upper OFF
P1-MEAN to OFF, –6.0 to 40.0 kPa 0.5
P7-MEAN*4*5 OFF, –50 to 298 mmHg 2
Lower OFF
OFF, –6.5 to 39.5 kPa 0.5
Upper OFF
OFF, –6.0 to 40.0 kPa 0.5
ART-SYS* , 2
ADULT: 80 mmHg
ART2-SYS,
OFF, –50 to 298 mmHg 2 CHILD: 66 mmHg
RAD-SYS,
NEONATE: 50 mmHg
AO-SYS, Lower
PRESS2 FEM-SYS ADULT: 10.5 kPa
ALARMS OFF, –6.5 to 39.5 kPa 0.5 CHILD: 9.0 kPa
NEONATE: 6.5 kPa
ART-DIA*2, OFF, –48 to 300 mmHg 2
Upper OFF
ART2-DIA, OFF, –6.0 to 40.0 kPa 0.5
RAD-DIA, AO-DIA, OFF, –50 to 298 mmHg 2
FEM-DIA Lower OFF
OFF, –6.5 to 39.5 kPa 0.5
*3 Only when <ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS> is set to ON.
*4 P3 is only available on the BSM-3733/3753/3763/3773 bedside monitor.
*5 P4 to P7 are available only when the QI-374P interface is installed to the bedside monitor.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Upper OFF
OFF, –6.0 to 40.0 kPa 0.5
ART-MEAN*,
ART2-MEAN, ADULT: 60 mmHg
RAD-MEAN, OFF, –50 to 298 mmHg 2 CHILD: 46 mmHg
AO-MEAN, NEONATE: 30 mmHg
Lower
FEM-MEAN ADULT: 8.0 kPa
OFF, –6.5 to 39.5 kPa 0.5 CHILD: 6.0 kPa
NEONATE: 4.0 kPa
ADULT: OFF 5
NEONATE: OFF
Upper
ADULT: OFF
NEONATE: OFF
DORS-SYS
ADULT: 80 mmHg
NEONATE: 50 mmHg
Lower
ADULT: 10.5 kPa
NEONATE: 6.5 kPa
OFF, –48 to 300 mmHg 2 OFF
Upper
OFF, –6.0 to 40.0 kPa 0.5 OFF
DORS-DIA
OFF, –50 to 298 mmHg 2 OFF
Lower
ALARM PRESS2 OFF, –6.5 to 39.5 kPa 0.5 OFF
ADULT: OFF Master
LIMITS ALARMS
NEONATE: OFF
Upper
ADULT: OFF
NEONATE: OFF
DORS-MEAN
ADULT: 60 mmHg
NEONATE: 30 mmHg
Lower
ADULT: 8.0 kPa
NEONATE: 4.0 kPa
Upper OFF
OFF, –6.0 to 40.0 kPa 0.5
UA-SYS
Lower OFF
OFF, –6.5 to 39.5 kPa 0.5
Upper OFF
OFF, –6.0 to 40.0 kPa 0.5
UA-DIA
Lower OFF
OFF, –6.5 to 39.5 kPa 0.5
Upper OFF
UA-MEAN, OFF, –6.0 to 40.0 kPa 0.5
UV-MEAN OFF, –50 to 298 mmHg 2
Lower OFF
OFF, –6.5 to 39.5 kPa 0.5
* On the Op No. 32A, 52A, 72A, 33A, 53A and 73A, the alarm setting is affected by the <ALARM CAP> setting.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
PAP-SYS*1, Upper OFF
OFF, –6.0 to 40.0 kPa 0.5
RVP-SYS,
LVP-SYS Lower OFF
OFF, –6.5 to 39.5 kPa 0.5
PAP-DIA*1, Upper OFF
OFF, –6.0 to 40.0 kPa 0.5
RVP-DIA,
LVP-DIA Lower OFF
OFF, –6.5 to 39.5 kPa 0.5
PRESS3
ALARMS PAP-MEAN* 1,
1
CVP-MEAN* , OFF, –48 to 300 mmHg 2

RAP-MEAN, Upper OFF
RVP-MEAN, OFF, –6.0 to 40.0 kPa 0.5
LAP-MEAN,
LVP-MEAN,
ICP-MEAN, OFF, –50 to 298 mmHg 2
ICP2-MEAN, Lower OFF
ICP3-MEAN*2, OFF, –6.5 to 39.5 kPa 0.5
ICP4-MEAN*3
ADULT: 38.0°C
OFF, 0.1 to 45.0°C 0.1 CHILD: 38.5°C
NEONATE: 39.0°C
T1 to T2, Tskin, Upper
ALARM ADULT: 100°F
Tskin2, Trect, Tcore, Master
LIMITS OFF, 33.0 to 113.0°F 1.0 CHILD: 101°F
Tnaso, Teso, Ttymp
NEONATE: 102°F
OFF, 0.0 to 44.9°C 0.1
Lower OFF
OFF, 32.0 to 112.0°F 1.0
ADULT: 38.0°C
OFF, 0.1 to 45.0°C 0.1 CHILD: 38.5°C
NEONATE: 39.0°C
Upper
ADULT: 100°F
Tblad, Taxil
TEMP OFF, 33.0 to 113.0°F 1.0 CHILD: 101°F
ALARMS NEONATE: 102°F
OFF, 0.0 to 44.9°C 0.1
Lower OFF
OFF, 32.0 to 112.0°F 1.0
ADULT: 38.0°C
OFF, 15.1 to 45.0°C 0.1 CHILD: 38.5°C
NEONATE: 39.0°C
Upper
ADULT: 100°F
Tb
OFF, 51.0 to 113.0°F 1.0 CHILD: 101°F
NEONATE: 102°F
OFF, 15.0 to 44.9°C 0.1
Lower OFF
OFF, 50.0 to 112.0°F 1.0
OFF, 0.1 to 45.0°C 0.1
ΔT Upper OFF
OFF, 1.0 to 113.0°F 1.0
*2 ICP3-MEAN is only available on the BSM-3733/3753/3763/3773 bedside monitor.
*3 ICP4-MEAN is available only when the QI-374P interface is installed to the bedside monitor.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
OFF,
Upper OFF
2 to 150 counts/min*1*2
RR 2
OFF,
Lower OFF
0 to 148 counts/min* *
1 2
APNEA Upper OFF, 5 to 40 s*1*2 5 20 s

OFF, 2 to 99 mmHg*1*2 1
Upper OFF
OFF, 0.2 to 13.0 kPa*1*2 0.1
CO2(E)
OFF, 1 to 98 mmHg*1*2 1
Lower OFF 5
OFF, 0.1 to 12.9 kPa*1*2 0.1
ADULT OR, CHILD:
3 mmHg
OFF, 1 to 99 mmHg 1
ADULT ICU/NICU,
NEONATE: OFF
CO2(I) Upper
ADULT OR CHILD:
0.4 kPa
OFF, 0.1 to 13.0 kPa 0.1
ADULT ICU/NICU,
NEONATE: OFF
Upper OFF, 11 to 100% OFF
O2(E) 1
Lower OFF, 10 to 99% OFF
O2(I) 1
Lower 18 to 99% 18%
N2O(E) 1
ALARM GAS Lower OFF, 0 to 99% OFF
Master
LIMITS ALARMS Upper OFF, 1 to 100% 80%
N2O(I) 1
Lower OFF, 0 to 99% OFF
Upper OFF, 0.1 to 7.0% OFF
HAL(E) 0.1
Lower OFF, 0.0 to 6.9% OFF
Upper OFF, 0.1 to 7.0% 4.0%
HAL(I) 0.1
ISO(E) 0.1
Upper OFF, 0.1 to 7.0% 5.0%
ISO(I) 0.1
ENF(E) 0.1
Upper OFF, 0.1 to 7.0% 5.0%
ENF(I) 0.1
SEV(E) 0.1
Upper OFF, 0.1 to 7.0% 6.0%
SEV(I) 0.1
DES(E) 0.1
Upper OFF, 0.1 to 20.0% 12.0%
DES(I) 0.1

5. ALARM FUNCTION
ADULT: 10.0 L/min
OFF,
Upper 0.1 CHILD: 6.0 L/min
0.1 to 30.0 L/min
NEONATE: OFF
MV*
ADULT, CHILD:
OFF,
Lower 0.1 2.0 L/min
0.0 to 29.9 L/min
NEONATE: OFF
ADULT, CHILD:
Upper OFF, 1 to 100 cmH2O 40 cmH2O
NEONATE: OFF
Ppeak* 1
ADULT, NEONATE:
Lower OFF, 0 to 99 cmH2O OFF
CHILD: 8 cmH2O
ADULT, CHILD:
Upper 1 to 50, OFF cmH2O 10 cmH2O
ALARM OTHER
NEONATE: OFF Master
LIMITS ALARMS PEEP* 1
ADULT, NEONATE:
Lower OFF, 0 to 49 cmH2O OFF
CHILD: 2 cmH2O
Upper OFF, 1.0 to 60.0 Hz OFF
SEF 0.5
Lower OFF, 0.5 to 59.5 Hz OFF
Upper OFF, 0.02 to 9.99 nW OFF
TP 0.01
Lower OFF, 0.01 to 9.98 nW OFF
Upper OFF, 1.1 to 20.0 L/min OFF
CCO*
Lower OFF, 1.0 to 19.9 L/min OFF
OFF, 0.1
Upper OFF
1.1 to 20.0 L/min/m2
CCI*
OFF,
Lower OFF
1.0 to 19.9 L/min/m2
* These parameters are not available for Op No. 32A, 52A, 72A, 33A, 53A and 73A.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Arrhythmia Alarms
ON fixed ADULT, CHILD: 5 s
ASYSTOLE 1
3 to 10 s NEONATE: 3s
VF ON fixed — ON
ON fixed — ON
ADULT, CHILD:
V BRADY alarm limit
1 100 bpm
VT to 300 bpm
NEONATE: 140 bpm 5
Value set in VPC RUN
1 6 beats
to 9 beats
Op No. 32A, 52A, 72A,
33A, 53A and 73A: ON
ON, OFF — Op No. 32K, 52K, 62K,
72K, 33K, 53K, 63K
EXT TACHY*
and 73K: OFF
ADULT: 160 bpm
Upper heart rate alarm
1 CHILD: 190 bpm
limit to 300
NEONATE: 220 bpm
ARRHYTH ALARMS
Op No. 32A, 52A, 72A,

33A, 53A and 73A: ON
ON, OFF — Op No. 32K, 52K, 62K,
ARRHYTH Master
72K, 33K, 53K, 63K
EXT BRADY*
and 73K: OFF
ADULT: 40 bpm
15 to lower heart rate
1 CHILD: 60 bpm
alarm limit
NEONATE: 80 bpm
ADULT OR, CHILD,
NEONATE: OFF
ON, OFF —
ADULT ICU/NICU:
V BRADY* ON
ADULT, CHILD:
15 to 299 bpm 1 50 bpm
NEONATE: 60 bpm
ADULT OR, CHILD,
NEONATE: OFF
ON, OFF —
ADULT ICU/NICU:
ON
VPC RUN
ADULT, CHILD:
16 to 300 bpm* 1 100 bpm
NEONATE: 140 bpm
3 to 8 beats 1 3 beats
EXTENDED.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
ON, OFF — OFF
ADULT, CHILD:
SV TACHY* 16 to 300 bpm 1 170 bpm
NEONATE: 210 bpm
3 to 9 beats 1 6 beats
ON, OFF — ON
PAUSE* ADULT, CHILD: 3.0 s
1.0 to 3.0 s 0.1
NEONATE: 1.5 s
ARRHYTH ALARMS
ADULT OR, CHILD,

NEONATE: OFF
V RHYTHM* ON, OFF —
ADULT ICU/NICU:
ARRHYTH ON Master
COUPLET ON, OFF — OFF
EARLY VPC ON, OFF — OFF
MULTIFORM* ON, OFF — OFF
BIGEMINY ON, OFF — OFF
TRGEMINY* ON, OFF — OFF
IRREGULAR RR* ON, OFF — OFF
PROLONGED RR* ON, OFF — OFF
NO PACER PULSE* ON, OFF — OFF
PACER NON- ON, OFF — OFF
CAPTURE* 40 to 480 ms 4 400 ms
EXTENDED.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Setting Vital Signs Alarms Individually
CAUTION
When the alarm limit is set to OFF, there will be no alarm for that
limit. Be careful when you set the alarm limit to OFF.
1. Display the ALARM LIMITS window.

5
Press the [Menu] key → ALARM LIMITS key.
Touch the desired tab to change the displayed parameters.
Current measured
value
Upper limit
Selected
parameter
Upper limit slider
Parameter keys
Setting bar
Lower limit
Lower limit slider
Current measured value
2. Touch the parameter key for the limit you want to change. To change the
displaying parameters, use the tabs to change the parameters.
3. Touch and drag the sliders to the desired level on the setting bar. Use the
or to adjust the setting.
If the upper limit is set to a value above the maximum or the lower limit is
set to a value below the minimum, the alarm is set to OFF.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change alarm settings for other parameters.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Automatically Setting All Upper and Lower Alarm Limits

You can automatically set all upper and lower alarm limits with respect to the
current measuring values. This function allows you to suitably set alarm limits
according to a patient.
NOTE
You cannot automatically set any parameters not currently measured or
assigned with invalid values.
Automatic Setting Range

Parameter Upper Limit Value Lower Limit Value Unit
ECG HR HR×1.25 HR×0.75 beat/min
PR PR×1.25 PR×0.75 count/min
ST ST+0.5 ST–0.5 mV
RR RR×1.25+4 RR×0.75–4 count/min
Resp
APNEA (60/RR)×2 — s
NIBP SYS, DIA, MAP NIBP×1.25+10 NIBP×0.75–10 mmHg
SpO2 SpO2 —*1 SpO2–5 %SpO2
IBP (ART, ART2, RAD, DORS, AO,
FEM, UA, PAP, RVP, LVP, SYS, DIA, MEAN IBP×1.25+10 IBP×0.75–10
P1 to 7*3*4) mmHg
IBP (UV, CVP, RAP, LAP, ICP,
MEAN IBP×1.25+5 IBP×0.75–5
ICP2 to 4*3*4)
Temp (Tb, Tskin, Tskin2, Trect, Tcore, Tnaso, Teso,
TEMP+0.5 TEMP–0.5
Ttymp, Tblad, Taxil, T1 to 2) °C
∆T ∆T+0.5 —
O2 (I) O2 (I)×1.1 O2 (I)×0.9
O2 %
O2 (E) O2 (E)×1.25 O2 (E)×0.75
CO2 (I) CO2 (I)×1.25 —
CO2 mmHg
ETCO2 ETCO2×1.25 ETCO2×0.75
N2O (I) N2O (I)×1.2+5 N2O (I)×0.8–5
N2O
N2O (E) N2O (E)×1.2+5 N2O (E)×0.8–5
HAL (I) HAL (I)×1.1+0.5 HAL (I)×0.9–0.5
HAL
HAL (E) HAL (E)×1.1+0.5 HAL (E)×0.9–0.5
ISO (I) ISO (I)×1.1+0.5 ISO (I)×0.9–0.5
ISO
ISO (E) ISO (E)×1.1+0.5 ISO (E)×0.9–0.5
%
ENF (I) ENF (I)×1.1+0.5 ENF (I)×0.9–0.5
ENF
ENF (E) ENF (E)×1.1+0.5 ENF (E)×0.9–0.5
SEV (I) SEV (I)×1.1+0.5 SEV (I)×0.9–0.5
SEV
SEV (E) SEV (E)×1.1+0.5 SEV (E)×0.9–0.5
DES (I) DES (I)×1.2+0.5 DES (I)×0.8–0.5
DES
DES (E) DES (E)×1.2+0.5 DES (E)×0.8–0.5
MV*2 MV×1.25 MV×0.75 L/min
Ppeak*2 Ppeak×1.25 Ppeak×0.75
cmH2O
PEEP*2 PEEP×1.25 PEEP×0.75
BIS Off 40 —
SEF SEF×1.25+2.0 SEF×0.75–2.0 Hz
EEG
TP TP×1.25+0.20 TP×0.75–0.20 nW
*1 Not automatically set (the upper limit value is greater than the lower limit value).
*2 These parameter alarms are not available on the Op No. 32A, 52A, 72A, 33A, 53A and 73A.
*3 P3 and ICP3 are only available on the BSM-3733, BSM-3753, BSM-3763 and BSM-3773 bedside monitor.
*4 P4 to P7 and ICP4 are available only when the QI-374P interface is installed to the bedside monitor.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
1. Display the AUTOMATIC page.

Press the [Menu] key → ALARM LIMITS key → AUTOMATIC tab.
The “Automatically set all parameters based on current data?” message
appears.
2. Touch “YES”. All upper and lower alarm limits are replaced by the values
according to current measurements.
NOTE
Check for valid automatic settings.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Setting All Vital Signs Alarms to a Preset Pattern (Alarm Master)

For fast and easy alarm setup, a group of alarm items can be set all together to
one group of preset settings. This is called an alarm master. This is useful, for
example, if there are typical alarm settings at your hospital, or you have certain
alarm settings for certain patients.
You can also change individual alarm settings, as described in previous pages,
after setting all alarms with an alarm master.
The alarm masters are set by the administrator on the MASTER window of the
SYSTEM SETUP window.
1. Display the ALARM MASTER page.

Press the [Menu] key → ALARM LIMITS key → ALARM MASTER tab.
The “APPLY SETTING FROM MASTER?” message appears.
When <NUMBER OF MASTER SETTINGS> is set to “1”

Select a master to apply.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
2. Touch the YES key to apply all settings of the alarm master. The master
setting is applied to the both vital sign upper/lower limit alarm and
arrhythmia alarm settings.
Touch the NO key to cancel changing the alarm settings to the alarm master
setting.

5
Setting Arrhythmia Alarms Individually

There are 2 patterns of arrhythmia analysis, EXTENDED or STANDARD.
Select the arrhythmia type in the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the
Administrator’s guide, Section 3.
For details about arrhythmia monitoring, refer to “Monitoring Arrhythmia” in the

User’s Guide Part II, Section 1.
WARNING
For arrhythmia monitoring, set <ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS> on the
ECG window to ON. Otherwise, there is no sound or indication for
arrhythmia alarms (except for ASYSTOLE).
CAUTION
When the alarm is turned OFF for an arrhythmia, there will be no
alarm for that arrhythmia type. There is no message or mark to
indicate that a certain arrhythmia alarm is turned off. Therefore, be
careful when you turn off an arrhythmia alarm.
NOTE
If arrhythmia type is changed to “EXTENDED” and the bedside monitor
is connected via network to a central monitor that has old software, the
“Lost communication with instruments in the network” message appears
on the bedside monitor and the bedside monitor cannot be monitored on
the central monitor.
1. Display the ARRHYTH page.

Press the [Menu] key → ARRHYTH ALARMS key → ARRHYTH tab.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
2. Touch the ON or OFF key for each arrhythmia type to set it on or off.
These arrhythmias
are fixed to ON.
Threshold settings
3. For “ASYSTOLE”, “VPC RUN” and “FREQ VPC”, set the detecting
condition with the or key.
NOTE
For Op No. 32A, 52A, 72A, 33A, 53A and 73A:
• Items can be turned on/off but thresholds are fixed and cannot
be changed. The thresholds are set by the administrator on the
MASTER window of the SYSTEM SETUP window.
• Arrhythmia alarm whose priority is set to CRISIS on the ALARM
window of the SYSTEM SETUP window cannot be set to OFF.
• When the “EXT TACHY” or “EXT BRADY” alarm is set to OFF,
the heart rate limit range is 15 to 300 beat/min or OFF.
When EXTENDED is selected for the arrhythmia type in the SYSTEM

SETUP window, touch the threshold to display the ARRHYTH window and
adjust the setting.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Setting All Arrhythmia Alarms to a Preset Pattern (Alarm Master)

For fast and easy alarm setup, a group of alarm items can be set all together to
one group of preset settings. This is called an alarm master. This is useful, for
example, if there are typical alarm settings at your hospital, or you have certain
alarm settings for certain patients.
You can also change individual alarm settings, as described in previous pages,
after setting all alarms with an alarm master.
5
The alarm masters are set by the administrator on the MASTER window of the
SYSTEM SETUP window.
WARNING
For arrhythmia monitoring, set <ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS> on the
ECG window to ON. Otherwise, there is no sound or indication for
arrhythmia alarms (except for ASYSTOLE).
CAUTION
When the alarm is turned OFF for an arrhythmia, there will be no
alarm for that arrhythmia type. There is no message or mark to
indicate that a certain arrhythmia alarm is turned off. Therefore, be
careful when you turn off an arrhythmia alarm.
1. Display the ALARM MASTER page.

Press the [Menu] key → ARRHYTH ALARMS key → ALARM MASTER
tab.
The “APPLY SETTING FROM MASTER?” message appears.

5. ALARM FUNCTION

Select a master setting to apply.
2. Touch the YES key to apply all settings of the alarm master. The master
setting is applied to the both vital sign upper/lower limit alarm and
arrhythmia alarm settings.
Touch the NO key to not change the alarm settings to the alarm master
settings.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Interbed Alarm
When the bedside monitor is connected to a central monitor network, the bedside
monitor can display monitoring data and alarms of up to 20 other beds in the
network on the INTERBED window if the other beds are registered as “interbed”
bed. When an interbed alarm occurs, the monitor acts as follows. The monitor
action depends on the <INTERBED ALARMS TO DISPLAY> setting on the 5
SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to Section 9 of this manual and Section 3 of the
Administrator’s Guide for details.
NOTE
• Parameters which cannot be measured on this monitor are displayed
as “ALARM”.
• The interbed alarm for another bed is lower level than any other alarm
for this bed. Therefore, the interbed alarm might not be indicated during
an alarm for this bed.
INTERBED ALARMS TO DISPLAY ALL, CRISIS AND WARNING,

NONE
Setting CRISIS
Alarm Indicator Off
Three continuous ping sounds (only No sound
Alarm Sound
when the alarm is detected)
The bed ID of interbed The bed ID is highlighted in the alarm
alarm bed is displayed priority color.*1 The bed ID is displayed in white.
in the upper right corner.
When two or more alarms
Home
are detected, the bed IDs
Screen
alternate.
After is touched. Bed ID: remain highlighted Bed ID: remain in white font
Interbed alarm message is
displayed
The bed ID and interbed alarm
Multiple message is highlighted in the alarm
Beds priority color.*1*2
Window
Bed ID: displayed in white

After is touched.
Alarm: remain highlighted
The alarm message and
bed ID are highlighted in
The bed ID and alarm message is
the alarm priority color.
Individual highlighted in the alarm priority
When the vital sign alarm
Bed occurs, the measurement color.*1*2
Window value is also highlighted.
Bed ID: displayed in white
After is touched.
Alarm: remain highlighted
*1 The alarm priority is displayed as set on the interbed bed. The alarm priority color is set at <ALARM PRIORITY
COLOR> on the DISPLAY/SOUND page of the ALARM window of the SYSTEM SETUP screen. Refer to “ALARM
*2 When the alarm of crisis or warning level occur, the message blinks.

Section 6 Review Windows
General................................................................................................................................................................. 6.3
Review Recording...................................................................................................................................... 6.4
Event Bar.............................................................................................................................................................. 6.5
Changing the Displayed Event Types......................................................................................................... 6.6 6
Changing the Time Scale of the Event Bar and Review Window............................................................... 6.6
Scrolling the Event Bar and Review Window.............................................................................................. 6.7
Trend Window....................................................................................................................................................... 6.8
GRAPH 1, GRAPH 2, GRAPH 3 Page....................................................................................................... 6.8
Displaying the GRAPH 1, GRAPH 2 or GRAPH 3 Page................................................................ 6.10
Selecting Parameters for the Trendgraph Display.......................................................................... 6.11
Changing the Trendgraph Scale..................................................................................................... 6.12
Changing the Trendgraph Display Format...................................................................................... 6.13
Recording the Trendgraph.............................................................................................................. 6.14
Printing the Trendgraph.................................................................................................................. 6.15
TABLE 1, TABLE 2, TABLE 3 Page........................................................................................................... 6.17
Displaying the TABLE 1, TABLE 2 or TABLE 3 Page...................................................................... 6.18
Scrolling the Trend Table................................................................................................................ 6.19
Selecting Parameters for the Trend Table Display.......................................................................... 6.19
Selecting the Measurement Interval............................................................................................... 6.20
Recording a Trend Table................................................................................................................. 6.20
Printing a Trend Table..................................................................................................................... 6.21
NIBP TREND Page.................................................................................................................................. 6.23
Displaying the NIBP TREND Page................................................................................................. 6.24
Scrolling the NIBP Trend Table....................................................................................................... 6.25
Selecting Parameters for the NIBP Trend Display.......................................................................... 6.25
Recording a NIBP Trend Table....................................................................................................... 6.26
Printing a NIBP Trend Table........................................................................................................... 6.27
HEMO TREND Page................................................................................................................................ 6.29
Displaying the HEMO TREND Page.............................................................................................. 6.29
Scrolling the Hemodynamics Table................................................................................................ 6.30
Explanation of the Hemodynamics Table....................................................................................... 6.31
Recording a Hemodynamics Table................................................................................................. 6.32
Printing a Hemodynamics Table..................................................................................................... 6.33
LUNG TREND Page................................................................................................................................. 6.34
Displaying the LUNG TREND Page............................................................................................... 6.34
Explanation of the Lung Trend Table.............................................................................................. 6.35
Recording the Lung Trend Table..................................................................................................... 6.36
Printing a Lung Trend Table............................................................................................................ 6.37
Arrhythmia Recall Window.................................................................................................................................. 6.38
General..................................................................................................................................................... 6.38
Arrhythmia List............................................................................................................................... 6.38
Displaying the Arrhythmia Recall Window................................................................................................ 6.40
Selecting the Arrhythmia Types to be Saved as a Recall File.................................................................. 6.41

Scrolling the Arrhythmia Recall Files........................................................................................................ 6.41
Displaying the Actual Size Waveform of the Selected Arrhythmia Recall File.......................................... 6.42
Arrhythmia Waveform Annotation................................................................................................... 6.42
Recording or Printing the Arrhythmia Recall Waveform........................................................................... 6.42
Recording on the ARRHYTH HISTORY Window........................................................................... 6.43
Printing on the ARRHYTH HISTORY Window............................................................................... 6.44
Recording on the Actual Size ECG Waveform Window................................................................. 6.45
Printing on the Actual Size ECG Waveform Window...................................................................... 6.46
Alarm History Window........................................................................................................................................ 6.47
Displaying the ALARM HISTORY Window............................................................................................... 6.47
Scrolling the Alarm History Files.............................................................................................................. 6.48
Recording the Alarm History File............................................................................................................. 6.49
Full Disclosure Window...................................................................................................................................... 6.50
Displaying the FULL DISC Window.......................................................................................................... 6.50
Scrolling the Full Disclosure Waveform.................................................................................................... 6.52
Selecting the Parameters to be Saved for Full Disclosure....................................................................... 6.53
Recording or Printing the Full Disclosure Waveform................................................................................ 6.54
Recording the Full Disclosure Waveform....................................................................................... 6.54
Printing the Full Disclosure Waveform........................................................................................... 6.55
Recording or Printing the Enlarged ECG Waveform................................................................................ 6.57
Recording the Enlarged ECG Waveform........................................................................................ 6.57
Printing the Enlarged ECG Waveform............................................................................................ 6.58
ST Level Recall Window..................................................................................................................................... 6.60
Displaying the ST Window........................................................................................................................ 6.61
Scrolling the ST Level Recall File............................................................................................................. 6.62
Displaying the ST Point............................................................................................................................ 6.62
Displaying the ST Recall Waveform on the Home Screen....................................................................... 6.63
Saving as Reference ST Recall File......................................................................................................... 6.64
Displaying the Reference ST Recall Waveform on the Home Screen...................................................... 6.65
Printing the ST Level Recall File.............................................................................................................. 6.66
OCRG Window................................................................................................................................................... 6.68
Displaying the OCRG Window................................................................................................................. 6.68
Selecting the OCRG Trendgraph Type..................................................................................................... 6.69
Changing the Trendgraph Scale for Heart Rate and SpO2 and Sensitivity for Respiration....................... 6.70
Recording or Printing the OCRG Trend.................................................................................................... 6.71
Recording the OCRG Trend........................................................................................................... 6.71
Printing the OCRG Trend............................................................................................................... 6.72

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
General
You can review saved data on the following review windows. You can expand
the memory of the monitor from 128 MB to 1 GB with the optional QM-601P
memory card.
The parentheses show the capacity when the QM-601P memory card is installed
in the monitor.
6
• TREND window
GRAPH page: Displays the trendgraph of the past 24 hours
(72 hours).
TABLE page: Displays the vital sign data of the past 24 hours
(72 hours).
NIBP TREND page: Displays vital sign data at the NIBP
measurement. Up to 512 files (1,024 files) can
be saved.
HEMO TREND page: Displays the hemodynamic data when CO is
measured. Up to 512 files (1,024 files) can be
saved.
LUNG TREND page: Displays data acquired at the lung function
measurement. Up to 128 files (128 files) can be
saved.
• RECALL window: Displays arrhythmia waveforms of 4 seconds
before and 4 seconds after the arrhythmia
detection. Up to 8,192 files (16,384 files) can
be saved.
• ALARM HISTORY window: Displays the table of vital sign alarms and
arrhythmia alarms. Up 8,192 files (16,384 files)
can be saved.
• FULL DISC window: Displays and up to 24 hours (72 hours) of
compressed and expanded waveforms of up to
5 parameters.
• ST window: Displays the ST level waveforms of the past
24 hours (72 hours). All monitoring ECG can
be saved.
• 12 LEAD window: Displays the 12 lead analysis result data of up
to 6 files (18 files). Refer to the Section 7 “12
LEAD/12 LEAD ANALYSIS Windows”.
• OCRG window: Displays the OCRG trendgraph of the past 24
hours (72 hours).
NOTE
• When changing the review window, the data at the cursor on the
original window is displayed on the second window. For example, when
the FULL DISC window is called up from the ALARM HISTORY window,
the full disclosure is displayed with the time of the file selected on the
ALARM HISTORY window.
6. REVIEW WINDOWS
• When <SHOW ADMIT CONFIRMATION WINDOW> is set to “Off” in

the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen, the stored data remains in
memory for about 30 minutes after the power is turned off. After 30
minutes, the stored data is lost.
• Do not disconnect the power cord while the monitor power is on. Data
may be lost.
• The oldest file is deleted when the maximum number of files are saved.
Review Recording
Available review recordings are listed below. For details of recording, refer to the
Section 10 “Recording”.
Recording Printing
Review Window
Record Page Record All Print Page Print All
TREND - GRAPH Available Not available Available Not available
TREND - TABLE Available Available Available Available
TREND - NIBP TREND Available Available Available Available
TREND - HEMO TREND Available Available Available Available
TREND - LUNG TREND Available Available Available Available
RECALL Available Not available Available Not available
ALARM HISTORY Available Available Not available Not available
Compressed waveform Available Not available Available Not available
FULL DISC
Actual waveform Available Not available Available Not available
ST Not available Not available Available Not available
OCRG Available Available Available Available
12 LEAD - 12 LEAD Available Not available Not available Not available
12 LEAD - ANALYSIS WAVE Available Not available Available Not available
12 LEAD - REPORT Available Not available Available Not available
12 LEAD - AVERAGE WAVE Not available Not available Available Not available

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Event Bar
An event bar near the bottom of the review window shows events during
displayed review time. The event bar and review window are synchronized. They
have the same time scale and scroll together.
You can display up to four types of events.

• Arrhythmia alarms
• Technical alarms 6
• Vital sign alarms
• Monitoring operations: silence alarm, suspend alarms, all alarms off, bypass,
and suspend monitoring
Event bar
Scroll keys
Cursor
: Scrolls to the oldest time.
The cursor on the event bar is
: Scrolls to the latest time.
synchronized with the cursor on
: Scrolls one page back.
the review window. When the
: Scrolls one page forward.
cursor is on the latest time, the
Date and time at Event at the cursor review window and event bar are
the cursor (parameter and message) continuously refreshed.
Time Event keys

: Moves the cursor to the previous event. Time scale
Events
: Moves the cursor to left. Touch or to change
Alarm events are displayed in the
: Moves the cursor to right. the time scale of the event
alarm priority color.
: Move the cursor to the next event. bar. (1, 2, 4, 8 or 24 hours)

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Changing the Displayed Event Types

You can change the types of events which are displayed in the event bar.
1. Touch an event name. You can change the types of events which are
displayed in the event bar. The EVENT BAR SETUP window appears.
2. You can change the types of events which are displayed in the event bar.
Select the top to bottom on the event bar where you want to display an event
type. Then select an event type from the right side. Use the NONE key to not
assign any event.
3. Repeat step 2 to select other items.
4. Touch the key to close the window.
Changing the Time Scale of the Event Bar and Review Window
Touch the or key to change the time scale of the event bar and review
windows. (1, 2, 4, 8 or 24 hours)
Current time scale
Higher time scale Lower time scale

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Scrolling the Event Bar and Review Window

You can scroll the event bar and review window backward or forward or jump
to earlier or later events. The movement of the review window and event bar is
synchronized.
Cursor
: Moves the cursor to the previous event.

: Moves the cursor left.
: Moves the cursor right.
: Moves the cursor to the next event.
You can also move the cursor by touching the event display area. The touched
area becomes the center of the event bar and cursor location.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Trend Window
The TREND window has nine pages: GRAPH 1, GRAPH 2, GRAPH 3,

TABLE 1, TABLE 2, TABLE 3, NIBP TREND, HEMO TREND, and LUNG
TREND pages.
GRAPH 1, GRAPH 2, GRAPH 3 Page

The GRAPH 1, GRAPH 2 and GRAPH 3 pages displays monitoring parameter
data of up to 6 selected parameters of the past 24 hours as a graph. With the
optional QM-601P memory card, data of past 72 hours can be saved.
The trendgraph can be recorded on the optional recorder or printed on the

network printer.
The maximum, mean and minimum values of all monitoring parameters are
automatically acquired every 1 minute for the trendgraph. The acquired values
are 1 minute averaged data. The frequency of data display depends on the
selected trend time.
1, 2, 4 or 8 hours: 1 minute
24 hours: 3 minutes
The following table shows the available trend parameters, screen displays and
scales.
Parameter Description Vertical Scale Range

HR Heart rate (beats/min) 0 to 300
PR Pulse rate (beats/min) 0 to 300
VPC VPC rate (count/min) 0 to 100
RR Respiration rate (count/min) 0 to 150
–2.0 to 2.0 (mV)
ST ST level (mV, mm)
–20.0 to 20.0 (mm)
Apnea time
APNEA-T 0 to 180
(Total time in one data segment, in seconds)
Apnea frequency
APNEA-F 0 to 12
(Total number of apnea occurrences in one data segment)
0 to 300 (mmHg)
NIBP NIBP (mmHg, kPa)
0 to 40.0 (kPa)
0 to 150 (mmHg)
CO2(E)
0 to 20.0 (kPa)
CO2 partial pressure (mmHg, kPa)
0 to 100 (mmHg)
CO2(I)
0 to 13.0 (kPa)
O2(E), O2(I) Oxygen concentration (%) 0 to 100
SpO2 Saturated oxygen from pulse oximeter (%SpO2) 0 to 100
Masimo: Perfusion index (%)
PI (SpO2) 0.01 to 100
Nihon Kohden: Pulse-amplitude index (%)
0 to 45.0 (°C)
Tb (CO) Blood temperature (°C, °F)
0 to 115.0 (°F)
0 to 300 (mmHg)
PRESS*1 IBP (mmHg, kPa)
0 to 40.0 (kPa)
PPV Pulse pressure variability (%) 0 to 50

6. REVIEW WINDOWS

SPV Systolic pressure variability (%) 0 to 50
0 to 45.0 (°C)
TEMP*1 Temperature (°C, °F)
0 to 115.0 (°F)
N2O(E), N2O(I) Nitrogen oxide concentration from gas monitoring (%) 0 to 100
AGENT*1(E),
Agent concentration from gas monitoring (%) 0.0 to 20.0
AGENT*1(I)
BIS Bispectral Index 0 to 100
SQI (BIS) Signal quality indicator (%) 0.0 to 100.0
SR Suppression ratio (%) 0.0 to 100.0
EMG Electromyelogram (dB) 0.00 to 80.0
6
PWTT Pulse wave transit time (s) 0 to 500
CCO Continuous cardiac output (L/min) 0.00 to 20.00
Continuous cardiac output index
CCI 0.00 to 20.00
(L/min/m2)
SV Stroke volume (mL) 0 to 300
SVI Stroke volume index (mL/m2) 0 to 200
SvO2 Mixed venous oxygen saturation (%) 0 to 100
ScvO2 Central venous oxygen saturation (%) 0 to 100
EDV End diastolic volume (mL) 0 to 800
CF Calibration factor 0 to 10.0
0 to 3000 (dyn•s/cm5)
SVR Systemic vascular resistance (dyn•s/cm5, kPa•s/L)
0 to 300.0 (kPa•s/L)
0 to 30000 (dyn•s•m2/cm5)
SVRI Systemic vascular resistance index (dyn•s•m2/cm5, kPa•s•m2/L)
0 to 3000.0 (kPa•s•m2/L)
SVV Stroke volume variation (%) 0 to 50
HRV Heart rate variation (%) 0 to 100
PCCO Pulse contour cardiac output (L/min) 0.00 to 20.00
PCCI Pulse contour cardiac output index (L/min/m2) 0.00 to 20.00
DO2*2 Oxygen delivery (mL/min) 0 to 1200
DO2I*2 Oxygen delivery index (mL/min/m2) 0 to 1200
VO2*2 Oxygen consumption (mL/min) 0 to 500
VO2I*2 Oxygen consumption index (mL/min/m2) 0 to 500
TOFrat TOF ratio (%) 0 to 200
TOFcnt TOF counts (Times) 0 to 4
PTC Post tetanic counts (Times) 0 to 15
MV*2 Minute volume (L/min) 0 to 30.0
TVe*2 Expiratory tidal volume (mL) 0 to 2000
C*2 Compliance (mL/cmH2O/L/s, mL/hPa) 0 to 200
R*2 Airway resistance (cmH2O/L/s, hPa/L/s) 0 to 100
Re*2 Expiratory airway resistance (cmH2O/L/s, hPa/L/s) 0 to 100
Ri*2 Inspiratory airway resistance (cmH2O/L/s, hPa/L/s) 0 to 100
Ppeak*2 Peak airway pressure (cmH2O, hPa) 0 to 150
Pmean*2 Mean airway pressure (cmH2O, hPa) 0 to 150
PEEP*2 Positive end expiratory pressure (cmH2O, hPa) 0 to 150
0 to 800 (mmHg)
tcPO2*2 Transcutaneous oxygen partial pressure (mmHg, kPa)
0 to 100.0 (kPa)
0 to 120 (mmHg)
tcPCO2*2 Transcutaneous carbon dioxide partial pressure (mmHg, kPa)
0 to 16.0 (kPa)
rSO2 1 to rSO2 4 Regional saturation of oxgen 0 to 100
*1 The label appears.
*2 These parameters are not available for Op No. 32A, 52A, 72A, 33A, 53A and 73A.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
NOTE
may be lost.
Displaying the GRAPH 1, GRAPH 2 or GRAPH 3 Page

1. Press the [Menu] key to display the MENU window.
2. Touch the TREND key. The TREND window appears.
When TREND GRAPH is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper
left of the screen or one of the function keys on the remote control keys,
the trendgraph window can be displayed by touching the TREND GRAPH
function key. Refer to “KEYS Window” in Administrator’s Guide, Section 3
to assign a function to the function key.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
3. Touch the GRAPH 1, GRAPH 2 or GRAPH 3 tab. The graph page appears.
Displays other review windows Cursor can be dragged with your finger
Changes the
trendgraph page
Scale
Displays the selected 6

parameter on the
SETTINGS window
Event bar Records or Prints

the trendgraph
Displays the on the WS-671P
SETTINGS window recorder module
or connected
network printer
Displays the SCALES Displays the maximum and Displays mean values on
SETUP window minimum values on the the trendgraph
trendgraph
You can select up to six parameters for displaying the trendgraphs on GRAPH
1, GRAPH 2 and GRAPH 3 page on the SETTINGS window, the scale on the
SCALE window and the display format by touching the MAX-MIN or MEAN
key on under the event bar.
For details on the event bar, refer to the previous “EVENT BAR” section.
To return to the home screen, press the [Home] key.
Selecting Parameters for the Trendgraph Display

You can change the parameters of the trendgraph.
1. Touch the SETTING key on the GRAPH 1, GRAPH 2 or GRAPH 3 page.

The SETTINGS window appears.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
2. Select the display position of the trendgraph. The parameter selected for the
“LEFT” is displayed on the left side of the page.
Trendgraph display
position
Selectable
parameters
Deselects the
parameter.
Keys for
displaying other
parameters
For setting threshold for the apnea trendgraph
3. Select the parameter by touching the desired parameter key. Use the
or key to display other parameters. Use the NONE key to unselect the
parameter.
You can change the time threshold for the apnea trendgraph by touching the
desired time in the <APNEA TREND TIME> box.
Changing the Trendgraph Scale

You can change the trendgraph scale for each parameter.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
1. Touch the SCALE key on the GRAPH 1, GRAPH 2 or GRAPH 3 page. The
SCALE SETUP window appears.
Trendgraph
display position
Upper limit slider
Setting bar 6
Lower limit slider
2. Select the display position of the trendgraph. The scale selected for the
“LEFT” is displayed on the left side of the page.
3. Touch and drag the sliders to the desired level on the setting bar.
Changing the Trendgraph Display Format

You can change the display format of the trendgraph by touching the MAX-MIN
or MEAN key under the event bar. The same format is used for the GRAPH 1,
GRAPH 2, GRAPH 3 page and the trendgraph on the home screen. The MAX-
MIN key displays maximum and minimum values on the trendgraph. The
MEAN key displays mean value on the trendgraph.
MAX-MIN

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
MEAN
Recording the Trendgraph

The trendgraph displayed on the GRAPH 1, GRAPH 2 or GRAPH 3 page can be
recorded on the optional recorder.
1. Display the trendgraph you want to record on the GRAPH 1, GRAPH 2 or

GRAPH 3 page.
2. Touch the PRINT key. The PRINT window appears.
3. Touch the RECORD PAGE key in the <RECORDER> box. Recording

starts.
To stop recording, press the [Record] key.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Recording example
Printing the Trendgraph

The trendgraphs displayed on the GRAPH 1, GRAPH 2 or GRAPH 3 page can
be printed when the monitor is connected to a network printer.
1. Display the trendgraph you want to print on the GRAPH 1, GRAPH 2 or

GRAPH 3 page.
3. Touch the PRINT PAGE key in the <PRINTER> box. Printing starts.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Printing example

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
TABLE 1, TABLE 2, TABLE 3 Page

The TABLE 1, TABLE 2 and TABLE 3 pages displays monitoring parameter
data of up to 15 selected parameters of the past 24 hours as a table and you can
change the display interval. One page shows 7 measurements. Each measurement
appears in a separate column. With the optional QM-601P memory card, data of
past 72 hours can be saved.
The trend table of selected time period can be recorded on the optional recorder
or printed on the network printer.
The following table shows the available trend parameter and screen display.
6
Parameter Description Parameter Description
HR Heart rate (beats/min) ESVI End systolic volume index (mL/m2)
PR Pulse rate (beats/min) EF Ejection fraction (%)
VPC VPC rate (count/min) CF Calibration factor
RR Respiration rate (count/min) Systemic vascular resistance
SVR
Systolic non-invasive blood pressure (mmHg, (dyn•s/cm5, kPa•s/L)
NIBP-SYS
kPa) Systemic vascular resistance index (dyn•s•m2/
SVRI
Diastolic non-invasive blood pressure (mmHg, cm5, kPa•s•m2/L)
NIBP-DIA
kPa) SVV Stroke volume variation (%)
Mean non-invasive blood pressure (mmHg, HRV Heart rate variation (%)
NIBP-MAP
kPa) PCCO Pulse contour cardiac output (L/min)
Pulse rate measured from non-invasive blood Pulse contour cardiac output index
NIBP-PR PCCI
pressure (count/min) (L /min/m2)
ST ST level (mV, mm) DO2*2 Oxygen delivery (mL/min)
CO2(E) DO2I*2 Oxygen delivery index (mL/min/m2)
CO2(I) VO2*2 Oxygen consumption (mL/min)
O2(E), O2(I) Oxygen concentration (%) VO2I*2 Oxygen consumption index (mL/min/m2)
Saturated oxygen from pulse oximeter TOFrat TOF ratio (%)
SpO2
(%SpO2) TOFcnt TOF counts (times)
Masimo: Perfusion index (%) PTC Post tetanic counts (times)
PI (SpO2)
Nihon Kohden: Pulse-amplitude index (%) MV*2 Minute volume (L/min)
Tb (CO) Blood temperature (°C, °F) TVe*2 Expiratory tidal volume (mL)
PRESS*1 IBP (mmHg, kPa) C*2 Compliance (mL/cmH2O, mL/hPa)
PPV Pulse pressure variability (%) R*2 Airway resistance (cmH2O/L/s, hPa/L/s)
SPV Systolic pressure variability (%) Expiratory airway resistance (cmH2O/L/s,
TEMP*1 Temperature (°C, °F) Re*2
hPa/L/s)
AGENT*1(E), Inspiratory airway resistance (cmH2O/L/s,
Agent concentration from gas monitoring (%) Ri*2
AGENT*1(I) hPa/L/s)
BIS Bispectral index Ppeak*2 Peak airway pressure (cmH2O, hPa)
SQI (BIS) Signal quality indicator (%) Pmean*2 Mean airway pressure (cmH2O, hPa)
SR Suppression ratio (s) PEEP*2 Positive end expiratory pressure (cmH2O, hPa)
EMG Electromyelogram (dB) Transcutaneous oxygen partial pressure
tcPO2*2
CCO Continuous cardiac output (L/min) (mmHg, kPa)
Continuous cardiac output index Transcutaneous carbon dioxide partial pressure
CCI tcPCO2*2
(L/min/m2) (mmHg, kPa)
SV Stroke volume (mL) rSO2 Regional saturation of oxgen
SVI Stroke volume index (mL/m2) O2 LEV Oxygen consumption (L)
SvO2 Mixed venous oxygen saturation (%) HAL LEV Halothane consumption (mL)
ScvO2 Central venous oxygen saturation (%) ISO LEV Isoflurane consumption (mL)
EDV End diastolic volume (mL) ENF LEV Enflurane consumption (mL)
EDVI End diastolic volume index (mL/m2) DES LEV Desflurane consumption (mL)
ESV End systolic volume (mL) SEV LEV Sevoflurane consumption (mL)

*2 These parameters are not available for the Op No. 32A, 52A, 72A, 33A, 53A and 73A series.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
NOTE
memory for about 30 minutes after the power is turned off. After
30 minutes, the stored data is lost.
may be lost.
Displaying the TABLE 1, TABLE 2 or TABLE 3 Page

When TREND DATA is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper
the trend table window can be displayed by touching the TREND TABLE
3. Touch the TABLE 1, TABLE 2 or TABLE 3 tab. The table page appears.
Displays other review windows
Changes the
trend data page Selected file
Date and
time
Displays the
parameters
selected in the
SETTINGS
window
Records or prints the
Event bar trend data of the selected
time period on the
WS-671P recorder
module or connected
network printer
Displays the Displays the INTERVAL
SETTINGS window SETUP window
For details on the event bar, refer to the “EVENT BAR” section.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Scrolling the Trend Table

Use the vertical scroll bar on the window to scroll the trend table.
The trend table can be scrolled by touching the or key on the scroll bar.
Selecting Parameters for the Trend Table Display

1. Touch the SETTING key on the TABLE 1, TABLE 2 or TABLE 3 page. The
PARAMETER SETUP window appears.
2. Select the display position from the left column. Select the parameter from
the right column. The selected parameter appears in the display order on the
left column.
Selected parameters in the display order.
Up to 15 parameters can be selected.
Selectable
parameters
Unselects the
parameter
Keys for displaying

other parameters
3. Repeat step 2 to select other parameters.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Selecting the Measurement Interval

1. Touch the INTERVAL key on the TABLE 1, TABLE 2 or TABLE 3 page.
The INTERVAL SETUP window appears.
2. Select the measurement interval for the trend table on the INTERVAL
SETUP window.
Recording a Trend Table

You can record the trend table of the selected time period with the optional
recorder.
Time slider

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
2. Set the RECORD START TIME and RECORD END TIME with the or
key or time slider.
The initial RECORD START TIME and RECORD END TIME depend on
the REVIEW setting on the RECORDER page of the SYSTEM SETUP
window. For details, refer to “RECORDER page” in the Administrator’s
Guide, Section 3.
3. Check the number of pages and touch the RECORD key in the
<RECORDER> box. 6
Recording example
Printing a Trend Table

You can print the trend table of the selected time period with a network printer.
Time slider
key or time slider.
window. For details, refer to “RECORDER page” in Administrator’s Guide,
Section 3.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
3. Check the number of pages and touch the RECORD key in the <PRINTER>
box. The “PRINTING” message appears on the screen and the table is
printed.
Printing example

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
NIBP TREND Page

The NIBP TREND page displays monitoring parameter data of up to 15 selected
parameters as a table. Data for all parameters is automatically entered into the
table every time NIBP is measured.
One page shows 7 measurements. Each measurement appears in a separate

column. Up to 512 data can be registered to the NIBP trend table. If more than
512 measurements are made, the oldest measurement data is deleted.
The NIBP trend table of selected time period can be recorded on the optional
recorder or printed on the network printer. With the optional QM-601P memory
6
card, data of up to 1,024 files can be saved.
The following table shows the available trend parameter and screen display.
Parameter Description Parameter Description

HR Heart rate (beats/min) ESVI End systolic volume index (mL/m2)
PR Pulse rate (beats/min) EF Ejection fraction (%)
VPC VPC rate (count/min) CF Calibration factor
RR Respiration rate (count/min) Systemic vascular resistance
SVR
ST ST level (mV, mm) (dyn•s/cm5, kPa•s/L)
Systolic non-invasive blood pressure (mmHg, Systemic vascular resistance index (dyn•s•m2/
NIBP-SYS SVRI
kPa) cm5, kPa•s•m2/L)
Diastolic non-invasive blood pressure (mmHg, SVV Stroke volume variation (%)
NIBP-DIA
kPa) HRV Heart rate variation (%)
Mean non-invasive blood pressure (mmHg, PCCO Pulse contour cardiac output (L/min)
NIBP-MAP
kPa) PCCI Pulse contour cardiac output index (L/min/m2)
Pulse rate measured from non-invasive blood DO2*2 Oxygen delivery (mL/min)
NIBP-PR
pressure (count/min) DO2I*2 Oxygen delivery index (mL/min/m2)
CO2(E) VO2*2 Oxygen consumption (mL/min)
CO2(I) VO2I*2 Oxygen consumption index (mL/min/m2)
O2(E), O2(I) Oxygen concentration (%) TOFrat TOF ratio (%)
Saturated oxygen from pulse oximeter TOFcnt TOF counts (times)
SpO2
(%SpO2)
PTC Post tetanic counts (times)
Masimo: Perfusion index (%)
PI (SpO2) MV*2 Minute volume (L/min)
Nihon Kohden: Pulse-amplitude index (%)
TVe*2 Expiratory tidal volume (mL)
Tb (CO) Blood temperature (°C, °F)
C*2 Compliance (mL/cmH2O, mL/hPa)
PRESS*1 IBP (mmHg, kPa)
R*2 Airway resistance (cmH2O/L/s, hPa/L/s)
PPV Pulse pressure variability (%)
Expiratory airway resistance (cmH2O/L/s,
SPV Systolic pressure variability (%) Re*2
hPa/L/s)
TEMP*1 Temperature (°C, °F) Inspiratory airway resistance (cmH2O/L/s,
AGENT*1(E), Ri*2
Agent concentration from gas monitoring (%) hPa/L/s)
AGENT*1(I) Ppeak*2 Peak airway pressure (cmH2O, hPa)
BIS Bispectral index Pmean*2 Mean airway pressure (cmH2O, hPa)
SQI (BIS) Signal quality indicator (%) PEEP*2 Positive end expiratory pressure (cmH2O, hPa)
SR Suppression ratio (s) Transcutaneous oxygen partial pressure
EMG Electromyogram (dB) tcPO2*2
(mmHg, kPa)
CCO Continuous cardiac output (L/min) Transcutaneous carbon dioxide partial pressure
tcPCO2*2
CCI Continuous cardiac output index (L/min/m2) (mmHg, kPa)
SV Stroke volume (mL) rSO2 Regional saturation of oxygen
SVI Stroke volume index (mL/m2) O2 LEV Oxygen consumption (L)
SvO2 Mixed venous oxygen saturation (%) HAL LEV Halothane consumption (mL)
ScvO2 Central venous oxygen saturation (%) ISO LEV Isoflurane consumption (mL)
EDV End diastolic volume (mL) ENF LEV Enflurane consumption (mL)
EDVI End diastolic volume index (mL/m2) DES LEV Desflurane consumption (mL)
ESV End systolic volume (mL) SEV LEV Sevoflurane consumption (mL)

*2 These parameters are not available for the Op No. 32A, 52A, 72A, 33A, 53A and 73A.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
NOTE
may be lost.
Displaying the NIBP TREND Page

3. Touch the NIBP TREND tab. The NIBP TREND page appears.
When NIBP TREND is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper
the NIBP TREND page can be displayed by touching the NIBP TREND

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Date and time

Selected file
Displays
the selected
parameters in
the SETTINGS
window Records or prints 6
the NIBP data
of the selected
Event bar time period on
the WS-671P
recorder module or
connected network
printer
Displays the SETTINGS window
NOTE
The HR on the NIBP TREND page is the HR at the completion of NIBP
measurement. The HR on the TABLE page and NIBP TREND page may
be different.
Scrolling the NIBP Trend Table

Use the vertical scroll bar on the window to scroll the NIBP trend table. The
trend table can be scrolled by touching the or key on the scroll bar.
Selecting Parameters for the NIBP Trend Display

1. Touch the SETTINGS key on the NIBP TREND page. The PARAMETER
SETUP window appears.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
2. Select the display position from the left column. Select the parameter from
the right column. The selected parameter appears in the display order on the
left column.
Selected parameters in the display order. Up to 15 parameters can be selected.
Selectable
parameters
Unselects the
parameter.
Keys for displaying

other parameters
Recording a NIBP Trend Table

You can record the NIBP trend table of the selected time period with the optional
recorder.

Time slider
key or time slider.
Section 3.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
<RECORDER> box.
Recording example
Printing a NIBP Trend Table

You can print the NIBP trend table of the selected time period with a network
printer.

Time slider
key or time slider.
Section 3.
printed.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Printing example

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
HEMO TREND Page

The hemodynamics table can be created when CO or CCO is monitored and
the acquired data is registered to this table. To register the acquired CO data to
the hemodynamics table, refer to “Adding Acquired Data to the Hemodynamics
Table on the TREND Window” in User’s Guide Part II, Section 9.
Up to 512 data can be registered to the hemodynamics table. If more than

512 measurements are made, the oldest measurement data is deleted.
With the optional QM-601P memory card, data of up to 1,024 files can be saved.
6
The hemodynamics table of selected time period can be recorded on the optional
recorder or printed on the network printer.
NOTE
may be lost.
Displaying the HEMO TREND Page


6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Display other
trend window
Date and time

Selected file
Scroll to display
Display data other parameters.
from CO
window
Records or prints
the hemodynamic
Event bar data of the selected
time period on the
WS-671P recorder
module or connected
network printer
3. Touch the HEMO TREND tab. The HEMO TREND page appears.
When HEMO TREND is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper
the HEMO TREND page can be displayed by touching the HEMO TREND
Scrolling the Hemodynamics Table

Use the vertical scroll bar on the window to scroll the hemodynamic table.
The hemodynamics table can be scrolled by touching the or key on the
scroll bar.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Explanation of the Hemodynamics Table
Label Name Unit Explanation and Equation

Heart rate at the time the CO is measured. When
HR/PR Heart rate/pulse rate beats/min using the APCO/IBP processor, pulse rate is
registered.
CO Cardiac output L/min ––
CI Cardiac index L/min/m2 CI = CO/BSA
CCO Continuous cardiac output L/min ––
CCI Continuous cardiac output index L/min/ m2 CCI = CCO/BSA
ART-MEAN Arterial mean pressure
PAP-MEAN Pulmonary arterial mean pressure mmHg, kPa 6
PCWP Pulmonary capillary wedge pressure
Values registered at the time the CO is measured.
PCWP Pulmonary capillary wedge pressure
––
TIME measurement time
CVP Central venous mean pressure mmHg, kPa
SV Stroke volume mL SV = (CO × 1000)/HR
SVI Stroke volume index mL/m2 SVI = (CI × 1000)/HR
LVSW* Left ventricular stroke work g•m LSW = {SV × (AMP – PCWP)} × 0.0136
LVSWI* Left ventricular stroke work index g•m/m2 LSWI = {SVI × (AMP – PCWP)} × 0.0136
SVR Systemic vascular resistance dyn•s/cm5 SVR = {(AMP – CVP) × 80)}/CO
dyn•s•m2/cm5,
SVRI Systemic vascular resistance index SVRI = {(AMP – CVP) × 80}/CI
kPa•s•m2/L
SVV Stroke volume variation % ––
PVR* Pulmonary vascular resistance dyn•s/cm5 PVR = {(PAMP – PCWP) × 80}/CO
dyn•s•m2/cm5,
PVRI Pulmonary vascular resistance index PVRI = {(PAMP – PCWP) × 80}/CI
kPa•s•m2/L
RVSW Right ventricular stroke work g•m RSW = {13.6 × CO × (PAMP – CVP)}/HR
RVSWI Right ventricular stroke work index g•m/m2 RSWI = {13.6 × CO × (PAMP – CVP)}/(HR × BSA)
ScvO2 Central venous oxygen saturation % ––
* When PCWP is not measured, “- - -” appears.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Recording a Hemodynamics Table

You can record the hemodynamics table of the selected time period with the
optional recorder.

Time slider
key or time slider.
Section 3.
<RECORDER> box.
Recording example

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Printing a Hemodynamics Table

You can print the hemodynamics table of the selected time period with a network
printer.

Time slider
key or time slider.
Section 3.
printed.
Printing example

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
LUNG TREND Page

The lung trend table can be created when patient’s respiration dynamics are
calculated on the LUNG FUNCTION window. The files of up to 128 data can be
registered to the lung trend table.
The lung trend table of selected time period can be recorded on the optional
recorder.
NOTE
may be lost.
Displaying the LUNG TREND Page

3. Touch the LUNG TREND tab. The LUNG TREND page appears.
When LUNG TREND is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper
the LUNG TREND page can be displayed by touching the LUNG TREND

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Date and time Selected file
Displays data
from LUNG
FUNCTION
window 6
Event bar Records the lung trend

data of the selected
time period on the
WS-671P recorder
module
To add the calculation results to the lung trend table, refer to “Adding the
Calculation Result to the LUNG TREND Table” in Section 8.
Explanation of the Lung Trend Table
Label Name Unit

BSA Body surface area m 2
CI Cardiac index L/min/m2

AaDO2 Alveolar arterial oxygen tension difference mmHg
CaO2 Arterial oxygen content mL/dL
DO2 Oxygen delivery mL/min
DO2I Oxygen delivery index mL/min/m2
_
CvO2 Venous oxygen content mL/dL
avDO2 Arteriovenous oxygen difference mL/dL
VO2 Oxygen consumption mL/min
VO2I Oxygen consumption index mL/min/m2
O2ER Oxygen extraction ratio %
PaO2/O2 Oxygenation ratio mmHg
Qs/Qt Shunt fraction %

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Recording the Lung Trend Table

You can record the lung trend table of the selected time period with the optional
recorder.

Time slider
key or time slider.
Section 3.
<RECORDER> box.
Recording example

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Printing a Lung Trend Table

You can print the lung trend table of the selected time period with a network
printer.

Time slider
key or time slider.
Section 3.
printed.
Printing example

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Arrhythmia Recall Window
General
An ECG waveform of 4 seconds before and 4 seconds after the arrhythmia
detection is saved as an arrhythmia recall file. Up to 8,192 files can be created.
When more than 8,192 files are created, the oldest file is automatically deleted.
With the optional QM-601P memory card, data of up to 16,384 files can be
saved.
To create arrhythmia recall files:

• <ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS> on the ECG window must be set to ON. Refer
to “Monitoring Arrhythmia” in User’s Guide Part II, Section 1.
• The type of arrhythmias you want to save as files must be selected on the
ARRHYTHMIA EVENT SETUP window. Refer to “Selecting the Arrhythmia
Types to be Saved as a Recall File” in this section.
NOTE
may be lost.
The Arrhythmia Recall window displays the recall files. Up to 8 files can be
displayed on one page. The actual size arrhythmia waveform can be displayed by
touching a recall file.
Arrhythmia List
The arrhythmias are listed in the priority of highest to lowest. When several
arrhythmias occur at the same time, only the arrhythmia of the highest priority is
saved as the recall file.

Longer than 3 to 10 seconds (selectable) with no
ASYSTOLE
QRS complex.
VF Ventricular fibrillation longer than 4 seconds.
Ventricular tachycardia. 3 to 9 (selectable*1) or more
VT consecutive VPCs when heart rate exceeding the VT
heart rate limit (16 to 300 beats/min selectable*1).
Extreme tachycardia exceeding the EXTREME
EXT TACHY*1
TACHY limit.
Extreme bradycardia dropping below the
EXT BRADY*1
EXTREME BRADY limit.
Ventricular bradycardia. 3 or more consecutive
V BRADY*1 VPCs when heart rate dropping below V BRADY

6. REVIEW WINDOWS

VPC short run. 3 to 8 (selectable) consecutive VPCs
VPC RUN when heart rate exceeds the VPC RUN heart rate
limit (16 to 300 beats/min selectable*1).
Supraventricular tachycardia. 3 to 9 (selectable)
or more consecutive normal QRS of regular R-R
SV TACHY*1
interval when heart rate exceeding the SV TACHY
TACHYCARDIA Heart rate above the upper heart rate limit.
BRADYCARDIA Heart rate below the lower heart rate limit.
PAUSE*1 1 to 3 seconds (selectable) with no QRS.
V RHYTHM*1 Ventricular rhythm. 3 or more consecutive VPCs. 6
COUPLET VPC couplet (paired VPCs). 2 consecutive VPCs.
Early VPC including R-on-T type. VPC with a time
interval from the preceding normal QRS complex of
EARLY VPC less than approximately one-third of the normal R-R
interval, at heart rate dropping below
120 beats/min*2.
Two different shaped VPCs within the last
MULTIFORM*1
3 minutes.
Ventricular bigeminy. 3 or more consecutive pairs of
BIGEMINY VPC and normal QRS. A dominant rhythm of N-V-
N-V-N-V (N = normal beat, V = ventricular beat)
Ventricular trigeminy. A dominant rhythm of N-N-
TRIGEMINY*1
V-N-N-V.
Frequent VPCs. VPC rate (VPCs/min) reaching
FREQ VPC or exceeding the preset limit of 1 to 99 VPCs/min
(selectable).
VPC Ventricular premature contraction.
IRREGULAR RR*1 Consistently irregular R-R intervals.
R-R interval 1.75 times longer than the dominant
PROLONGED RR*1
R-R interval.
No QRS and pacing pulse within the bradycardia
NO PACER PULSE*1*3
limit. Oversensing.
No QRS from the preceding pacing pulse for the
PACER NON-
preset time interval (40 to 480 ms selectable). Non-
CAPTURE*1*3
capture.
*1 These become available when EXTENDED is selected for <ARRHYTHMIA

TYPE> on the SYSTEM SETUP window.
* 120 beats/min when <QRS DETECTION TYPE> is set to ADULT,
2
150 beats/min when <QRS DETECTION TYPE> is set to CHILD or

NEONATE.
* Available only when DETECT in the <PACING> box is set to ON.
3

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Displaying the Arrhythmia Recall Window

2. Touch the RECALL key to display the Arrhythmia Recall window.
When RECALL is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper left
of the screen or one of the function keys on the remote control keys, the
ARRHYTH HISTORY page can be displayed by touching the RECALL
Arrhythmia type
Compressed ECG
of the recall file Recall file
Scroll to display
Date and time of other recall files
file creation
Selected file
Records or prints
Event bar
the arrhythmia recall
data on the WS-671P
recorder module or
connected network
Displays the ARRHYTHMIA printer
EVENT SETUP window
When there is no recall file, the “NO DATA” message is displayed.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Selecting the Arrhythmia Types to be Saved as a Recall File

Select the arrhythmia types to create files for. You can select individual
arrhythmia types separately or select all arrhythmia types together.
There are two patterns of arrhythmia analysis, EXTENDED or STANDARD.

Select the arrhythmia type in the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to
6
1. Touch the EVENTS key on the ARRHYTH HISTORY page.
ARRHYTHMIA EVENT SETUP window appears.
Selected arrhythmia
type is highlighted.
When <ARRHYTHMIA TYPE> is STANDARD
When <ARRHYTHMIA TYPE> is EXTENDED
2. Select the arrhythmia type individually.
To set all arrhythmia types together, touch the ALL key.
Scrolling the Arrhythmia Recall Files

Use the vertical scroll bar on the window to scroll the arrhythmia recall file.
The arrhythmia recall file can be scrolled by touching the or key on the
scroll bar.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Displaying the Actual Size Waveform of the Selected Arrhythmia Recall File
The ARRHYTH HISTORY window displays the actual size ECG of the selected
recall file with the ECG of one before and one after the selected file.
1. Touch the or key to select the arrhythmia recall waveform which you
want to display in actual size.
2. Touch the center key. The arrhythmia waveform is displayed in the actual
size.
Displays other review windows.
Stored recall ECG Lead

files time
File before the ECG sensitivity

selected file
Selected file
Date and time
of file creation
Vital signs Records or prints

numeric values the actual size ECG
at the time the on the WS-371P
recall file is recorder module or
created. connected network
printer.
Arrhythmia Waveform Annotation

Each beat of a stored arrhythmia waveform is automatically classified and
annotated as follows.
QRS Annotation Description

N Normal QRS complex
V Ventricular premature contraction
P Paced QRS
? Impossible to classify or during learning
– Noise
Recording or Printing the Arrhythmia Recall Waveform

The selected arrhythmia waveform can be recorded by the optional recorder
or connected network printer. The recording can be performed on both the file
window and waveform window.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Recording on the ARRHYTH HISTORY Window

1. Select the arrhythmia recall file you want to record.

starts.
The arrhythmia waveform is recorded as displayed on the ARRHYTH HISTORY

page.
Recording example

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Printing on the ARRHYTH HISTORY Window

1. Select the arrhythmia recall waveform you want to print.
The arrhythmia waveform is printed as displayed on the ARRHYTH

HISTORY page.
Printing example

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Recording on the Actual Size ECG Waveform Window

1. Select the arrhythmia recall waveform you want to record.
2. Touch the PRINT key. The window opens.
3. Touch the RECORD PAGE key. Recording starts.
To stop recording the table, press the [Record] key.
The 12 seconds of arrhythmia waveforms can be recorded.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Printing on the Actual Size ECG Waveform Window

1. Select the arrhythmia recall waveform you want to record.
2. Touch the PRINT key. The PRINT window opens.
3. Select the PRINT PAGE key. Printing starts.
The 8 seconds of selected arrhythmia waveform and the previous and the next
waveforms are printed.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Alarm History Window
Alarm data can be listed on the ALARM HISTORY window. Up to 8,192 files
can be saved and up to 8 data can be displayed on the ALARM HISTORY
window. The alarm history is created anytime when an alarm occurs.
With the optional QM-601P memory card, data of up to 16,384 files can be
saved.
6
When the FULL DISC window is displayed from the ALARM HISTORY
window, the waveforms of the selected alarm file on the ALARM HISTORY
window can be displayed.
The alarm history file displayed on the ALARM HISTORY window can be
recorded on the optional recorder or printed on the network printer.
NOTE
may be lost.
Displaying the ALARM HISTORY Window

2. Touch the ALARM HISTORY key to display the ALARM HISTORY

window.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
When ALARM HISTORY is assigned to one of the function keys at the

upper left of the screen or one of the function keys on the remote control
keys, the ALARM HISTORY window can be displayed by touching
the ALARM HISTORY function key. Refer to “KEYS Window” in
Administrator’s Guide, Section 3 to assign a function to the function key.
Displays other
review windows
Date and
time of
alarm
occurrence Selected file
Parameter
Alarm type Scrolls files
Alarm
message
Event bar
Records the alarm history

data on the WS-671P
recorder module
Scrolling the Alarm History Files

Use the vertical scroll bar on the window to scroll the alarm history file. The
alarm history file can be scrolled by touching the or key on the scroll bar.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Recording the Alarm History File

You can record the alarm history file of the selected time period with the optional
recorder.

Time slider
key or time slider.
Section 3.
<RECORDER> box.
Recording example

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Full Disclosure Window
ECG and up to four other parameter full disclosure of 24 hours can be saved.
With the optional QM-601P memory card, data of past 72 hours can be saved.
The full disclosure waveforms can be reviewed, scrolled and recorded, in either
compressed or expanded form.
NOTE
may be lost.
The FULL DISC window displays one minute full disclosure waveform on
each line. The 12 second actual size waveform selected by the cursor on the full
disclosure is displayed on the actual size ECG window.
Displaying the FULL DISC Window

2. Touch the FULL DISC key to display the FULL DISC window.
When FULL DISC is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper left of
the screen or one of the function keys on the remote control keys, the FULL
DISC page can be displayed by touching the FULL DISC function key.
Refer to “KEYS Window” in Administrator’s Guide, Section 3 to assign a

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Displayed time
range
Date and time ECG lead
of file creation
60 second
full disclosure Scrolls time
waveform
Vital signs
numeric values 6
at the cursor
Event bar
Displays the
DISPLAY/
SAVE and Displays the Zoom In window to display Records or prints the full disclosure
WAVEFORMS the enlarged waveforms of the 6 seconds data on the WS-671P recorder
settings window selected by the cursor module or connected network
printer
NOTE
It may take some time for the data to be displayed.
When there is no full disclosure waveform, the “NO DATA” message is

displayed.
The full disclosure is refreshed every minute.
When the FULL DISC window is called up from the ARRHYTH RECALL
window, the full disclosure is displayed with the time of the ARRHYTH
RECALL window.
When the FULL DISC window is called up from the ALARM HISTORY
window, the full disclosure is displayed with the time of the file selected on the
ALARM HISTORY window.
To display the enlarged waveform of the compressed waveform, touch the part
on the FULL DISC window where you want to see the enlarged waveform and
touch the ZOOM IN key. To return to the compressed waveform window, press
the ZOOM OUT key.
Touch the waveforms to display the 6 seconds of enlarged waveforms. Touch

again to restore the previous display.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Displays other review windows.
ECG lead
Displayed time
range
Time ECG sensitivity
6 second
actual size Scrolls time.
waveform
Cursor
Event bar
Displays the Zoom In window to Records or prints the full disclosure

display the enlarged waveforms data on the WS-371P recorder
of the 6 seconds selected by the module or connected network
cursor. printer.
Scrolling the Full Disclosure Waveform

Use the vertical scroll bar on the window to scroll the full disclosure waveform.
The full disclosure waveform can be scrolled by touching the or key on the
scroll bar. The cursor can also be dragged with your finger.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Selecting the Parameters to be Saved for Full Disclosure

ECG and up to four other parameters can be saved for the full disclosure. You
can select the parameters to be displayed on the FULL DISC window from the
saving parameters.
NOTE
• When the saved parameters are changed, the data for the parameter
which is no longer saved is deleted.
• The IBP parameters must be correctly labeled. Otherwise, the IBP
waveform may distort.
6
• This setting is independent from the setting on the central monitor or
network server. Even when a parameter is selected to be saved on the
bedside monitor, that parameter must also be selected to be saved
on the central monitor/server. Otherwise the full disclosure for that
parameter cannot be displayed on the central monitor.
1. Touch the SETTINGS key to display the SETTINGS window.
2. Touch the WAVEFORMS tab. The WAVEFORM window appears.
3. Select the parameters you want to save the full disclosure data for.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
4. To select the parameters to be displayed on the FULL DISC window, touch

the DISPLAY/SAVE tab.
5. Select the position from the <DISPLAYED WAVES> box and select the
parameter to save from the <SAVED WAVES> box. Use the NONE key to
unselect the parameter.
Recording or Printing the Full Disclosure Waveform

The displayed or saved full disclosure waveform can be recorded on the optional
recorder and connected network printer.
Recording the Full Disclosure Waveform

1. Display the full disclosure waveform you want to record.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS

starts.
To stop recording, press the [Record] key. 6
Recording example
Printing the Full Disclosure Waveform

1. Display the full disclosure waveform you want to print.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
3. Touch the PRINT PAGE key in the <PRINTER> box.
Printing example

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Recording or Printing the Enlarged ECG Waveform

The displayed enlarged waveform can be recorded or printed on the optional
recorder or connected network printer.
Recording the Enlarged ECG Waveform

1. Display the enlarged waveform you want to record by touching the ZOOM
IN key.

starts.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Recording example
Printing the Enlarged ECG Waveform

1. Display the enlarged waveform you want to print by touching the ZOOM IN
key.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Printing example

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
ST Level Recall Window
The ST recall waveform and ST level of all monitoring ECG leads for up to
24 hours can be saved. With the optional QM-601P memory card, data of past
72 hours can be saved.
The ST recall window displays three files of ST level recall waveforms.
The ST level recall can be printed when the monitor is connected to a network
printer.
The ST level alarm limits can be set on the ST ALARM page of the ECG
window. Refer to “Changing the ST Alarm Limits” in User’s Guide Part II,
Section 1. You can set all alarms, including the ST of all leads alarm limits, on
the ALARM LIMITS window. Refer to Section 5 “Alarm Function”.
The ST level unit (mV or mm) can be set on the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
screen. Refer to “UNITS Window” in Administrator’s Guide, Section 2.
NOTE
• The ST window is not available when the patient type is neonate and
<NEONATE ST MEASUREMENT> on the PARAMETERS window of
the SYSTEM SETUP window is set to OFF.
• Although the ST algorithm has been tested for accuracy of the ST
analysis result, the significance of the ST level changes need to be
determined only by a physician.
may be lost.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Displaying the ST Window

2. Touch the ST key to display the ST DISPLAY window.
When ST TREND is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper left
of the screen or one of the function keys on the remote control keys, the ST
INTERVAL page can be displayed by touching the ST function key. Refer to
“KEYS Window” in Administrator’s Guide, Section 3 to assign a function to
the function key.
Date and time Selected file

Lead
Scrolls to
ST value display other
Reference file leads
Event bar
Prints the ST data

on the connected
network printer
Displays the SETTINGS window Registers the selected file as the reference file
When there is no ST level recall waveforms, the “NO DATA” message is

displayed.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Scrolling the ST Level Recall File

Use the vertical scroll bar on the window to scroll the ST level recall file.
The ST level recall file can be scrolled by touching the or key on the scroll
bar.
Displaying the ST Point

When the ST point setting is turned on, the ST point is displayed on the ST level
recall waveform.
1. Touch the SETTINGS key on the ST window to display the SETTINGS

window.
2. Touch the ON or OFF key in <ST POINT> to select on or off.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Displaying the ST Recall Waveform on the Home Screen

The ST recall waveform and ST level of selected monitoring ECG leads are
displayed on the home screen. Up to three waveforms can be displayed.

window.
2. Touch the ON or OFF key in the <ST WAVE ON HOME SCREEN> box to
select on or off.
When set to ON, select the lead for each of the three ST recall waveforms on
the home screen.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Saving as Reference ST Recall File

Save the file used as the reference ST waveforms.
1. Select a file to save as a reference file and touch the SAVE AS REF key. A
“SAVE AS REFERENCE?” message appears.
2. Touch the YES key to save it as a reference.
To not save it as a reference file, touch the NO key.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Displaying the Reference ST Recall Waveform on the Home Screen

When <ST WAVE ON HOME SCREEN> is set to ON, the ST level and up to
three waveforms saved as reference ST recall waveforms can be displayed on the
home screen.

window.
2. Touch the ON or OFF key in the <ST REF WAVE ON HOME SCREEN>
box.
When set to ON, select the lead for each of the 3 reference ST recall
waveforms on the home screen.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Printing the ST Level Recall File

The displayed ST recall files and the previous three ST recall files can be printed
when the monitor is connected to a network printer.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Printing example

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
OCRG Window
The OCRG window displays heart rate and SpO2 acquired every 1 minute for the
trendgraph and compressed respiration waveform of the past 24 hours. With the
optional QM-601P memory card, data of past 72 hours can be saved.
NOTE
may be lost.
• The OCRG window is available only when the site mode is NICU. Refer
to “SITE Window” in Administrator’s Guide, Section 2 to change the site.
The following table shows the available trend parameters, screen displays and
scales.

210 to 60, 160 to 80,
HR Heart rate (beats/min)
220 to 100
Saturated oxygen from pulse oximeter
SpO2 100 to 60, 100 to 80
(%SpO2)
Respiration measured by impedance
RESP (IMP) ×1/4, ×1/2, ×1, ×2, ×4
method
Displaying the OCRG Window

2. Touch the OCRG key to display the OCRG window.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
When OCRG is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper left of the
screen or one of the function keys on the remote control keys, the OCRG
page can be displayed by touching the OCRG function key. Refer to “KEYS
Window” in Administrator’s Guide, Section 3 to assign a function to the
function key.
Displays other review windows. Cursor can be dragged with your finger.
Scale
6
Event bar
Displays the
SETTINGS
window.
Displays the SCALE SETUP window. Records or prints the trendgraph on the WS-671P
recorder module or connected network printer.
Selecting the OCRG Trendgraph Type

Select the OCRG trendgraph type displayed on the review window.
1. Touch the SETTINGS key on the OCRG window to display the SETTINGS
window.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
2. Select the 1 cm/min or 3 cm/min key in the <SETTINGS> box.
1 cm/min: OCRG display with the horizontal scale 1 cm/min

3 cm/min: OCRG display with the horizontal scale 3 cm/min
Changing the Trendgraph Scale for Heart Rate and SpO2 and Sensitivity for Respiration
You can change the trendgraph scale for heart rate and SpO2 and sensitivity for
respiration.
1. Touch the SCALE key on the OCRG window to display the SCALE SETUP
window.
2. Touch the HR or SpO2 key on the left and select the desired scale on the
right.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Recording or Printing the OCRG Trend

Recording the OCRG Trend
The OCRG trend displayed on the OCRG page can be recorded or printed on the
optional recorder or connected network printer.
1. Display the OCRG trend you want to record on the OCRG page.

Time slider
key or time slider.
window. For details, refer to “RECORDER page” in Section 3 of the
4. Check the number of pages and touch the RECORD key in <RECORDER>
box.
The OCRG trend is recorded as displayed on the OCRG page.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Recording example
Printing the OCRG Trend

1. Display the OCRG trend you want to print on the OCRG page.

Time slider
key or time slider.
window. For details, refer to “RECORDER page” in Section 3 of the

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
box. The “PRINTING” message appears on the screen and the OCRG is
printed as displayed on the OCRG window.
Printing example

Section 7 12 Lead Analysis/12 Lead
Windows
12 Lead Analysis Window..................................................................................................................................... 7.2
Preparation Flowchart................................................................................................................................ 7.2
Displaying the 12 LEAD ANALYSIS Window.............................................................................................. 7.3
Entering the Patient’s Date of Birth and Gender........................................................................................ 7.4
Displaying the PATIENT INFO Window............................................................................................ 7.4
Entering the Date of Birth and Age.................................................................................................. 7.4 7
Entering the Gender......................................................................................................................... 7.4
Performing 12 Lead ECG Interpretation..................................................................................................... 7.5
Recording or Printing the 12 Lead ECG Waveform.................................................................................... 7.7
Recording the 12 Lead ECG Waveforms......................................................................................... 7.7
Printing the 12 Lead ECG Waveforms............................................................................................. 7.8
12 LEAD Window.................................................................................................................................................. 7.9
Displaying the 12 LEAD Window................................................................................................................ 7.9
12 LEAD Page.......................................................................................................................................... 7.10
Scrolling the 12 Lead Data File...................................................................................................... 7.10
Recording the 12 Lead Data.......................................................................................................... 7.10
ANALYSIS WAVE Page............................................................................................................................ 7.11
Recording or Printing the 12 Lead Waveform........................................................................................... 7.12
Recording the 12 Lead Waveform.................................................................................................. 7.12
Printing the 12 Lead Waveform...................................................................................................... 7.13
REPORT Page......................................................................................................................................... 7.14
Recording or Printing the 12 Lead Interpretation Results........................................................................ 7.14
Recording the 12 Lead Interpretation Results............................................................................... 7.14
Printing the 12 Lead Interpretation Results.................................................................................... 7.15
AVERAGE WAVE Page............................................................................................................................ 7.16
Printing the Averaged ECGs.......................................................................................................... 7.16

7. 12 LEAD ANALYSIS/12 LEAD WINDOWS
12 Lead Analysis Window
When ECG is monitored with 10 electrodes, simultaneous 12 lead ECG can be

displayed on the 12 LEAD ANALYSIS window. When ECG is monitored with
6 electrodes, simultaneous 8 lead ECG can be displayed.
The ECG waveforms on the 12 LEAD ANALYSIS window can be analyzed by

the 12 lead ECG interpretation program (ECAPS 12C) and analysis result and
clinical findings can be displayed on the screen. For details about the analysis
and the clinical findings, refer to the ECAPS 12C program user’s guide. Up to
6 lead ECG interpretation result can be saved on the monitor.
ECG waveforms displayed on the 12 LEAD ANALYSIS window, 12 LEAD

page, ANALYSIS WAVE page and REPORT page in 12 LEAD window can be
recorded on the recorder module.
When the monitor is connected to the CNS-9300 series, CNS-9601 or CNS-

9701 central monitor network, the ECG waveforms displayed on the 12 LEAD
ANALYSIS window, the 12 lead ECG interpretation result and the averaged
ECG can be sent to the central monitor and printed on the central monitor printer.
When the monitor is connected to the CNS-9601 central monitor with QP-964P
program kit or CNS-9701 central monitor with QP-974P program kit, the
12 lead ECG interpretation result and ECG waveforms are automatically sent to
the central monitor and can be reviewed and printed on the central monitor.
When the monitor is connected to a network printer, the ECG waveforms

displayed on the 12 LEAD ANALYSIS window can be printed on the network
printer.
Preparation Flowchart
1. Display the PATIENT INFO window on the 12 LEAD ANALYSIS window
and check that the age and gender are correct. To correct the age and gender,
refer to “Entering the Patient’s Date of Birth and Gender” in this section.
2. Check that the electrodes are attached to the patient and leads are connected
appropriately.
3. Display the 12 LEAD ANALYSIS window and check that ECGs on the
window are stable. Refer to the next “Displaying the 12 LEAD ANALYSIS
Window” section.

Displaying the 12 LEAD ANALYSIS Window

2. Touch the 12 LEAD ANALYSIS key. The 12 LEAD ANALYSIS window

appears.
When 12 LEAD ANALYSIS is assigned to one of the function keys at the

upper left of the screen, touching the 12 LEAD ANALYSIS function key
also opens the 12 LEAD ANALYSIS window.
Lead ST level ECG
Prints the displayed

ECGs on the WS-371P
recorder module or
connected network
printer.
You can change the Starts Displays 12 LEAD Patient’s Patient’s
sensitivity of the ECG analysis. window. gender age
waveforms.
You can change the patient’s date of
birth and gender.

Entering the Patient’s Date of Birth and Gender

Displaying the PATIENT INFO Window
1. Touch the PATIENT INFO key on the 12 LEAD ANALYSIS window. The
PATIENT INFORMATION window appears.
Entering the Date of Birth and Age
CAUTION
When the date of birth or age is not entered, 12 lead ECG
interpretation is performed with the patient as 35 years old.
1. Touch the YEAR, MONTH and DAY key to enter year, month and day
respectively.
2. Enter the numbers by using the numeric keypad, then touch the ENT key.
3. Touch the SET key. When the year, month and day are entered, age is
automatically calculated and appears in the age area.
Entering the Gender
CAUTION
When the gender is not specified, 12 lead ECG interpretation is
performed with the patient as male.
Touch the MALE, FEMALE or - (Unknown) key in the <GENDER> box.

Performing 12 Lead ECG Interpretation
WARNING
Do not use 12 lead ECG interpretation results
and measured values from the Mason-Likar
modification for diagnosis because the limb
electrode placement is not the same as the
standard 12 lead ECG. This may cause wrong
diagnosis since 12 lead ECG interpretation of this
monitor is based on the standard 12 lead ECG.
CAUTION CAUTION 7
• The 12 lead ECG interpretation is performed When the gender is not specified, 12 lead ECG
for acquired ECG waveforms only and does not interpretation is performed with the patient as
reflect all conditions of the patient. The results male.
of the analysis might not correspond to the
judgement of a physician.
CAUTION
• Overall judgement must be performed by the
When the date of birth or age is not entered, 12
physician, referring to the analysis result,
lead ECG interpretation is performed with the
clinical findings and other examination results.
patient as 35 years old.
After the physician’s overall judgement, the
analysis results should be signed or initialed by
the physician.
NOTE
• When electrodes are not attached to the limbs, the analysis result
concerning the ECG axis (such as axis deviation) may differ from the
analysis with electrodes attached to limbs.
• Noise is rejected from the analyzed waveforms by the 50/60 Hz filter,
but noise other than these frequencies might not be rejected.

Touch the START key to start analyzing ECGs. The “SAVING. PLEASE WAIT”
message appears and 10 second ECG of all leads are acquired and analyzed.
When analyzing is complete, the “ANALYZING. PLEASE WAIT” message

disappears and the 12 LEAD window is displayed.

Recording or Printing the 12 Lead ECG Waveform

Recording the 12 Lead ECG Waveforms
10 second ECG waveform used for analysis can be recorded on the optional
recorder.
1. Touch the PRINT key. The window appears.
2. Touch the RECORDER key. Recording starts. 7
Recording example

Printing the 12 Lead ECG Waveforms

10 second 12 lead ECG waveform used for analysis can be printed when the
monitor is connected to a network printer or the monitor is connected to a
CNS-9300 series or CNS-9701 central monitor network.
1. Touch the PRINT key. The window appears.
2. Touch the PRINTER key. Printing starts.
Printing example

12 LEAD Window
The 12 LEAD window has the following pages related to 12 LEAD ANALYSIS
window.
• 12 LEAD page for displaying the 12 lead analysis result data
• ANALYSIS WAVE page for displaying ECG waveforms used for analysis
• REPORT page for displaying clinical findings
• AVERAGE WAVE page for displaying averaged ECG waveforms
NOTE
• When <SHOW ADMIT CONFIRMATION WINDOW> is set to “Off” in 7
may be lost.
Displaying the 12 LEAD Window

2. Touch the 12 LEAD key. The 12 LEAD window appears.

12 LEAD Page
To see the 12 lead analysis result data, touch the 12 LEAD tab. Up to six files
can be saved and up to four files can be displayed on the 12 LEAD page.
Selected file
Scroll bar
Event bar
When 12 LEAD is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper left of the
screen, the 12 LEAD page can be displayed by touching the 12 LEAD function
key. Refer to “KEYS Window” in the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3 to assign
a function to the function key.
For the event bar description, refer to “Event Bar” in Section 6.
Scrolling the 12 Lead Data File

The 12 lead analysis result data table can be scrolled by touching the or
key on the vertical scroll bar.
Recording the 12 Lead Data

The displayed 12 lead data can be recorded on the optional recorder.
1. Display the 12 lead data you want to record.

3. Touch the RECORD PAGE key. Recording starts.
Recording example
7
ANALYSIS WAVE Page

To see the 12 lead analysis result, touch the ANALYSIS WAVE tab. About 2
seconds of the ECG of each lead and 10 seconds of rhythm waveform (lead II)
used for the analysis are displayed.
Patient’s gender Patient’s age

Date and time
Lead
ST level
Analyzed ECG
(about 2 s)
Rhythm waveform
(about 10 s)
Event bar
Records or prints the displayed

ECGs on the WS-371P recorder
module or connected network
printer.

Recording or Printing the 12 Lead Waveform

Recording the 12 Lead Waveform
Analyzed 10 second ECG waveform can be recorded on the optional recorder.
The rhythm waveform cannot be recorded.

starts.
Recording example

Printing the 12 Lead Waveform

Analyzed 10 second 12 lead ECG waveform used for analysis can be printed
when the monitor is connected to a network printer.
7
Printing example

REPORT Page
To see analysis results, touch the REPORT tab. The REPORT page appears. For
details about the findings, refer to the ECAPS 12C program User’s Guide.
When the analysis result on the REPORT window is recorded or printed, the
recorded/printed data must be examined by a physician. After the physician’s
overall judgement, the “UNCONFIRMED REPORT” message on the recording/
printing paper must be crossed out and signed by the physician.
Up to six analysis results can be saved in the monitor. When another analysis
is performed, the older data is deleted. If necessary, record or print the analysis
result before performing another analysis on the 12 LEAD ANALYSIS window.
Patient’s gender Patient’s age
Date and time
Measured values
Finding code and analysis results
Event bar
Records or prints the displayed ECGs on the

WS-371P recorder module or connected network
printer.
When the analysis is not performed, “NO DATA” message appears.
Recording or Printing the 12 Lead Interpretation Results

Recording the 12 Lead Interpretation Results
The 12 lead interpretation results are recorded as display on the REPORT page.

starts.
Recording example
Printing the 12 Lead Interpretation Results

To stop printing, press the [Record] key.
Printing example

AVERAGE WAVE Page

To see the averaged ECGs, touch the AVERAGE WAVE tab. The cursors appear
to indicate the P wave start and end points, QRS start and end points and T wave
end points. The averaged ECGs can only be printed on the network printer.
Averaged ECG
(about 2 s)
Cursor
Event bar
Prints the displayed ECGs

on the connected network
printer.
Printing the Averaged ECGs

The averaged ECGs, analysis results and findings are printed.

Printing example

Section 8 Drug/Lung Function
Windows
DRUG Window..................................................................................................................................................... 8.2
Drug Titration Initial Settings...................................................................................................................... 8.3
Flow Rate Equations.................................................................................................................................. 8.3
Displaying the DRUG Window.............................................................................................................................. 8.5
Selecting the Drug................................................................................................................................................ 8.7
Assigning a Drug Name and Dosage Unit to DRUG A to D................................................................................. 8.8
Changing the Settings........................................................................................................................................ 8.10
Changing the Drug Amount, Solution Amount, Dosage, Flow Rate and Weight...................................... 8.10 8
Changing the Dose Step.......................................................................................................................... 8.11
Unit and Setting Range............................................................................................................................ 8.11
Drug Amount, Dosage and Step.................................................................................................... 8.11
Solution Amount, Flow Rate and Weight........................................................................................ 8.12
LUNG FUNCTION Window................................................................................................................................ 8.13
Displaying the LUNG FUNCTION Window............................................................................................... 8.13
Entering the Data..................................................................................................................................... 8.15
Explanation of the DATA ENTRY Items.......................................................................................... 8.15
Checking the Calculation Results............................................................................................................. 8.16
Explanation of the CALCULATION RESULTS............................................................................... 8.16
Adding the Calculation Results to the LUNG TREND Table..................................................................... 8.17
Displaying the LUNG TREND Table......................................................................................................... 8.17
Recording the Calculation Results and Entered Data.............................................................................. 8.18

8. DRUG/LUNG FUNCTION WINDOWS
DRUG Window
On the DRUG window, you can calculate the flow rates and dosages for
medication titrations. The flow rate is calculated from the following equation.
The dosage can also be calculated when the flow rate is known.
Dosage × Patient Weight × Solution Amount

Flow rate = ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Drug Amount
There are three windows for the drug calculation. On the DOSE window, you can
see the table of the selected drug titration. The drug name and unit are selected
on the DRUG window. On the SETTING window, you can change drug amount
(AMOUNT), solution amount (VOLUME), dosage (DOSE), flow rate (SAMPLE
RATE), patient weight and dose step. The settings on the DRUG and SETTING
windows are used for the drug calculation and you can see the calculation result
on the DOSE window. The dosage and flow rate calculated from the setting on
the SETTING window are highlighted in blue.
Drug name
selected on the
DRUG window
Titration table
Value calculated from
the settings on the
SETTING window
Set on the SETTING window. Select the dose step. Prints the titration table and the drug on the
recorder or network printer.
NOTE
• When using the DRUG window for the first time after shipment or after
settings are initialized, you must set the drug names and other settings.
• When the patient weight is changed on the ADMIT page of the ADMIT
DISCHARGE window, the titration is automatically recalculated with the
new weight.
17 drugs and drug amount, solution amount, dosage and dose step for each drug
are preset on the monitor. The dosage and flow rate are calculated from the
equations listed in the “Flow Rate Equations” section. You can set four other
drugs on the DRUG window and change the settings on the EDIT window.

Drug Titration Initial Settings

Drug Name Drug Amount Solution Amount Dosage Step
AMRINONE 500 mg 250 mL 5.00 µg/kg/min 0.10
AMINOPHYLLINE 500 mg 250 mL 0.50 mg/h 0.10
BRETYLIUM 2000 mg 250 mL 1.00 mg/min 0.10
DOBUTAMINE 250 mg 250 mL 2.50 µg/kg/min 0.10
DOPAMINE 800 mg 250 mL 2.00 µg/kg/min 0.10
EPINEPHRINE 4 mg 250 mL 1.00 µg/min 0.10
HEPARIN 25000 units 250 mL 1000 units/h 50
INSULIN 100 units 100 mL 1.00 units/h 0.10
ISOPROTERENOL 2 mg 250 mL 1.00 µg/kg/min 0.10
LIDOCAINE 2000 mg 250 mL 2.00 mg/min 0.10
NITROGLYCERIN 50 mg 250 mL 100 µg/min 0.10
NITROPRUSSIDE 50 mg 250 mL 0.50 µg/kg/min 0.10
NOREPINEPHRINE 4 mg 250 mL 2.00 µg/min 0.10 8
PHENYLEPHRINE 300 mg 250 mL 100 µg/min 0.10
PROCAINAMIDE 2000 mg 250 mL 2.00 mg/min 0.10
STREPTOKINASE 750000 IU 250 mL 30000 IU/h 5000
TPA 100 mg 200 mL 20.00 mg/h 0.10
DRUG A to D 500 mg 250 mL 1.00 µg/kg/min 0.01
Flow Rate Equations

Dosage Unit Drug Name Equation
AMINOPHYLLINE Dosage (mg/h) × Solution amount (mL)

mg/h Flow rate (mL/h) = –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TPA Drug amount (mg)
BRETYLIUM
Dosage (mg/min) × Solution amount (mL) × 60
mg/min LIDOCAINE Flow rate (mL/h) = –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Drug amount (mg)
PROCAINAMIDE
EPINEPHRINE
ISOPROTERENOL Dosage (µg/min) × Solution amount (mL) × 60
µg/min Flow rate (mL/h) = ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
NOREPINEPHRINE Drug amount (mg) × 1000
PHENYLEPHRINE
AMRINONE
DOPAMINE
Dosage (µg/kg/min) × Weight (kg) × Solution amount (mL) × 60
µg/kg/min DOBUTAMINE Flow rate (mL/h) = –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Drug amount (mg) × 1000
NITROGLYCERINE
NITROPRUSSIDE
HEPARIN Dosage (units/h) × Solution amount (mL)

units/h Flow rate (mL/h) = ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
INSULIN Drug amount (units)
Dosage (IU/h) × Solution amount (mL)

IU/h STREPTOKINASE Flow rate (mL/h) = ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Drug amount (IU)

For DRUG A to D, when using the same dosage unit in the previous table, the
same equation is used. When using other units, refer to the table below.
Dosage Unit Equation
Dosage (mg/kg/min) × Weight (kg) × Solution amount (mL) × 60

mg/kg/min Flow rate (mL/h) = ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Drug amount (mg)
Dosage (mg/kg/h) × Weight (kg) × Solution amount (mL)

mg/kg/h Flow rate (mL/h) = –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Drug amount (mg)
Dosage (µg/h) × Solution amount (mL)

µg/h Flow rate (mL/h) = ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Dosage (µg/kg/h) × Weight (kg) × Solution amount (mL)

µg/kg/h Flow rate (mL/h) = –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Dose speed (units/kg/h) × Weight (kg) × Base amount (mL)

units/kg/h Flow rate (mL/h) = –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Drug amount (units)
Dose speed (IU/kg/h) × Weight (kg) × Base amount (mL)

IU/kg/h Flow rate (mL/h) = –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Drug amount (IU)

Displaying the DRUG Window
1. Press the [MENU] key to display the MENU window.
2. Touch the DRUG key. The DRUG window appears.
When DRUG is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper left of the
screen, touching the DRUG function key also opens the DRUG window.
Select a drug.
Displays EDIT window for entering

drug name and dose unit.

3. To display the SETTINGS window, touch the SETTINGS tab.

Touch a key to enter value.
Use the numeric keypad to

enter value. Touch the ENT key
to register the entered value.
To display the DOSE window, touch the DOSE tab.
Touching the PRINT key prints the titration table and the drug data on the
left.
Recording example

Selecting the Drug
1. Display the DRUG window.

Press the [Menu] key → DRUG key → DRUG tab.
Selected drug name
2. Select the drug by touching the drug name key. When the drug is selected,
drug amount, solution amount (BASE VOLUME), dosage (DOSE) and step
(DOSE STEP) set for that drug and concentration and flow rate (SAMPLE
RATE) which are automatically calculated appear on the window.
NOTE
• DOPAMINE, DOBUTAMINE, NITROGLYCERIN and
NITROPRUSSIDE need patient weight to calculate the flow rate.
For these drugs, enter the patient weight on the ADMIT page of
the ADMIT DISCHARGE window or the SETTINGS window of the
DRUG window.
• For the DRUG A to D, assign the drug name and set the unit on the
DRUG window and set the drug amount, solution amount, dosage
and step on the SETTINGS window.

Assigning a Drug Name and Dosage Unit to DRUG A to D
When using a drug other than the 17 preset drugs, you can assign a drug name
and dosage unit to DRUG A to D. When the dosage unit is set, the flow rate
unit is automatically set. When using this function, you must also set the drug
amount, solution amount (BASE VOLUME), dosage (DOSE) and step (DOSE
STEP) so that the dosage and flow rate (SAMPLE RATE) can be calculated.
1. Display the DRUG NAME window.

Press the [Menu] key → DRUG key → DRUG tab.
2. Select DRUG A, B, C or D key to assign a drug name.
3. Touch the EDIT key. The keyboard for entering drug name appears.
Cursor
Delete key (deletes
one character)
Alphanumeric ENT key

characters
Moves cursor
Space key
4. Enter the drug name. Up to 16 alphanumeric characters can be entered.

Touch the ENT key to register the entered name.

5. Select the unit. When the dosage unit is set, the flow rate unit is
automatically set as follows.
Dosage Unit Drug Amount Unit

mg/h
mg/min
mg/kg/h
mg/kg/min
mg
µg/h
µg/min
µg/kg/h
µg/kg/min
units/h units
IU/h IU

Changing the Settings
The following items can be changed for the drug calculation. When the settings
are changed, the dosage and flow rate are automatically recalculated.
• Drug amount
• Solution amount (Base volume)
• Dosage (Dose)
• Flow rate (Sample rate)
• Weight
• Step (Dose step)
NOTE
• Enter the data in the units displayed on the window.
• When using the drug which is assigned to DRUG A to D, you must
set the unit on the DRUG window before changing the setting on the
SETTINGS window.
Changing the Drug Amount, Solution Amount, Dosage, Flow Rate and Weight
1. Display the SETTINGS window.
Press the [Menu] key → DRUG key → SETTINGS tab.
Select a setting item.
For entering number
2. Select the item you want to change the setting for by touching the item name
key.
3. Change the setting.

Use the numeric keypad on the window, then touch the ENT key.

Changing the Dose Step

1. Display the DRUG window.
Press the [Menu] key → DRUG key → DOSE tab.
2. Select the setting from the <DOSE STEP> box.
Unit and Setting Range

Drug Amount, Dosage and Step
Drug Amount Dosage Step

Drug Name
Unit Setting Range Unit Setting Range Setting Range
AMRINONE µg/kg/min
AMINOPHYLLINE mg/h
BRETYLIUM mg/min
mg 0.01, 0.05, 0.10, 1.00, 10.00
DOBUTAMINE µg/kg/min
DOPAMINE µg/kg/min
EPINEPHRINE µg/min
HEPARIN units/h 10, 50, 100, 500
units
INSULIN units/kg/h
ISOPROTERENOL µg/min
mg
LIDOCAINE 0.01 to 1500000 mg/min 0.01 to 1500000
NITROGLYCERIN µg/kg/min
NITROPRUSSIDE µg/kg/min 0.01, 0.05, 0.10, 1.00, 10.00
NOREPINEPHRINE µg/min
mg
PHENYLEPHRINE µg/min
PROCAINAMIDE
mg/min
ISOPROTERENOL
IU/h
STREPTOKINASE IU 5000, 10000, 50000
IU/kg/h
TPA mg mg/h 0.01, 0.05, 0.10, 1.00, 10.00

For DRUG A to D
Dosage Drug Amount Step

Unit Setting Range Unit Setting Range Setting Range
mg/h
mg/min
mg/kg/h
mg/kg/min
mg 0.01, 0.05, 0.10, 1.00, 10.00
µg/h
µg/min
0.01 to 1500000 0.01 to 1500000
µg/kg/h
µg/kg/min
units/h
units 10, 50, 100, 500
units/kg/h
IU/h
IU 5000, 10000, 50000
IU/kg/h
Solution Amount, Flow Rate and Weight
Item Unit Drug Amount Unit

Solution Amount mL 1 to 1000
Flow Rate mL/h 0.1 to 1000
Weight kg 0 to 449.9

LUNG FUNCTION Window
There are two windows in the LUNG FUNCTION window. The DATA ENTRY
window calculates the patient’s respiration dynamics and the LUNG FUNCTION
window displays the calculation result. The following data required for this
calculation is automatically acquired from the monitoring parameters when the
window is opened.
• Patient’s height and weight entered on the ADMIT page of the ADMIT
DISCHARGE window
• CCO value (When CCO is measured, the CCO value is used as the CO value)
• O2 when O2 or anesthetic gas is monitored
The calculation result displayed on the LUNG FUNCTION page can be recorded
8
on the optional recorder.
Displaying the LUNG FUNCTION Window


2. Touch the LUNG FUNCTION key. The DATA ENTRY page appears.
When LUNG FUNCTION is assigned to one of the function keys at the

upper left of the screen, touching the LUNG FUNCTION function key also
opens the DATA ENTRY page.
Setting items Use the numeric keypad to change the

values on the DATA ENTRY window.
3. Touch the LUNG FUNCTION tab. The LUNG FUNCTION page appears.
The values in this
column can be changed
The values in on the DATA ENTRY
this column are window.
automatically
calculated Adds the values on the
according to the window to the LUNG
values in the TREND page in the
DATA ENTRY TREND window.
column.
Shows the LUNG

TREND page in the
TREND window.
Records the displayed

data on the WS-371P
recorder module.

Entering the Data

Explanation of the DATA ENTRY Items
Item Name Unit Setting Range

Height cm/inch 0.1 to 299.9
Weight kg/pound 0.1 to 449.9
CO L/min 0.01 to 20.0
O2 % 1 to 100
Atmospheric pressure mmHg/kPa 235 to 795
PaCO2 mmHg/kPa 0 to 200
Hb g/dL, mmol/L 0.1 to 50.0
PaO2 mmHg/kPa 0 to 800
SaO2 % 1 to 100
_
PvO2 mmHg/kPa 1 to 100
_
SvO2 % 0 to 99
8
1. Display the DATA ENTRY page.
Press the [Menu] key → LUNG FUNCTION key → DATA ENTRY tab.
Numeric keypad
2. If necessary, change values using the numeric keypad. Select the item you
want to change the settings by touching the item name key.
3. Change the value using the numeric keypad on the window, then touch the
ENT key.
4. Repeat step 2 and 3 to select other parameters.
When height or weight is changed, the same setting on the ADMIT page
of the ADMIT DISCHARGE window and windows which use height
and weight are also changed. The respiration dynamics are recalculated
according to the entered values.

Checking the Calculation Results

1. Display the LUNG FUNCTION page.
Press the [Menu] key → LUNG FUNCTION key → LUNG FUNCTION
tab.
2. Check the calculation results.
Explanation of the CALCULATION RESULTS
Label Name Unit

BSA Body surface area m2
CI Cardiac index L/min/m2
AaDO2 Alveolar arterial oxygen tension difference mmHg, kPa
CaO2 Arterial oxygen content mL/dL
DO2 Oxygen delivery mL/min
DO2I Oxygen delivery index mL/min/m2
_
CvO2 Venous oxygen content mL/dL
avDO2 Arteriovenous oxygen difference mL/dL
VO2 Oxygen consumption mL/min
VO2I Oxygen consumption index mL/min/m2
O2ER Oxygen extraction ratio %
PaO2/O2 Oxygenation ratio mmHg, kPa
Qs/Qt Shunt fraction %

Adding the Calculation Results to the LUNG TREND Table

tab.
2. Touch the ADD key on the LUNG FUNCTION page to add the calculation
results to the table on the LUNG TREND page in the TREND window.
Displaying the LUNG TREND Table

tab.
2. Touch the SHOW key on the LUNG FUNCTION window to display the
table on the LUNG TREND page in the TREND window.

Recording the Calculation Results and Entered Data

The calculation results and entered data displayed on the LUNG FUNCTION
page can be recorded on the optional recorder.

tab.
2. Touch the RECORD key. The recording starts.
To stop recording the table, press the [Record] key.
Recording example

Section 9 Interbed Window
Registering Interbed Beds.................................................................................................................................... 9.3

Removing an Interbed Bed......................................................................................................................... 9.3
Displaying the Numeric Data of All Interbed Beds................................................................................................ 9.4
Displaying the Interbed Bed Data......................................................................................................................... 9.5
Interbed Alarm...................................................................................................................................................... 9.7
Interbed Alarm Setting............................................................................................................................... 9.8

9. INTERBED WINDOW
When the bedside monitor is connected to a central monitor network, the bedside
monitor data can be sent to the central monitor. The bedside monitor can display
monitoring data of up to 20 other beds in the network on the INTERBED
window. If you have previously registered other beds as interbed beds on the
INTERBED window, an alarmed interbed bed ID appears on the home screen
and alarm sounds on this bedside monitor.
To use the interbed function, the following settings must be set.

• Register the beds to be managed by the interbed function on this monitor
• Set <INTERBED ALARMS TO DISPLAY> on the INTERBED page of the
SYSTEM SETUP window to ALL, CRISIS AND WARNING, or CRISIS.
Refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.
• Set <AUTO INTERBED DISPLAY> on the SETTINGS window of the
INTERBED window to ON to automatically display the VIEW OTHER BEDS
window of the alarmed bed when an alarm occurs on that bed
WARNING
Do not monitor a patient’s vital signs only by the interbed function.
The patient must be monitored on the interbed bed or central
monitor.
WARNING
• Check the patient first and take necessary measure to ensure
patient’s safety.
• Check the alarm settings on the bedside monitor and change the
alarm settings if necessary.
NOTE
The monitor must be connected to a network to use the interbed function.

9. INTERBED WINDOW
Registering Interbed Beds
To view another bed, you must register the bed as an interbed bed. Only
registered beds can be viewed. You can register up to 20 interbed beds. Any bed
in the monitor network can be registered as an interbed bed.
When registering an interbed bed, the power of the bedside monitor to be

registered must be turned on.
1. Display the SELECT BEDS window.

Press the [Menu] key → INTERBED key → SELECT BEDS tab.
9
Registered beds
Group
Beds in the
selected group
Scroll beds.
2. In the <SELECTED BEDS> box, select the position to register the interbed
bed.
3. Touch the GROUP key to select the group to which the desired bed belongs
and select the bed from the bed list. The beds which are already registered as
interbed beds cannot be selected.
4. Check that the selected bed appears in the <SELECTED BEDS> box.
Removing an Interbed Bed

1. In the <SELECTED BEDS> box, select the interbed bed to be removed.
2. Touch the VACANT key.

9. INTERBED WINDOW
Displaying the Numeric Data of All Interbed Beds
The numeric data of all registered interbed beds can be displayed on the VIEW
OTHER BEDS window. There are two display patterns for this window.
Display the VIEW OTHER BEDS window.

Press the [Menu] key → INTERBED key → VIEW OTHER BEDS tab.
To see more parameters on the VIEW OTHER • When no interbed beds are registered in the bottom three rows on the SELECT
BEDS window, register beds only in the top BEDS window, the heart rate, SpO2, blood pressure, CO2, BIS and temperature
two rows of the SELECT BEDS window.
of the interbed beds are displayed on the VIEW OTHER BEDS window.
When any beds are registered in the

bottom three rows on the SELECT BEDS
window, only HR and SpO2 are displayed
on the VIEW OTHER BEDS window.
• When interbed beds are registered in the bottom three rows on the SELECT
BEDS window, only the heart rate and SpO2 of the interbed beds are displayed
on the VIEW OTHER BEDS window.
Touching a patient name opens the individual bed window. Refer to the next
“Displaying the Interbed Bed Data” section for details.
9. INTERBED WINDOW
Displaying the Interbed Bed Data
On the individual bed window of the INTERBED window, heart rate and ECG
waveform of the first trace are always displayed. Other numerical data and one
waveform from the following list can be displayed. Other parameters cannot be
displayed.
Numeric Data
• Heart rate
• VPC
• ST
• Respiration rate
• CO2
• SpO2
9
• NIBP
• BIS
• T1
• T2
• O2
• P1
• P2
• P3
Waveform
• Respiration/CO2/FLOW
• SpO2
• P1
• P2
• P3
NOTE
When the instrument which is registered to the interbed bed is turned off
or not connected to the network correctly, the “MONITOR OFF” message
is displayed and measurement value and alarm are not displayed.

9. INTERBED WINDOW
1. Display the VIEW OTHER BEDS window.

Press the [Menu] key → INTERBED key → VIEW OTHER BEDS tab.
Waveform display
area
Changes sensitivity
or scale of the
waveform.
Numeric display
area
Silences the interbed

alarm.
2. Touch the desired bed on the VIEW OTHER BEDS window to display the
individual bed window.
To change beds, touch the key to close the window and select the desired
bed.
To change the second waveform, touch the numeric data of the parameter
you want to display for the waveform in the numeric display area.
To not display the second waveform, touch the numeric value of the second
parameter in the waveform display area.
You can also change the waveform sensitivity or scale by using the and
keys.
Even when ECG is not monitored, pulse rate is displayed on the screen when IBP
or SpO2 is monitored.

9. INTERBED WINDOW
Interbed Alarm
When an alarm occurs on an interbed bed, a highlighted bed name appears

at the top right corner of the home screen. This interbed alarm message does
not indicate the type of alarm. The VIEW OTHER BEDS window can be
automatically displayed when an alarm occurs and <AUTO INTERBED
DISPLAY> is set to ON.
WARNING
• Check the patient first and take necessary measure to ensure
patient’s safety.
• Check the alarm settings on the bedside monitor and change the 9
alarm settings if necessary.
NOTE
When the alarm function is turned off by “all alarms off” or “alarm
suspended” on the interbed bed, the interbed alarm does not occur on
this bedside monitor.
Only one interbed ID can be displayed at a time on the home screen. When more
than one interbed alarm occurs, the alarm message appears and the alarming
interbed IDs are alternately displayed one at a time.
On the INTERBED window, the bed ID and patient name of the alarmed bed is
highlighted.
NOTE
The interbed alarm for another bed is lower level than any other alarm for
this bed. Therefore, the interbed alarm might not be indicated during an
alarm for this bed.
You can also silence the interbed alarm by touching the key on the individual
bed window of the INTERBED window. Silencing the interbed alarm on this
monitor also silences the alarm on the alarmed bed itself. The alarm silence
indication on the alarmed bed depends on the alarmed bed specifications. The
alarm silence time depends on the setting on the alarmed bed.
NOTE
When several interbed alarms occur, all interbed alarms are silenced
by touching the key on the individual bed window of the INTERBED
window.
The interbed alarm can only be suspended on the alarmed bed.

9. INTERBED WINDOW
Interbed Alarm Setting
CAUTION
The interbed window only appears on the home screen when an
interbed alarm occurs and <AUTO INTERBED DISPLAY> is set to
ON.
1. Display the SETTINGS window.

Press the [Menu] key → INTERBED key → SETTINGS tab.
2. Select ON or OFF in the <AUTO INTERBED DISPLAY> box. When this

is set to ON, the VIEW OTHER BEDS window is automatically displayed
when an alarm occurs.

Section 10 Recording
Overview of Recording....................................................................................................................................... 10.2

Recording Modes..................................................................................................................................... 10.3
Manual Waveform Recording/Printing............................................................................................ 10.5
Recording/Printing on the 12 LEAD ANALYSIS Window............................................................... 10.5
Recording/Printing on the Review Windows other than 12 Lead Window...................................... 10.5
Recording/Printing on the 12 LEAD Window................................................................................. 10.5
Recording on the LUNG FUNCTION Window................................................................................ 10.5
Recording/Printing OCRG.............................................................................................................. 10.5
Recording on the CO Window........................................................................................................ 10.6
Recording on the TOF Window...................................................................................................... 10.6
Recording on the CCO Window..................................................................................................... 10.6
10
Recording on the FLOW Window................................................................................................... 10.6
Recording on the EEG Window...................................................................................................... 10.6
Recording on the ANALOG Window.............................................................................................. 10.6
Periodic Recording......................................................................................................................... 10.7
Alarm Recording............................................................................................................................ 10.8
Recording Mode Annotations................................................................................................................. 10.10
Recording Priority................................................................................................................................... 10.11
Recording Sensitivity.............................................................................................................................. 10.11
Recording Speed.................................................................................................................................... 10.11
Feeding the Paper after Recording........................................................................................................ 10.11
Recording Related Message.................................................................................................................. 10.12
Recorded/Printed Data........................................................................................................................... 10.12
Changing the Recording Speed....................................................................................................................... 10.13
Changing the Recording Pattern...................................................................................................................... 10.14
Manually Recording/Printing Waveforms.......................................................................................................... 10.15
Recording Waveforms on the Optional Recorder................................................................................... 10.15
Recording Waveforms on the Bedside Monitor with No Recorder......................................................... 10.16
Manual Printing on the Network Printer................................................................................................. 10.16
Setting Periodic Recording............................................................................................................................... 10.17
Changing Settings for Automatic Periodic Recording............................................................................. 10.18
Printing on a Network Printer........................................................................................................................... 10.19

10. RECORDING
Overview of Recording
A variety of waveforms and data can be recorded by the optional recorder.
When the bedside monitor with no recorder is connected to a central monitor

network, waveforms and data of the bedside monitor can be recorded manually
on the central monitor recorder from the bedside monitor.
When the bedside monitor is connected to a network printer, real-time

waveforms, data on the review windows and 12 lead ECG interpretation and
analyzed waveforms can be printed. Refer to the “Printing on a Network Printer”
section.
This section provides an overview of recording.
The “Changing the Recording Pattern” section explains how to change the
recording pattern for all recordings except for the review data recordings.
The “Manually Recording/Printing Waveforms” section explains how to

manually record waveforms at any time.
The “Setting Periodic Recording” section explains necessary settings for

performing automatic periodic recording.
Some recording procedures are explained in other sections.

• To record trendgraphs and tables, see Section 6.
• To record arrhythmia recall files, see Section 6.
• To record alarm history, see Section 6.
• To record full disclosure, see Section 6.
• To record ST level recall files, see Section 6.
• To record 12 lead ECG interpretation result, see Section 7.
• To record 12 lead analysis waveform, see Section 7.
• For alarm recording, see Section 5.
• To record CO data on the CO window, see Section 9, User’s Guide Part II.
• To record TOF measurement results on the TOF window, see Section 12,
User’s Guide Part II.
• To record AP waveform on the CCO window, see Section 13, User’s Guide
Part II.
• To record FLOW data and loops on the FLOW window, see Section 14, User’s
Guide Part II.
• To record EEG waveforms with the numeric values on the EEG window, see
Section 15, User’s Guide Part II.
• To record analog waveforms on the ANALOG window, see Section 17, User’s
Guide Part II.
To load recording paper, see “Loading Recording Paper” in Section 2.

10. RECORDING
Recording Modes
The following recording modes are available.
Recording Length/Time of Operations/conditions/ Recorded

Recorded Data
Mode Recorded Data Settings for Recording Annotation
Time set at [Record] key is pressed or RECORD
Real time/ Up to three waveforms WAVE function key is touched
<MANUAL
delayed selected on the RECORD
RECORD TIME> on Select second and third parameters for MANUAL
waveform window with numerical
the SYSTEM SETUP waveform recording on the RECORD
recording* data
window window
RECORD PAGE key on the PRINT
Trend graph Trendgraph on the Trendgraph displayed TREND
window of the GRAPH 1, 2 or 3
recording window on the window GRAPH
window is touched
Trend table Data of selected time RECORD key on the PRINT window of TREND
Table on the window
recording period the TABLE 1, 2 or 3 window is touched
DATA
NIBP trend Data of selected time RECORD key on the PRINT window of NIBP
Table on the window
recording period the NIBP TREND window is touched TREND
HEMO-
Hemo trend Data of selected time RECORD key on the PRINT window of
Table on the window DYNAMICS
recording period the HEMO TREND window is touched
TREND
Lung trend Data of selected time RECORD key on the PRINT window of LUNG 10
Table on the window
recording period the LUNG TREND window is touched TREND
Acquired arrhythmia
Arrhythmia 12 seconds RECORD PAGE key on the PRINT
waveform
recall window of the RECALL window is RECALL
Arrhythmia waveform on Data displayed on the
recording touched
the window window
RECORD key on the PRINT window
Alarm history Alarm history on the Data of selected time ALARM
of the ALARM HISTORY window is
recording window period HISTORY
touched
Full disclosure
Full disclosure data on
waveform on the
the window
Full window RECORD PAGE key on the PRINT FULL
disclosure Actual size waveform window of the FULL DISC window is DISC-
recording on the window (when touched LOSURE
12 seconds
ZOOM IN key is
touched)
OCRG Data displayed on the
OCRG on the window window of the OCRG window is OCRG
recording window
touched
Recording on
ECG waveforms on the RECORDER key on the PRINT
the 12 LEAD 12 LEAD
12 LEAD ANALYSIS 10 seconds window of the 12 LEAD ANALYSIS
ANALYSIS ECG
window window is touched
WAVE page
Table on the 12 LEAD Data displayed on the
window of the 12 LEAD window is
window window
touched
Recording on RECORD PAGE key on the PRINT
ECG waveforms on the 10 seconds of ECG
the 12 LEAD window of the 12 LEAD window is 12 LEAD
ANALYSIS WAVE page waveforms
window touched
Analysis result on the Data displayed on the
window of the 12 LEAD window is
REPORT page window
touched
Recording on CALCULATION
Data displayed on the
the LUNG RESULTS and DATA RECORD key on the LUNG LUNG
window or all saved
FUNCTION ENTRY data on the FUNCTION window is touched FUNCTION
data
window** window

10. RECORDING
Recording Length/Time of Operations/conditions/ Recorded

Recorded Data
Mode Recorded Data Settings for Recording Annotation
Recording
Up to 5 CO data on the Data displayed on the RECORD key on the CO window is
on the CO CO TABLE
window window touched
window**
Recording
TOF measurement results Data displayed on the RECORD key on the TOF window is
on the TOF TOF
on the TOF window window touched
window
Recording
AP waveform on the RECORD WAVE key on the CCO
on the CCO 1 page CCO
CCO window window is touched
window
Recording on P-V LOOP
FLOW data and loops on RECORD key on the FLOW window is
the FLOW 1 page or F-V
the FLOW window touched
window LOOP
Recording EEG waveforms and RECORD key or RECORD ALL
on the EEG numeric values on the 1 page WAVES key on the EEG window is EEG
window EEG window touched
Recording on
Analog waveforms on the RECORD key on the ANALOG
the ANALOG 1 page ANALOG
ANALOG window window is touched
window
Recording The table and settings RECORDER key on the PRINT DRUG
Data displayed on the
on the DOSE displayed on the DOSE CALC window of the DOSE window is DRUG
window
window window touched
Recording OCRG on the home RECORD OCRG function key on the
1 page OCRG
OCRG screen home screen is touched
<ALARM RECORDING> on the
Up to three waveforms RECORD window must be set to ON
Vital signs selected on the RECORD From 8 seconds Alarm for vital signs parameter must be
alarm window and vital before to 12 seconds turned on
recording sign data at an alarm after alarm occurrence Select second and third parameters for
occurrence waveform recording on the RECORD
window
<ALARM RECORDING> on the ALARM
RECORD window must be set to ON
Up to three waveforms
Alarm for arrhythmia must be turned on
Arrhythmia selected on the RECORD From 8 seconds
<ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS> on the
alarm window and vital before to 12 seconds
ECG window must be set to ON
recording sign data at an alarm after alarm occurrence
occurrence Select second and third parameters for
waveform recording on the RECORD
window
<PERIODIC REC INTERVAL> on the
Up to three waveforms RECORD window must be set to a time
selected on the RECORD interval (FREE, 30, 60 or 120)
10 seconds TIMER
window with numerical Select second and third parameters for
Periodic
data waveform recording on the RECORD
recording
window
OCRG trendgraph (HR, <PERIODIC REC INTERVAL> on the
SpO2 and compressed 2 pages RECORD window must be set to either OCRG
respiration waveform) 5 (OCRG) or 15 (OCRG)
* Real time or delayed recording can be selected on the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide,
Section 3. When the bedside monitor with no optional recorder is connected to a central monitor network, waveforms
and data of the bedside monitor can be recorded manually from the bedside monitor on the central monitor recorder by
pressing the [Record] key. In this case, only real time recording is available.
** CO data and lung function data recording is only available on the optional WS-371P recorder module.

10. RECORDING
Manual Waveform Recording/Printing

Up to three waveforms selected on the RECORD window are recorded. For
details, refer to the “Manually Recording/Printing Waveforms” section.
With recorder: Recorded on the optional recorder whenever the [Record] key
or RECORD WAVE function key is touched.
No recorder: Not available.
Bedside monitor connected to central monitor network:
Recorded on the central monitor recorder whenever the
[Record] key on the bedside monitor is touched. In this case,
ECG and the parameter selected for the second waveform are
recorded.
Bedside monitor connected to a network printer:
Printed on the network printer whenever the PRINTER key on
PRINT window is touched.
Recording/Printing on the 12 LEAD ANALYSIS Window

12 lead ECG waveforms on the 12 LEAD window can be recorded. For details,
refer to “12 LEAD ANALYSIS Window” in Section 7. 10
With recorder: Recorded on the optional recorder when the RECORDER key
on the PRINT window of the 12 LEAD ANALYSIS window is
touched.
Bedside monitor connected to a CNS-9300 series or CNS-9701 central monitor:
Printed on the central monitor printer when the PRINTER key
on the PRINT window of the 12 LEAD ANALYSIS window is
touched.
Printed on the network printer when the PRINTER key on the
PRINT window of the 12 LEAD ANALYSIS window is touched.
Recording/Printing on the Review Windows other than 12 Lead

Window
For details, refer to Section 6.
Recording/Printing on the 12 LEAD Window

For details, refer to Section 7.
Recording on the LUNG FUNCTION Window

The lung function data displayed on the LUNG FUNCTION window can
be recorded on the optional WS-371P recorder module. For details, refer to
“Recording the Calculation Results and Entered Data” in Section 8.
Recording/Printing OCRG
OCRG on the home screen can be recorded. Periodic OCRG recording is also
available. Refer to the “Periodic Recording” section below.
With recorder: Recorded on the optional recorder when the RECORD OCRG
function key on the home screen is touched.

10. RECORDING

Printed on the network printer when the PRINT OCRG key on
the home screen is touched.
Recording on the CO Window

The CO data displayed on the CO window can be recorded on the optional
WS-371P recorder module. Recording starts after a few seconds and a blinking
mark appears on the upper right corner of the screen. CO can only be recorded
on the optional recorder. For details, refer to the User’s Guide Part II, Section 9.
Recording on the TOF Window

Measurement results displayed on the TOF window can be recorded on the
optional WS-371P recorder module. For details, refer to the User’s Guide Part II,
Section 13.
With recorder: Recorded on the optional recorder when the RECORD key on the
TOF window is touched.
Recording on the CCO Window

The AP waveform displayed on the CCO window can be recorded on the
optional WS-371P recorder module. For details, refer to the User’s Guide Part II,
Section 14.
With recorder: Recorded on the optional recorder when the RECORD WAVE
key on the CCO window is touched.
Recording on the FLOW Window

The FLOW data and loops can be recorded on the optional WS-371P recorder
module. For details, refer to the User’s Guide Part II, Section 15.
FLOW window is touched.
Recording on the EEG Window

The EEG waveforms with the numeric values can be recorded on the optional
WS-371P recorder module. For details, refer to the User’s Guide Part II, Section
16.
With recorder: Recorded on the optional recorder when the RECORD key or
RECORD ALL WAVES key on the EEG window is touched.
Recording on the ANALOG Window

The analog waveform on the ANALOG window can be recorded on the optional
WS-371P recorder module. For details, refer to the User’s Guide Part II, Section
17.
ANALOG window is touched.

10. RECORDING
Periodic Recording
There are three types of recording data for periodic recording.
• Up to three waveforms with numerical data:
Up to three waveforms selected on the RECORD window and vital signs data
are recorded automatically at the set interval.
• OCRG:
The trendgraphs of HR and SpO2 and compressed respiration waveform are
recorded at 5 or 15 minute intervals.
Periodic recording is only available on the optional recorder.
Set the following items on the RECORD window.

• Periodic recording time interval. When OFF is selected, periodic recording is
turned off.
To periodically record OCRG, select either the 5 (OCRG) or 15 (OCRG).
• Recording pattern (not necessary when recording the OCRG)
Recording examples 10
OCRG recording

10. RECORDING
Alarm Recording
When a vital sign alarm or arrhythmia alarm occurs, up to three waveforms
selected on the RECORD window and vital sign data are automatically recorded.
The recorded waveforms are from 8 seconds before to 12 seconds after the alarm
occurrence. The alarm recording is only available on the optional recorder.
Set alarm recording on or off on the RECORD window. For details, refer to
Section 5 “Alarm Function”.
CAUTION
Alarm recording is not performed when:
• Alarm is suspended.
• Alarm recording is set to Off.
Recording examples
Arrhythmia alarm recording

10. RECORDING
Upper/lower limit alarm recording
10

10. RECORDING
Recording Mode Annotations

One of the following annotations is recorded on each page of the recording paper
as shown below.
TIMER: Automatic periodic recording. Refer to “Setting Periodic

Recording” in this section.
ALARM: Automatic recording at a vital sign or arrhythmia
alarm occurrence. Refer to “Turning Automatic Alarm
Recording On/Off” in Section 5.
TREND GRAPH: Trendgraph recording. Refer to “Trend Window” in
Section 6.
TREND DATA: Trend table recording. Refer to “Trend Window” in
Section 6.
NIBP TREND: NIBP trend recording. Refer to “Trend Window” in
Section 6.
HEMO TREND: Hemo trend recording. Refer to “Trend Window” in
Section 6.
LUNG TREND: Lung trend recording. Refer to “Trend Window” in
Section 6.
RECALL: Arrhythmia waveform recording. Refer to “Arrhythmia
Recall Window” in Section 6.
ALARM HISTORY: Alarm history recording. Refer to “Alarm History
Window” in Section 6.
FULL DISCLOSURE: Full disclosure recording. Refer to “Full Disclosure
ST: ST level recall recording. Refer to “ST Level Recall
OCRG: OCRG recording on the OCRG window. Refer to
“OCRG Window” in Section 6.
OCRG recording on the home screen.
12 LEAD ECG: ECG waveforms displayed on the ANALYSIS WAVE
page of the 12 LEAD window are recorded. Refer to
“12 LEAD Window” in Section 7.
DRUG: Titration table and settings displayed on the DOSE
window is recorded. Refer to “DRUG Window” in
Section 8.
LUNG FUNCTION: Calculation results and entered data displayed on the
LUNG FUNCTION page are recorded. Refer to “LUNG
FUNCTION Window” in Section 8.
MANUAL: Manual recording.
CO TABLE: Hemodynamics data and thermodilution curves table on
the CO window are recorded. Refer to the User’s Guide
Part II, Section 9 “Cardiac Output Monitoring”.
TOF: Measurement results displayed on the TOF window is
recorded. Refer to the User’s Guide Part II, Section 12
“TOF Monitoring”.
CCO: AP waveform recording. Refer to the User’s Guide Part
II, Section 13 “CCO Monitoring”.

10. RECORDING
P-V LOOP, F-V LOOP: FLOW data and loops displayed on the FLOW window
is recorded. Refer to the User’s Guide Part II, Section
14 “FLOW/Paw Monitoring”.
EEG: EEG waveform recording. Refer to the User’s Guide
Part II, Section 15 “EEG Monitoring”.
ANALOG: Analog waveform recording. Refer to the User’s Guide
Part II, Section 17 “ANALOG Monitoring”.
Recording Priority
If more than one recording mode is activated at the same time, only the highest
priority mode is used.
Manually stopping recording Manual recording Alarm recording Periodic recording

by the [Record] key
High Recording priority Low
10
During alarm recording, if a higher priority alarm occurs, the current recording is
canceled and the higher priority alarm is recorded for 20 seconds.
During any type of recording, if a lower or equal priority alarm recording or

any other type of recording occurs, the lower or equal priority recording is not
performed; only the current recording is performed.
Recording Sensitivity
The sensitivity of the waveforms recorded on the recording paper is the same as
the sensitivity of the waveforms displayed on the screen.
To change the sensitivity, change the sensitivity setting on the parameter setting
window as described in the User’s Guide Part II.
Recording Speed
The recording speed can be set at <RECORDING SPEED> on the RECORD
window. Refer to “Changing the Recording Speed” in this section.
Feeding the Paper after Recording

The paper can be automatically fed after recording. Refer to “RECORD

10. RECORDING
Recording Related Message

The following messages appears in the following conditions.
When out of recording paper: “INSERT REC PAPER”
When the recorder door is open: “CLOSE PAPER MAGAZINE”
Recorded/Printed Data
The following data can be printed.
Printed Item Example

Patient name John Smith
Bed ID BED-001
Date and time 11-07-2002 10:30
Reason for recording TIMER, ALARM, etc.
Sensitivity ×2
Paper speed 25 mm/s
ECG related message MONITOR*1
Heart rate (beats/min) HR: 100
ECG lead II
Number of VPCs VPC: 10
ST level –0.04 mV
Pulse rate (beats/min) PR: 80
SpO2 (%SpO2) SpO2: 98
NIBP: SYS/DIA (MEAN) (mmHg), NIBP: 132/61 (80) [mmHg]
measurement time 17:24
Respiration rate (resp/min) RR: 14
CO2 (mmHg) CO2: 40
IBP: SYS/DIA (MEAN) (mmHg) ART: 132/61 (80)
Temperature (°C/°F) Tskin: 36.4
O2(I) (%) O2(I): 21
Arrhythmia name COUPLET
Waveform annotation*2 N, V, P etc.
*1 Selected setting for FILTERS on the ECG window is recorded. Refer to the
User’s Guide, Part II. When the “CHECK ELECTRODES” alarm occurs,
“CHECK ELECTRODES” is recorded instead of the FILTERS setting.
*2 Recorded when the recording mode is MANUAL, ALARM or RECALL and
<ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS> on the ECG window is set to ON.

10. RECORDING
Changing the Recording Speed
Recording speed can be selected from 12.5, 25 or 50 mm/s for recording with the
optional recorder.
Recording speed and waveform sweep speed on the screen can be set separately.
1. Display the OTHER page.

10
2. Select the speed by touching the speed key in the <RECORDING SPEED>
box.

10. RECORDING
Changing the Recording Pattern
Up to two parameter waveforms can be selected for a recording pattern.
The selected recording pattern applies to all recording except recording on

the review windows, CO window and OCRG. ECG (TRACE 1) is the default
setting.
1. Display the REC PARAMS page.

Press the [Menu] key → RECORD key → REC PARAMS tab.
FLOW, Paw and VOL are not available for the Op No. 32A, 52A, 72A, 33A,
53A and 73A.
2. Select the trace in the <TRACES> box and select the parameter by touching
the parameter key in the <SELECTABLE PARAMETERS> box. Select the
NONE key to not assign any parameter.

10. RECORDING
Manually Recording/Printing Waveforms
Recording Waveforms on the Optional Recorder

Waveforms and data can be recorded manually on the recorder module.
There are four settings:

• Recording pattern: This setting determines which of the measured
parameter waveforms is recorded. Refer to the
“Changing the Recording Pattern” in this section.
• Real-time or delay mode: In DELAY mode, recording begins with the
waveforms acquired 8 seconds before recording
starts. In REAL TIME mode, recording begins with
the waveforms acquired when recording starts. To
select real-time or delayed manual recording mode,
refer to the Administrator’s Guide, “RECORD
Window” in Section 3. 10
• Recording length: CONTINUOUS, 10, 20 or 30 seconds can be
selected for the recording length on the SYSTEM
SETUP window. Refer to the Administrator’s
Guide, “RECORD Window” in Section 3.
• Recording speed: The recording speed is set at the <RECORDING
SPEED> on the RECORD window.
1. If necessary, select the recording pattern on the RECORD window. Refer to

the “Changing the Recording Pattern” in this section.
2. To start recording, press the [Record] key.
When RECORD WAVE is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper
left of the screen, touching the RECORD WAVE function key also starts
Record key manual recording. Refer to “KEYS Window” in the Administrator’s Guide,
Section 3 to assign a function to the function key.
3. To stop recording, press the [Record] key again.
Recording example

10. RECORDING
Recording Waveforms on the Bedside Monitor with No Recorder

When the bedside monitor with no optional recorder is connected to a central
monitor network, waveforms and data can be recorded manually from the
bedside monitor on the central monitor recorder. Three waveforms selected for
the TRACE 1, TRACE 2 and TRACE 3 are recorded with the recording length
selected on the bedside monitor. When CONTINUOUS is selected for the
recording length, 30 seconds is automatically selected.
1. If necessary, select the recording pattern on the RECORD window. Refer to

the “Changing the Recording Pattern” in this section.
2. To start recording, press the [Record] key.
NOTE
Record key
Even if RECORD WAVE is assigned to one of the function keys at the
upper left of the screen, touching the RECORD WAVE function key does
not start recording on the central monitor recorder.
Manual Printing on the Network Printer

When the bedside monitor is connected to a network printer, all monitoring
waveforms and numeric data can be printed on the network printer. The
waveforms from 7 seconds before to 3 seconds after PRINT key on the window
is touched are printed.
The OCRG can also be printed on the network printer. The OCRG displayed on
the home screen can be printed when the PRINT OCRG function key is touched.
To print the OCRG, the print function must be assigned to one of the function
keys in the upper left corner of the screen. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide,
“KEYS Window” in Section 3.
For details about printing on the network printer, refer to “Printing on a Network
Printer” in this section.

10. RECORDING
Setting Periodic Recording
You can select one of the three types of recording data:

• Up to three waveforms with numerical data
• OCRG
From the bedside monitor, automatic periodic recording cannot be performed on

the central monitor recorder.
Up to three waveforms with numerical data

A 10 second waveform can be automatically recorded at preset intervals of 30,
60, 120 minutes or a free interval that you can set to any length.
Recording starts at the nearest half-hour for 30 min interval, at the nearest hour
for 60 or 120 min interval and at the next FREE interval for FREE recording.
10
For example, if you start automatic periodic recording at 9:20 with a 30 min
interval, periodic recording will be performed at 9:30, 10:00, 10:30 and so on. If
you start at 9:20 with a 120 min interval, periodic recording will be performed at
10:00, 12:00, 14:00 and so on. If you start at 9:20 with a FREE interval of
65 min, periodic recording will be performed at 10:25, 11:30, 12:35 and so on.
OCRG
The trendgraphs of HR and SpO2 and compressed respiration waveform are
recorded. The OCRG is recorded every 5 minutes when the 5 (OCRG) is selected
in the <PERIODIC REC INTERVAL> box on the RECORD window, and every
15 minutes when the 15 (OCRG) is selected. To select the 5 (OCRG) or the
15 (OCRG), OCRG must be selected for <CURRENT TREND> on the
SYSTEM window of the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the Administrator’s
Guide, Section 3.
The OCRG recording has two pages. The first page contains HR and SpO2
trendgraphs and the second page contains compressed respiration waveform.

10. RECORDING
Changing Settings for Automatic Periodic Recording

There are two settings:
• Periodic recording on/off: Recording interval must be selected on the
RECORD window to automatically record
waveform and data at periodic interval.
To record OCRG, select the 5 (OCRG) or the 15
(OCRG).
• Free time interval: You can set the desired interval for automatic
periodic recording at <PERIODIC FREE
INTERVAL> on the SYSTEM SETUP window.
FREE selection is from 1 to 120 minutes (1 min/
step). Default setting is 15 min. Refer to “RECORD
1. Display the OTHER page.

2. Select the recording interval in the <PERIODIC REC INTERVAL> box.

Select the OFF key when not performing periodic recording.
To record OCRG every 5 minutes, select the 5 (OCRG) key. To record

OCRG every 15 minutes, select the 15 (OCRG) key.

10. RECORDING
Printing on a Network Printer
When the bedside monitor is connected to a network printer, the following

printing is available. To print on the network printer, the printer properties (IP
address, printer type and paper size) must be set on the RECORD window of the
NOTE
Printing cannot be canceled once it is started.
• Real-time waveform printing:

Prints the waveforms from 7 seconds before to 3 seconds after the PRINT
PAGE key on the PRINT window is touched. Refer to “Manually Recording/
Printing Waveforms” in this section.
• Printing data on the review windows:

10
Prints the displayed trendgraphs when the PRINT PAGE key on the PRINT
window of the TREND GRAPH page is touched.
The data of selected time period can be printed when RECORD key on the
PRINT window of the TREND TABLE, NIBP TREND, HEMO TREND or
LUNG TREND page is touched.
The displayed 8 seconds of arrhythmia recall waveform and the one file before
and after of arrhythmia recall waveform is printed when the PRINT PAGE key
on the PRINT window of the RECALL window is touched.
The compressed or actual size full disclosure waveform selected by the cursor
can be printed when the PRINT PAGE key on the PRINT window of the FULL
DISC window is touched.
The displayed ST recall files and the previous three ST recall files are printed
when the PRINT PAGE key on the PRINT window of the ST window is
touched.
• Printing on the 12 LEAD ANALYSIS window:

When <RECORDING SPEED> on the RECORD window is set to 25 mm/s,
10 seconds of 12 lead ECG on the 12 LEAD ANALYSIS window can be
printed when the PRINTER key on the PRINT window is touched.
When <RECORDING SPEED> on the RECORD window is set to 50 mm/s,

2 pages of 12 lead ECG on the 12 LEAD ANALYSIS window can be printed
when the PRINTER key on the PRINT window is touched.

10. RECORDING
• Printing on the 12 LEAD window:

10 seconds of 12 lead ECG on the ANALYSIS WAVE page, 2.2 second ECG,
10 second rhythm waveform and analysis report on the REPORT page and
averaged waveforms on the AVERAGE WAVE page can be printed when the
PRINT PAGE key on the PRINT window of the 12 LEAD window is touched.
• Printing OCRG on the OCRG window:

The displayed OCRG on the OCRG window can be printed when the PRINT
PAGE key on the PRINT window is touched.
• Printing on the DRUG window:

The titration table and drug data on the DOSE window can be printed when the
PRINTER key on the PRINT window of the DOSE window is touched.
• Printing OCRG on the home screen:

When the PRINT OCRG is assigned to one of the function keys, the OCRG on
the home screen can be printed on the network printer.

Section 11 Reference
Clock Accuracy................................................................................................................................................... 11.2

Periodical Replacement Schedule...................................................................................................................... 11.3
Repair Parts Availability Policy........................................................................................................................... 11.3
11

11. REFERENCE
Clock Accuracy
At an operating temperature of 25°C (77°F), the accuracy of the clock IC of this

monitor is about ±2 min 30 s per month.
At storage temperatures between –20 and +60°C (−4 and +140°F), the accuracy
of the clock IC of this monitor is about ±6 min per month.
Periodically check that the time in the upper right corner of the monitor screen is
correct.
To change the time setting, refer to “Changing Date and Time” in Section 4.
NOTE
When the date or time is changed during monitoring, the date and time of
all stored data is also changed and may not match the date and time on
the printout.
When the monitor is connected to a network

The time on this monitor is automatically adjusted to match the time of
the network as long as the monitor is connected to the network. The date
and time on all monitors in the network are set to the same setting.

11. REFERENCE
Periodical Replacement Schedule
To maintain the performance of the instrument, the following parts must be

periodically replaced.
Code No./
Description Expected Life Span
Model
BSM-3000 series Bedside Monitor
Battery pack (option) SB-671P Approx. 1 year
WS-371P Recorder Module (option)
Approx. 370 stacks of recording
paper
Thermal array head, After 370 stacks of recording
662311
AJ048-8E802 paper, the thermal array head is
deteriorated and the recording
becomes thin.
Approx. 9,000 stacks of
recording paper (continuous
Motor Assy recording)
(Paper drive motor) CD-0004 After 9.000 stacks of recording
paper, the paper drive motor is
11
deteriorated and cannot feed the
recording paper.
Approx. 6 years
When the platen roller is
Platen roller, Ø 8 6114-135436
deteriorated, the paper cannot
be fed.
Must be replaced with a new
Retainer ring, G-3 675369 one when the platen roller is
replaced.
Repair Parts Availability Policy
Nihon Kohden Corporation (NKC) shall stock repair parts (parts necessary to
maintain the performance of the instrument) for a period of 8 years from the
date of delivery. In that period NKC or its authorized agents will repair the
instrument. This period may be shorter than 8 years if the board or part necessary
for the faulty section is not available.

Manufacturer
NIHON KOHDEN CORPORATION NIHON KOHDEN ITALIA S.r.l.
1-31-4 Nishiochiai, Shinjuku-ku Tokyo 161-8560, Japan Via Fratelli Bronzetti 28, 24124 Bergamo, Italy
Phone +81 3- 5996 -8036 Phone + 39 035-219543
Fax + 81 3- 5996-8100 Fax + 39 035-232546
NIHON KOHDEN UK LTD

North and South America Trident Court 118, 1 Oakcroft Road
Chessington, Surrey KT9 1BD, UK
Phone + 44 20-8391-6800
NIHON KOHDEN AMERICA, INC. Fax + 44 20-8391-6809
15353 Barranca Parkway, Irvine, CA 92618, U.S.A.
Toll-free +1-800-325-0283
Phone +1 949- 580 -1555
Fax +1 949- 580 -1550
Asia
NIHON KOHDEN LATIN AMERICA S.A.S SHANGHAI KOHDEN
Carrera 16 No.93A-36 Of. 802. Bogota D.C., Colombia MEDICAL ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENT CORP.
Phone +57 1- 300 -1742 567 Huancheng Bei Road
Fax + 57 1- 300 -1825 Shanghai Comprehensive Industrial Development Zone
Shanghai 201401, China
NIHON KOHDEN DO BRASIL LTDA. Phone + 86 21-5743-6998
Rua Diadema, 89, 1º andar, conjuntos 11 a 17, bairro Mauá Fax + 86 21-5743- 6939
no Município de São Caetano do Sul, Estado de São Paulo
CEP 09580-670, Brasil NIHON KOHDEN SINGAPORE PTE LTD
Phone +55 11-3044-1700 1 Maritime Square, #10-34 HarbourFront Centre
Fax +55 11-3044-0463 Singapore 099253
Phone + 65 6376-2210
Fax +65 6376-2264
Europe
NIHON KOHDEN INDIA PVT. LTD.
European Representative 308, Tower A, Spazedge, Sector 47, Sohna Road
Gurgaon-122 002 Haryana, India
NIHON KOHDEN EUROPE GmbH Toll-free +91 1800-103-8182
Raiffeisenstrasse 10, D-61191 Rosbach, Germany
Phone + 91 124-493 -1000
Phone + 49 6003-827- 0
Fax + 91 124-493 -1029
Fax + 49 6003- 827- 599
NIHON KOHDEN MIDDLE EAST FZE

NIHON KOHDEN DEUTSCHLAND GmbH JAFZA One Tower A, 19th floor, Office No. 1912
Raiffeisenstrasse 10, D-61191 Rosbach, Germany
P.O. Box 261516, Jebel Ali Free Zone, Dubai, U.A.E
Phone + 49 6003-827- 0
Phone + 971 4- 884-0080
Fax + 49 6003- 827- 599
Fax + 971 4- 880-0122
NIHON KOHDEN FRANCE SARL NIHON KOHDEN KOREA, INC.

8, rue Francois Delage, 94 230 Cachan, France
5F Miso Bldg.
Phone +33 1- 49-08 -05 -50
890-47 Daechi-dong, Gangnam-gu, Seoul, 135-280 Korea
Fax + 33 1- 49- 08-93 -32
Phone + 82 2-3273-2310
Fax + 82 2-3273 -2352
NIHON KOHDEN IBERICA S.L.
C/Ulises 75A, E-28043 Madrid, Spain
Phone +34 91-7-161080
Fax + 34 91- 3- 004676
Contact information is accurate as of January 2016. Visit www.nihonkohden.com for the latest information.
The model and serial number of your instrument are identified on the rear or bottom of the unit.
Write the model and serial number in the spaces provided below. Whenever you call your representative concerning
this instrument, mention these two pieces of information for quick and accurate service.
Model Serial Number
Your Representative

BSM3000 UG Part I-K

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

BSM3000 UG Part I-K

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BSM3000 UG Part I-K

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User’s Guide Part I

The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.

GENERAL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................. i 3

Section 1 General.................................................................................... 1.1 10

Section 2 Preparation............................................................................. 2.1

User’s Guide Part I BSM-3000 C.1

Safety Information........................................................................................ 2.5

Section 3 Necessary Settings Before Monitoring................................ 3.1

C.2 User’s Guide Part I BSM-3000

Section 4 Home Screen.......................................................................... 4.1 1

Section 5 Alarm Function....................................................................... 5.1

User’s Guide Part I BSM-3000 C.3

Alarm Master.......................................................................................................... 5.7

C.4 User’s Guide Part I BSM-3000

Individual Alarm Indications.................................................................................. 5.24 1

Section 6 Review Windows.................................................................... 6.1

User’s Guide Part I BSM-3000 C.5

Recording the Trendgraph.......................................................................... 6.14

C.6 User’s Guide Part I BSM-3000

Printing the Full Disclosure Waveform........................................................ 6.55 1

Section 7 12 Lead Analysis/12 Lead Windows..................................... 7.1

User’s Guide Part I BSM-3000 C.7

Section 8 Drug/Lung Function Windows.............................................. 8.1

Section 9 Interbed Window.................................................................... 9.1

Section 10 Recording............................................................................. 10.1

Recording on the ANALOG Window.......................................................... 10.6 1

Section 11 Reference.............................................................................. 11.1

User’s Guide Part I BSM-3000 C.9

2. When installing or storing the instrument, take the following precautions.

5. To Shutdown After Use

7. The instrument must not be altered or modified in any way.

8. Maintenance and Inspection

User’s Guide Part I BSM-3000 i

In the USA and Canada other warranty policies may apply.

ii User’s Guide Part I BSM-3000

3. Effect of direct or indirect electrostatic discharge:

6. Use with other equipment:

7. Use of unspecified accessory, transducer and/or cable:

User’s Guide Part I BSM-3000 iii

9. Measurement with excessive sensitivity:

10. Use with radiation therapy equipment:

iv User’s Guide Part I BSM-3000

Warnings, Cautions and Notes

User’s Guide Part I BSM-3000 v

Symbol Description Symbol Description

“Off” only for a part of instrument Output terminal

Alternating current Equipotential terminal

Battery charging Attention, consult operator’s manual

Out of paper Serial number

Record Date of manufacture

NIBP interval cCSAus mark*

NIBP start MR unsafe*

NIBP stop Data input/output

Menu SD card slot

Home Defibrillation-proof Type CF applied part

Symbol Description Symbol Description

Output terminal (ECG/BP OUT socket) Attention, consult operator’s manual

Symbol Description Symbol Description

Bedside Monitor BSM-35621 BSM-37631

QF-801P/901P/902P/903P/904P/905P/907P/908P/909P/911P/921P** KC-600P Cart